B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING) 2011 Regulations (Revision 2013), Curriculum & Syllabi BANNARI AMMAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY (An Autonomous Institution Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai Approved by AICTE-Accredited by NBA New Delhi, NACC with ‗A‘ Grade and ISO 9001:2008 Certified) SATHYAMANGALAM-638401 Erode District Tamilnadu Phone: 04295 226000 Fax: 04295 226666 Web: www.bitsathy.ac.in E-mail:[email protected]
Transcript
B.E. (ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
x
3
Programme Educational Objective(s)
After quite-a-few years of graduation, the EIE graduates would
PEO I work in core Instrumentation, allied industries and software companies
and /or become successful entrepreneurs
PEO II pursue their higher studies at the reputed institutions in India/abroad and
work in educational institutions, research organizations and engineering
consultancy companies
PEO III have the social responsibility, team work skill, leadership capabilities
and lifelong learning in their professional field
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
4
Program Outcome(s)
PO1. Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an
instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering
problems.
PO2. Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of
mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3. Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation
and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate
consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4. Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and
research methods, including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data
and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5. Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern
engineering and computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6. Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety,
legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional
engineering practice.
PO7. Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable
development.
PO8. Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms
of engineering practice.
PO9. Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary
teams.
PO10. Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering
community and with society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write
effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations and give and
receive clear instructions.
PO11. Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles
and apply these to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects
and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12. Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and
life- long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
xi
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
5
Mapping of PEOs and POs
POs
PEOs
Programme Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PEO I H H M M H L M M M H H H
PEO II H H L H M M L M L M L M
PEO III M L L L L H M H H L H H
H – High Correlation
M – Medium Correlation
L - Low Correlation
xii
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
6
xiii
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
7
B.E. ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING
(Minimum credits to be earned: 192)
First Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs POs
11O101 Engineering Mathematics I* I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11O102 Engineering Physics* I, II PO1, PO4 3 0 0 3.0
11O103 Engineering Chemistry* I, II PO1, PO3 3 0 0 3.0
Language Elective I‡ 3 0 0 3.0
11O105 Basics of Civil and Mechanical
Engineering** I, II PO1 4 0 0 4.0
11N106 ‗C‘ Programming
I, II, III PO1, PO3,
PO12
2 0 2 3.0
11N107 Electric Circuit Analysis I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11O108 Engineering Physics Laboratory# I, II PO1, PO4 0 0 2 1.0
11O109 Engineering Chemistry Laboratory# I, II PO1, PO4 0 0 2 1.0
Total 21 2 6 25.0
Second Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs Pos
11O201 Engineering Mathematics II* I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11O202 Environmental Science* III PO6, PO7 3 0 0 3.0
Language Elective II‡ 3 1 0 3.5
11N204 Materials Science I, II PO1 3 0 0 3.0
11N205 Electron Devices and Circuits I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N206 Object Oriented Programming I, II, III PO1, PO3,
PO12
3 0 0 3.0
11N207 Object Oriented Programming Laboratory I, II, III PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO12
0 0 3 1.5
11O208 Engineering Graphics$ I, II PO1, PO2 2 0 2 3.0
11N209 Workshop Practice I, II PO1 0 0 2 1.0
Total 20 3 7 25.0
* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech
‡ Common to all branches of B.E./B.Tech. (Continuous Assessment)
** Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech ECE, EIE, ME, BT (I Semester);CSE, EEE, FT, IT & TT (II Semester),
except AE & CE # Common for AE, CE, CSE, ECE & EIE (I Semester); EEE, ME, BT, FT, IT & TT (II Semester) $ Common for EEE, ME, BT, FT, IT & TT (I Semester); AE, CE, CSE, ECE & EIE (II Semester) Common to CSE, EEE, ECE, EIE and IT
xiv
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
8
Third Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs Pos
11O301 Engineering Mathematics III I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11N302 Digital Logic Circuits$ I, II PO1, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N303 Measurements and Instrumentation I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N304 Fluid and Solid Mechanics I, II PO1 3 1 0 3.5
11N305 Applied Thermodynamics I, II PO1 3 1 0 3.5
11N306 Electrical Machines I, II PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0
11N307 Electric Circuits and Machines Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N308 Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory I, II PO1, PO3, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N309 Fluid Controller and Applied
Thermodynamics Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
Total 18 5 9 25.0
Fourth Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs Pos
11N401 Numerical Methods and Linear
Programming I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N402 Control Engineering I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N403 Transducers Engineering I, II PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0
11N404 Communication Engineering I, II PO1 3 1 0 3.5
11N405 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers I, II PO1, PO3, PO5 3 1 0 3.5
11N406 Linear Integrated Circuits I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11N407 Sensors and Transducers Laboratory I, II PO1, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N408 Control Systems Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N409 Linear and Digital IC Laboratory I, II PO1, PO3, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
Total 18 5 9 25.0
Common for all branches of B.E/B.Tech except CSE and BT $ Common to EEE and EIE
xv
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
9
Fifth Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs POs
11N501 Industrial Instrumentation I I, II PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0
11N502 Digital Signal Processing I, II PO1, PO2 3 1 0 3.5
11N503 Virtual Instrumentation I, II PO1, PO2, PO5 2 0 2 3.0
11N504 Process Control I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 3 0 0 3.0
11N505 Creativity & Innovation and Total Quality
Management III PO7, PO8 3 0 0 3.0
Elective I - - - 3.0
11N507 Process Control Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO3,
PO4 , PO5 0 0 3 1.5
11N508 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Laboratory I, II PO1, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N509 Communication Engineering and Digital Signal Processing Laboratory
I, II PO1, PO4, PO5 0 0 3 1.5
11N510 Technical Seminar I I, III PO6, PO9, PO10 - - - 1.0
Total 14 1 11 24.0
Sixth Semester
Code No. Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs Pos
11N601 Industrial Instrumentation II I, II PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0
11N602 Analytical Instruments I, II PO1, PO2 3 0 0 3.0
11N603 VLSI Design I, II PO1, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N604 Embedded System I, II PO1, PO3 3 1 0 3.5
11N605 Power Plant Instrumentation I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 3 0 0 3.0
Elective II - - - 3.0
11N607 VLSI and Embedded System Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 0 0 3 1.5
11N608 Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory I, II PO1, PO3, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N609 Technical Seminar II I, III PO6, PO9, PO10 - - - 1.0
Total 15 2 6 23.0
Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours
may vary depending upon the electives courses offered.
xvi
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
10
Seventh Semester
Code
No. Course
Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs Pos
11O701 Engineering Economics* I, II, III PO1, PO6, PO7 3 0 0 3.0
11N702 Industrial Automation I, II PO1, PO3, PO4 3 1 0 3.5
11N703 Advanced Process Control I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 3 1 0 3.5
11N704 Bio Medical Instrumentation I, II PO1, PO2, PO3 3 0 0 3.0
Elective III - - - 3.0
Elective IV - - - 3.0
11N707 Design Project Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N708 Advanced Process Control Laboratory I, II PO1, PO2, PO4 0 0 3 1.5
11N709 Project Work Phase I I, II, III PO1 to PO12 - - - 3.0
Total 12 2 6 25.0
Eighth Semester
Code
No.
Course Objective(s) & Outcomes
L T P C PEOs POs
11O801 Professional Ethics* III PO6, PO7, PO8 2 0 0 2.0
Elective V - - - 3.0
Elective VI - - - 3.0
11N804 Project Work Phase II I, II, III PO1 to PO12 - - - 12.0
Total 2 0 0 20.0
* Common for all branches of B.E./B.Tech Minimum credits to be earned. The maximum number of credits as well as the total number of L T P hours may
vary depending upon the electives courses chosen.
xvii
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
11
ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVES
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE-I
L T P C
11O10B Basic English I 3 0 0 3.0
11O10C Communicative English 3 0 0 3.0
LANGUAGE ELECTIVE-II
11O20B Basic English II 3 1 0 3.5
11O20C Advanced Communicative English 3 1 0 3.5
11O20G German 3 1 0 3.5
11O20J Japanese 3 1 0 3.5 11O20F French 3 1 0 3.5
11O20H Hindi 3 1 0 3.5
DISCIPLINE ELECTIVES
11N001 Fiber Optics and Laser Instruments 3 0 0 3.0
11N002 Advanced Control Engineering 3 0 0 3.0
11N003 Operating Systems 3 0 0 3.0 11N004 Electromagnetic Theory 3 0 0 3.0
11N005 Mechatronics 3 0 0 3.0
11N006 Hydraulics and Pneumatics 3 0 0 3.0
11N007 Microprocessor based System Design 3 0 0 3.0
11N008 Digital Control System 3 0 0 3.0
11N009 Data Communication and Networks 3 0 0 3.0
11N010 Power Electronics and Drives 3 0 0 3.0
11N011 Instrumentation in Petrochemical Industries 3 0 0 3.0
11N012 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 3 0 0 3.0
11N013 Robotics and Automation 3 0 0 3.0
11N014 Adaptive Control 3 0 0 3.0 11N015 Micro Electro Mechanical System 3 0 0 3.0
11N016 Renewable Energy Sources 3 0 0 3.0
11N017 Optimal Control 3 0 0 3.0
11N018 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3.0
11O008 Organizational Behavior and Management 3 0 0 3.0
Applications of Laplace transforms for solving the ordinary differential equations up to second order with constant
coefficients-application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B S Grewal ., Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi 2000 .
2. K A Lakshminarayanan ,K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi ,Mathematics for Engineers, Volume I, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
Reference(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume I, S. Chand Co.,
New Delhi-2009.
2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, .Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore 2008.
4. C. RayWylie and C. Louis. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Ltd, 2003.
11O102 ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to all branches) 3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart fundamental knowledge in the areas of acoustics, crystallography and new engineering materials.
To apply fundamental knowledge in the area of LASERS and fiber optics
To use the principles of quantum physics in the respective fields
At the end of the course the students are familiar with the basic principles and applications of physics in
various fields.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
17
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Summarize the concepts of acoustics, ultrasonic and crystal physics.
2. Explain the theory/applications of Interference, fiber optics and laser
3. Interpret the perception of quantum physics, X-rays and engineering materials.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu or equivalent
subject
Assessment Pattern
Remember
1. Give the classifications of sound.
2. Write a note on loudness. 3. Define decibel.
4. What is meant by reverberation time?
5. Define magnetostriction effect.
6. Give the classification of crystals.
7. Define Miller indices.
8. Define lattice and unit cells.
9. Mention the applications of X-ray diffraction.
10. Write a short note on air wedge.
11. List the applications of air wedge method.
12. Give the applications of LASER.
13. Give the classification of laser based on refractive index.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model Examination
Semester
End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
18
14. Write a note on holography.
15. Draw the block diagram of fiber optic communication system.
16. Define the term Compton effect.
17. What is the physical significance of wave function?
18. What are metallic glasses?
19. Write a note on shape memory alloys.
20. Mention the merits of nano materials.
21. List the advantages of ceramic materials.
Understand
1. How Weber-Fechner law is formulated?
2. Explain the characteristics of loudness.
3. Elucidate the significance of timber.
4. How the magnetostriction effect is utilized in the production of ultrasonic waves?
5. What is the importance of reverberation time in the construction of building?
6. Give the importance of lattice and lattice planes in a crystal.
7. How do you measure the d-spacing?
8. How do you calculate the packing factor of BCC structure?
9. How air wedge is used in determining the flatness of a thin plate?
10. Give the importance of optical pumping in the production of LASER. 11. What are the various steps involved in holography?
12. How can you derive the acceptance angle in fiber?
13. Why the wave function is called as probability density?
14. Why the wave function is finite inside the potential well?
15. Why the particle is not escaping through the walls of the well?
16. How ceramic materials are prepared by slip casting technique?
17. What are the advantages of nano materials?
Apply
1. Discuss the factors affecting the acoustics of buildings.
2. Ultrasonic waves are electromagnetic waves. Justify.
3. Sketch the circuit diagram for piezo electric oscillator. 4. How can you determine the velocity of ultrasonic by acoustic grating?
5. Explain how Miller indices are used in crystal structures?
6. How do you calculate the packing factor for FCC structure?
7. Draw the crystal lattice for (110) plane.
8. Why does air wedge occur only in the flat glass plates?
9. Explain the various steps involved in holography techniques.
10. Discuss the particle in a one dimensional box by considering infinite length of well.
11. Explain how shape memory alloy change its shape?
12. How can you prepare the nano materials synthesized by sol gel technique?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare magnetostriction and piezo-electric method in the production of ultrasonic waves.
2. Differentiate musical sound and noises.
3. Compare the packing factor of BCC, FCC and HCP structures.
4. Distinguish between photography and holography.
5. Compare slip casting and isostatic pressing.
Unit I
Acoustics and Ultrasonics
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
19
Acoustics: Classification of sound – characteristics of musical sound – loudness – Weber – Fechner law – decibel –
absorption coefficient – reverberation – reverberation time – Sabine‘s formula (growth & decay). Factors affecting
acoustics of buildings and their remedies. Ultrasonics: Ultrasonic production – magnetostriction - piezo electric
methods. Applications: Determination of velocity of ultrasonic waves (acoustic grating) - SONAR.
The phenomenon of cavitation. 9 Hours
Unit II
Crystallography
Crystal Physics: Lattice – unit cell – Bravais lattices – lattice planes – Miller indices – ‗d‘ spacing in cubic lattice –
calculation of number of atoms per unit cell – atomic radius – coordination number – packing factor for SC, BCC,
1. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2011.
2. P. K. Palanisami, Physics for Engineers, Vol. 1, Scitech Pub. (India) Pvt. Ltd., Chennai, 2002.
Reference(s)
1. M. N. Avadhanulu and P. G. Kshirsagar, A Textbook(s) of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2005
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publication, New Delhi, 2006. 3. V. Rajendran and A. Marikani, Physics I, TMH, New Delhi, 2004.
4. Arthur Beiser, Concepts of Modern Physics, TMH, 2008.
5. R. K. Gaur and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpat Rai Publishers, New Delhi, 2006
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
20
11O103 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Imparting knowledge on the principles of water characterization, treatment methods and industrial
applications.
Understanding the principles and application of electrochemistry and corrosion science.
Basic information and application of polymer chemistry, nanotechnology and analytical techniques.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Explain the water and material processing.
2. Interpret the notion of corrosion, polymer and Nanotechnology..
3. Identify the instruments for chemical analysis.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Chemistry of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu or equivalent
subject
Assessment Pattern
S.No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
21
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Distinguish between alkaline and non alkaline hardness.
2. What is meant by priming? How it is prevented?
3. What is meant by caustic embrittlement?
4. What is the role of calgon conditioning in water treatment?
5. What is break point chlorination?
6. Write the significances of EMF series.
7. Define single electrode potential of an electrode.
8. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells.
9. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
10. What are reference electrodes?
11. Mention the various factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
12. State Pilling-Bedworth rule.
13. What are the constituents of water repellant paints?
14. What is pitting corrosion?
15. Write any four applications of galvanic series.
16. Differentiate between nanocluster and nanocrystal.
17. List the monomers of nylon -6 and nylon-11.
18. Define functionality of a monomer.
19. What are the monomers of epoxy resin?
20. Differentiate between addition and condensation polymers.
21. What are auxochromes? Give examples.
22. Give any two applications of IR spectroscopy.
23. State Beer-Lambert‘s law.
24. Write any two applications of flame photometry.
25. What are the limitations of Beer-Lambert‘s law?
Understand
1. Soft water is not demineralized water whereas demineralized water is soft water- Justify.
2. Why sodium carbonate conditioning is not advisable for high pressure boilers?
3. Boiling cannot give protection to water for all time – Reason out.
4. What are the significances of RO method of water treatment?
5. Compare reversible and irreversible cells?
6. Reason out why do the properties of materials change at nanoscale?
7. Why calomel electrode is called as secondary reference electrode?
8. A steel screw in a brass marine hardware corrodes. Why?
9. What is the action of brine solution on iron rod?
10. Why magnesium element is coupled with underground pipe line?
11. Which is the easier way to control corrosion?
12. Lithium battery is the cell of future- Justify.
13. Iron corrodes at a faster rate than aluminium- Give reason.
14. Differentiate between electro and elctroless platting.
15. How thermoplastics differ from thermosetting plastics?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
22
16. TEFLON is superior to other addition polymers-Justify.
17. Write any two advantages of free radical polymerization.
18. Calculate the degree of freedom of water molecule.
19. Differentiate between AAS and flame photometry.
20. What is the role of thiocyanide solution in the estimation of iron by colorimetry?
Apply
1. A water sample contains 204 mgs of CaSO4 and 73 mgs of Mg(HCO3)2 per litre. Calculate the total
hardness in terms of CaCO3 equivalence.
2. 100 ml of sample water has hardness equivalent to 12.5ml of 0.08N MgSO4. Calculate hardness in ppm.
3. What is the single electrode potential of a half cell of zinc electrode dipped in a 0.01M ZnSO4 solution at
A detailed survey on application of polymer in day to day life.
9 Hours
Unit V
Instrumental Techniques of Chemical Analysis
Beer – Lambert‘s law - Problems. UV visible and IR spectroscopy: Principle- Instrumentation (block diagram only)
- Applications. Colorimetry: Principle – Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of iron by colorimetry.
Flame photometry: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of sodium by flame photometry.
Atomic absorption spectroscopy: Principle - Instrumentation (block diagram only) - Estimation of nickel by atomic
absorption spectroscopy.
Applications of analytical instruments in medical field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. P. C. Jain and M. Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications., New Delhi, 2009.
2. R. Sivakumar and N. Sivakumar, Engineering Chemistry, TMH, New Delhi, 2009.
3. B. R. Puri, L. R. Sharma and Madan S. Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Shoban Lal Nagin
Chand & Co., 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Sashi Chawla, Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Rai Publications, New Delhi, 2003.
2. B. S. Bahl, G. D. Tuli and Arun Bahl, Essentials of Physical Chemistry, S. Chand & Company, 2008.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
24
3. J. C. Kuriacose and J. Rajaram, Chemistry in Engineering & Technology, Vol. 1&2, TMH, 2009.
4. C. P. Poole Jr., J. F. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley India Private Limited, 2007.
5. Andre Arsenault and Geoffrey A. Ozin, Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to
Nanomaterials, Royal Society of Chemistry, London, 2005.
6. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. James Holler &S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, Wiley,
2004.
11O105 BASICS OF CIVIL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
4 0 0 4.0
Objective(s)
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Civil Engineering focusing building materials, surveying,
foundation and transportation Engineering
To impart basic knowledge in the field of Mechanical Engineering focusing on generation of power from
various natural resources and to know about various types of Boilers and Turbines used for power generation and to understand the working of IC engines and basic manufacturing processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Explain the general concepts of basic civil engineering..
2. Classify the transportation engineering Realize the perception of IC engines, refrigeration, engineering
materials and manufacturing process.
3. Interpret the perception of IC engines, refrigeration, engineering materials and manufacturing process
4. Compare the alternate energy sources, power plants and Boilers.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
† Test II
† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 40 40 40 40
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the classifications of stones?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be
calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated by giving equal weightage (50%) for both Civil and
Mechanical Engineering
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
25
2. What is the frog in a brick?
3. What is quarrying?
4. What do you mean by dressing of stones?
5. What are the systems of bearing?
6. How the surveying is classified based on purpose?
7. Define Benchmark and state its effects.
8. What are the accessories used in chain surveying?
9. Define bearing of a line.
10. Define leveling & state its Objective(s). 11. State the Objective(s) and requirement of good foundation.
12. Mention the site improvement techniques.
13. Define bearing capacity of soil.
14. How stone masonry is classified?
15. Define Beam, Column and Lintel.
16. What are the basic forms of roof?
17. How floors are classified based on floor finish?
18. List the materials used for damp proofing.
19. How roads are classified?
20. What do you mean by W.B. M. road?
21. Define Gauge. 22. What is a permanent way?
23. How bridges are classified?
24. What are the advantages of railways?
25. What are docks?
26. Classify sleepers.
27. What are the requirements of a sleeper?
28. What are the types of traffic signs?
29. What are the advantages of road signs?
30. What are the prohibitory signs?
31. What is the main function of hangars?
32. What are the sources of Energy Generation?
33. What are the accessories used in a boiler? 34. Define Turbine.
35. Compare and contrast fire tube and water tube boiler?
36. List the types of steam Turbines?
37. Classify the I.C engine.
38. List out the Part of the I.C. Engine.
39. Define the terms: Top Dead Center, Bottom Dead Center.
40. Define the term: Compression Ratio.
41. What are the different sources of energy?
42. Name four non-renewable sources of energy.
43. Name some renewable sources of energy.
44. Name four solid/liquid/gaseous/ fuels. 45. Name two nuclear fuels.
46. What are the advantages of wind energy?
47. State some of the applications of steam boilers.
48. Classify different steam boilers.
49. What do you understand by Scavenging
50. What do you understand by the term IC engine?
51. What are the operations performed on a Lathe?
52. What is impulse turbine? Give example.
53. What is Reaction turbine? Give example.
54. Define Boiler.
55. Classify Boilers.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
26
56. List out the Boiler Mountings and Accessories.
57. Define Refrigeration.
58. Define refrigerant. Give some examples of refrigerant.
59. Define C.O.P.
Understand
1. What are the qualities of good building stone?
2. What are the various stages of manufacturing brick?
3. What is mean by concrete?
4. State the properties of cement concrete.
5. What is curing of concrete?
6. What is water – cement ratio? 7. What is the difference between a plan and a map?
8. Differentiate between plane surveying and geodetic surveying.
9. State the principles of surveying.
10. What is the use of cross – staff?
11. What are the functions of foundation?
12. Differentiate between shallow foundation & deep foundation
13. What are the causes of failure of foundation?
14. Compare stone masonry and brick masonry.
15. Why bonding in brick wall is necessary?
16. State the special features of English and Flemish bond.
17. Define super elevation. 18. What are the uses of fish plates?
19. What are the necessities of highway drainage?
20. What are the three stages of construction of a new railway track?
21. Define the term visibility.
22. Define passenger flow.
23. Differentiate between wharf and jetty.
24. What are the requirements of a good harbour?
25. What are the requirements of a good naval port?
26. How Solar Energy is generated?
27. How Energy is Generated using steam Turbines?
28. How power plants are classified?
29. Compare and contrast reaction and impulse turbines. 30. How energy is generated from Diesel Power Plants?
31. What is the difference between renewable and non-renewable sources of energy?
32. Mention the applications of solar energy.
33. What is the function of a hydraulic turbine?
34. What is the function of a surge tank?
35. What is the function of a moderator?
36. What are the functions of a control rod?
37. Name of the important components of diesel power plant.
38. Name the important parts of gas turbine.
39. State the function of condenser in steam power plant.
40. What are the requirements of a good boiler? 41. What are the specific advantages of water-tube boilers?
42. What are the aims of pre-heating of air in a boiler?
43. State the function of economizer.
44. How does a fusible plug function as a safety device?
45. What is the function of a steam nozzle?
46. What is the function of flywheel?
47. What is the function of a spark plug?
48. What is the function of a fuel injector in diesel engine?
49. Why is cooling necessary in an IC engine?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
27
50. Define compression ratio of an IC engine.
51. List the ports used in a 2-stroke engine
52. What are the requirements of a good boiler?
53. What is the difference between impulse and reaction turbine?
54. How energy is generated from Nuclear Power Plants?
55. How energy is generated from Hydro Power Plants?
Apply/Evaluate
1. What is Hardness?
2. What are the operations to be performed while setting up a plane table at a station?
3. Explain the steps involved in measuring vertical angle of an object using theodolite.
4. Explain the methods to improve bearing capacity of soil.
5. What are the points to be observed in the construction of brick masonry?
6. Explain the method of construction of cement concrete flooring.
7. What are the methods of applying surface dressing in bituminous roads?
8. Explain the construction steps in bituminous macadam road.
9. How can you express the hardness number of stones?
10. Apply the concept of power generation and saving from other energy sources.
11. Apply the concept of Refrigeration in Heat removal and Heat addition.
Unit I
Introduction to Civil Engineering History, development and scope of Civil Engineering - Functions of Civil Engineers. Construction Materials:
Characteristics of good building materials such as stones - Bricks, A.C. sheets - G.I. sheets and Ceramic tiles -
Timber, cement - Aggregates and concrete. Surveying: Definition and purpose – Classification – Basic principles –
Measurement of length by chains and tapes – Calculation of area of a plot – Measurement of bearings and angles
using a prismatic compass – Leveling – Contours
Application of contours
10 Hours
Unit II
General Concepts Relating to Buildings
Selection of site – Basic functions of buildings – Major components of buildings. Foundations: Purpose of
foundation – Bearing capacity of soils – Types of foundations. Proper methods of construction of: Brick masonry –
Stone masonry – Hollow Block masonry. Beams – Lintels – Columns – Flooring – Doors and windows –
Roofing Damp proof course – Surface finishes
10 Hours
Unit III
Transportation Engineering
Classification of Highways – Cross sections of water bound macadam - Bituminous and cement concrete roads –
Traffic signs and signals. Importance of railways - Gauges – Components of a permanent way – Classification of
bridges – Components of Airport
Examples of Marvelous Structures
10 Hours
Unit IV
Engineering Materials and Manufacturing Processes
Classification of Engineering materials, Mechanical properties and uses of cast iron, steel, and High Speed Steel. Introduction to casting process, Green sand moulding - Pattern, Melting furnaces - Cupola and Electric Furnace.
Metal Forming - Forging Process. Introduction to Arc and Gas Welding. Centre Lathe - Specifications - Principal
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
28
Facing, Boring, and Chamfering - Lathe tools and Materials. Drilling – Radial drilling machine - Specification and
Operation.
Milling operation
10 Hours
Unit V
Internal Combustion Engines and Refrigeration Classification of IC engines, Main components of IC engines, working of a 4 stroke & 2 stroke petrol & diesel
engine, differences between 4 stroke and 2 stroke engine, Lubrication and Cooling systems in IC Engines.
Refrigeration: Working Principle of Vapour Compression & Vapour Absorption System, Domestic refrigerator Domestic air conditioning
10 Hours
Unit VI
Alternate Sources of Energy, Power Plants and Boilers
Solar, Wind, Tidal, Geothermal and Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion (OTEC). Power Plant: Classification of
Power Plants- Steam - Nuclear, Diesel, and Hydro Power Plants. Types of Boilers – Simple Vertical, Babcock and
Wilcox and La-Mont Boiler, Differences between fire tube and water tube boiler. Types of steam turbines- working
of a single stage impulse and reaction turbines
Biomass and Biofuels in power generation
10 Hours
Total: 60 Hours Textbook(s)
1. M. S. Palanichamy, Basic Civil Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi,
2009
2. G. Shanmugam & S Ravindran, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company
Limited, New Delhi, 2010
Reference(s)
1. N. Arunachalam, Bascis of Civil Engineering, Pratheeba Publishers, 2000
2. B. K. Sarkar, Thermal Engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008
3. P. N. Rao, Manufacturing Technology: Foundry, Forming and Welding, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
4. S. R. J. Shantha Kumar, Basic Mechanical Engineering, Hi-tech Publications, Mayiladuthurai, 2000 5. http://www.tutorvista.co.in/content/science/science-ii/sources-energy/sources-energyindex.php
11N106 ‘C’ PROGRAMMING
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
To develop the basic programming skills
To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers
To implement file concepts and operations
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
29
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Summarize the basic terminology used in computer programming.
2. Write, compile and debug the programs in C language
3. Design programs involving structures, loops, functions, and pointers.
4. Create/update basic data files using different data structures.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic Knowledge in Computer Science.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†3
Test II†
Model
Examination†
End Semester
Examination
1 Remember 20 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create - 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the five programming languages commonly used.
2. Define Algorithm and Flowchart
3. Define structured programming.
4. Describe the general structure of a C program.
5. List the rules for defining a variable.
6. Name the I/O functions in C?
7. Describe a header file. 8. State the associatively property of an operator.
9. Define a ternary operator.
10. Define an array and a pointer.
11. Mention the significance of function.
Understand
1. Distinguish while loop with do – while Loop.
2. Defend the advantages of using Macro?
3. Explain how recursive functions affect the run time efficiency.
4. Differentiate between Structure and Union in C.
5. Estimate memory management in C. 6. Explain garbage collection done in C.
Apply
1. Write a recursive function to calculate the factorial of number.
2. Write a C program to check whether the given number is palindrome or not.
3. Write a program to check whether the given number is prime or not.
3 The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.
The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
calculated for 50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
30
4. Write a C program to find the roots of quadratic equation ax2+bx+c=0.
5. Write a C program to find average of ‗n‘ numbers.
6. Write a program to generate the pay slip of an employee using Structure.
7. Write a C program to search for a specified element in an array.
8. Write a program to compute Matrix Multiplication.
9. Write a program to perform swapping of two numbers using pointers.
10. Write a program to read the content of the file and copy it to another file.
Analyze
1. Distinguish while loop and for loop.
2. Why are pointers so powerful? Analyze their efficiency.
3. Point out the advantage of using recursion over looping control structures.
Give a suitable example.
4. Identify the limitation of array of pointers to strings using a sample example.
Evaluate
1. Compare the keywords ‗break‘ and ‗continue‘.
2. Justify the need for Type Casting over Type Conversion.
3. Compare and contrast I/O mapped I/O with Memory mapped I/O.
4. Appraise the various built-in String functions.
Create
1. Create a structure to store the following details: Rollno, Name, Mark1, Mark2, Mark3, Total,
Average, Result and Class. Write a program to read Rollno, name and 3 subject marks. Find out the
total, result and class as follows:
a) Total is the addition of 3 subject marks.
b) Result is "Pass" if all subject marks are greater than or equal to 50 else "Fail".
c) Class will be awarded for students who have cleared 3 subjects
i.Class "Distinction" if average >=75
ii.Class "First" if average lies between 60 to 74 (both inclusive)
iii.Class "Second" if average lies between 50 & 59 (both inclusive) d) Repeat the above program to manipulate 10 students' details and sort the structures as per rank
obtained by them.
Unit I
Introduction
Computer languages - Creating and Running Programs-System Development - Flowchart - Introduction to C
language – background - C Programs: Identifiers – Types -Variables - Constants - Input/output - Structure of C
Program-Expressions- Operator Precedence and Associatively -Type Conversion.
Flowchart
6 Hours
Unit II
Control Structures
Selection - Making Decisions - Logical data and Operators - Two Way Selection - Multiway Selection - More Standard Functions - Incremental Development – Repetition – Concept of Loop - Pre-test and Post Test loops-
Initialization and Updating.
Binary Operators
6 Hours
Unit III
Arrays and Strings
Arrays-Concepts-Using arrays in C -array Applications-Sorting- selection sort – bubble sort - Searching of Arrays-
Two Dimensional Arrays-Strings: String Concepts -String Input/output Functions- Arrays of Strings-String
Manipulation Functions.
Multi dimensional array
6 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
31
Unit IV
Functions and Pointers
Functions-Designing structured Programs- Functions in C- User Defined Functions-Standard Functions –Storage
classes and Type Qualifier- Introduction to Pointers- Arrays with pointers- Function with pointers-Pointers to
Pointers
Storage classes
6 Hours
Unit V
Structures, Union and Files Structure and Union - Programming Application -Text Input/Output: Files-Streams-Standard Library Input/Output
Functions- Formatting Input/Output functions- Character Input/Output functions.
Programming Application
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Behrouz A.Forouzan and Richard F. Gilberg, Computer Science: A Structure program approach using C,
Cengage learning, 2008
Reference(s)
1. D.M.Ritchie and B.W.Kernighan, C Programming Language, PHI, 2007
2. Deitel & Deitel, C How to program, PHI, 2010 3. Herbert Schildt, C- The complete Reference, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Gary J Bronson, First book of ANSI C, Thomson Learning, 2001
5. Byron S. Gottfried, Schaum's, Outline of Programming with C, McGraw Hill, 2006
Lab components
1. Write a program to demonstrate the characteristics of different data types in C program.
2. Write a program to demonstrate the operator precedence.
3. Write a program to implement a calculator.
4. Write a program to implement Fibonacci series.
5. Write a program to implement sorting.
6. Write a program to reverse an input string.
7. Write a program to find multiplication of two matrices. 8. Write a program to swap two integers using pointers.
9. Write a program to read and write structures into a file.
10. Write a program to append a string into a file.
Total: 30 hours
Total: 30 +30 hours
11N107 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To understand the concepts of DC circuit elements, circuit laws and network reduction and to solve the
electrical network using mesh and nodal analysis.
To understand the concepts of AC circuit elements, waveforms, circuit laws, network reduction, active,
reactive and apparent powers, power factor.
To solve the electrical network using network theorems.
To understand the model of resonance in series and parallel circuits and to know the basic concepts of
coupled circuits.
To analyze the transient response of series and parallel RLC circuits and to solve problems in time domain
using Laplace Transform.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
32
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
At the end of this subject, students should be able to:
1. Analyze simple DC and AC circuits.
2. Apply and examine network theorems for simple circuits.
3. Interpret the circuit resonance, coupled circuits and transients..
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu or equivalent
subject
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember 1. Define electric circuit.
2. List the classifications of electric circuit components.
3. Describe the V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
4. State dependent and independent sources.
5. Define form factor.
6. Define Peak factor.
7. List the different type of power in single phase a.c. circuits and write their formulae.
8. Define power factor.
9. Describe about impedance and admittance.
10. State superposition theorem.
11. State thevenin‘s theorem.
12. State norton‘s theorem. 13. State reciprocity theorem.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
33
14. Define resonance.
15. Recall resonant frequency expression for series resonance circuit.
16. State Q factor.
17. Define bandwidth.
18. Draw the series resonance and parallel curves.
19. List the applications of resonance.
20. Define coupled circuits.
21. Describe self inductance.
22. Describe mutual inductance. 23. Define time constant.
24. Define coefficient of coupling.
25. Describe transient response.
Understand
1. Explain the algorithm for mesh loop current analysis method.
2. Explain the algorithm for node voltage method.
3. Show the V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
4. Discuss the concepts of current division and voltage division techniques.
5. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor of the circuit, bandwidth and draw the
resonance curve for a series resonance circuit. 6. Derive the expressions for current, resonant frequency, quality factor of the circuit, bandwidth and draw the
resonance curve for a parallel resonance circuit.
7. Explain in detail the concept of implementing any two types of forcing function on assumed RLC
circuit, and obtain its transient response.
8. Show the peak factor value for sinusoidal waveform.
9. Explain the sinusoidal response of the following single phase ac circuits.
a. Pure resistive circuit
b. Pure inductive circuit
c. Pure capacitive circuit.
10. Compute the relation between line and phase values of voltage and current in (i) star connection (ii) Delta
connection.
11. Discuss the advantages of three phase circuits when compared with single phase circuits? 12. Explain the applications of network theorems.
13. Express the formulae for star to delta conversion technique.
14. Express the formulae for delta to star conversion technique.
15. Represent the expression for coefficient of coupling.
16. Distinguish the difference between parallel RL, RC and RLC transient circuits?
17. Represent the fall time characteristics.
Apply
1. Four resistors of 2 Ω, 3 Ω, 4 Ω, 5 Ω respectively are connected in parallel. What voltage must be applied to
the group in order that power of 100watts may be absorbed also find current flowing through the circuit.
2. A resistance R is connected in series with a parallel circuit comprising two resistors 12 Ω and 8
Ω respectively. The total power dissipated in the circuit is 70watts when the applied
voltage is 220Volts.Calculate the value of R. In a RLC series circuit consists of resistance 15 Ω, Inductive
reactance 7.5 Ω and capacitive reactance 12 Ω are connected with 230 Ω, 50Hz supply. Calculate i) current
ii) Power factor iii) Apparent, active & reactive powers iv) Capacitance & Inductance v) Impedance. Also
draw the phasor diagram.
3. An inductive coil takes 10A and dissipates 1000 Watts, when connected to supply at 250V, 25Hz.Calculate
the resistance, the inductance the impedance and power factor.
4. For the given circuit (Figure 1) discover the branch currents using mesh loop current analysis method.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
34
Figure 1
5. Calculate current through 20Ω resistance (Figure 2) by using Thevenin‘s theorem.
Figure 2
6. Discover current through 10Ω resistance (Figure 3) by Norton‘s theorem.
Figure 3
7. Judge the superposition theorem to calculate the current through 5 Ω resistances for the network shown
below (Figure 4).
Figure 4
8. Three resistors 25 Ω, 50 Ω and 75 Ω are connected in star. Examine the equivalent delta resistors?
9. In the circuit shown below (Figure 5) switch is closed at t=0. Produce the expression for the current in
circuit and find I at t=0.25 sec.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
35
Figure 5
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Design a V-I relationships between the R, L and C.
2. Compare series and parallel circuits.
3. Illustrate the three phase and single phase ac circuits. 4. Justify LC combinations are not used in electric circuit?
5. Compare rise time and fall time.
6. When the switch is closed at t=0, find the current I(t) and the voltage across R, L & C and analyze it
completely.
7. Outline maximum power transfer theorem.
8. Point out the formulae for star to delta transformation.
9. Point out the formulae for delta to star transformation.
10. Illustrate the transient response of series and parallel RL, RC and RLC circuits.
Create
1. Do the following operations and write the result in polar form.
i) (5+j4) X (-4-j6) ii) (-2-j5) / (5+j7)
2. Two impedances 14+j5 ohms and 18+j10 ohms are connected in parallel across a 200V, 50 Hz supply.
Construte i) the admittance of each branch and of entire circuit, ii) the total current, power and power
factor.
3. Produce the advantages of time domain analysis of circuits.
4. Propose the transient response expression for series and parallel RL circuits.
5. Reconstruct the phasor diagram for pure resistive circuit.
6. Tell about Peak factor?
7. Construct the different type of power in single phase a.c. circuits and write their formulae.
8. Explain power factor.
9. Propose the formulae for star to delta conversion technique. 10. Propose the node voltages at all points using nodal analysis method for the network (Figure 6) shown
below.
Figure 6
Unit I
DC Circuit Concepts
Electric circuit components – Ohms law - Kirchhoff‘s Laws – V-I relationships of R, L and C – Independent sources
dependent sources – Series and parallel circuits – voltage division – current division- Mesh and nodal analysis -
Nodal conductance matrix and mesh resistance matrix.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
36
Kirchhoff’s current Law
9 Hours
Unit II
Alternating Voltages and Currents
Generation of AC voltages – Average Value – RMS Value – Form factor and Peak factor-Phase relation in pure
resistor, inductor and capacitor – Power and power factor – concepts of impedance and admittance – analysis of
simple circuits - Generation of Three phase voltages - Phase sequence.
Energy stored in Inductive circuit
9 Hours
Unit III
Network Theorems and it’s Applications
Star Delta Transformation – Super position theorem – Thevenin‘s theorem – Norton‘s theorem – Reciprocity
theorem - Substitution theorem – Maximum power transfer theorem.
Maximum power transfer theorem
9 Hours
Unit IV
Resonance & Coupled Circuits
Series resonant circuits – Bandwidth of an RLC circuit - Q factor and its effect on bandwidth - Parallel resonance -
Coupled circuits – Self and mutual inductance – Inductances in series and parallel – Mutual and leakage flux –
Coefficient of Coupling. Inductances in series and parallel
9 Hours
Unit V
Transients
Time domain analysis of circuits – Linear differential equations for series and parallel RL, RC and RLC Circuits – Transient response – Time Constant – Rise and fall times.
Natural frequency
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text Book
1. A. Sudhakar and S. P. Shyam Mohan, Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
Reference(s)
1. Charles K.Alexander, Fundamentals of Electric Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi,
2010
2. William H. Hayt, Jack E. Kemmerly, and Steven M. Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, Tata McGraw
3. Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2010
4. Ravish R Singh, Electrical Networks, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co Ltd, New Delhi, 2008
11O108 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LABORATORY
(Common to all branches)
0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
To know how to execute experiments properly, presentation of observations and arrival of conclusions.
It is an integral part of any science and technology program.
To view and realize the theoretical knowledge acquired by the students through experiments
At the end of the course, the students able to realize the theoretical knowledge acquired through
experiments.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
37
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, student will able to
1. Determine moment of inertia, Young‘s moduli, refractive index and frequency of vibration.
2. Obtain conductance, thermal conductivity, viscosity and thickness of a liquid/solid
3. Find out the wave length of mercury spectrum and laser
Prerequisite(s) Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary and State board of Government of Tamilnadu or equivalent
subject
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester
End Examination
Preparation 10 15
Execution 10 15
Observation & Results 10 15
Record 5 -
Model Examination 10 -
Viva Voce 5 5
Total 50 50
List of Experiments
1. Determination of moment of inertia and rigidity modulus of wire using torsion pendulum
(symmetrical masses method).
2. Comparison of Young‘s moduli of two different materials subjected to non-uniform bending.
3. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor using Lee‘s disc.
4. Determination of frequency of a vibrating rod subjected to a.c voltage by longitudinal and transverse
modes of vibration.
5. Determination of viscosity of a liquid - Poiseulle‘s method.
6. Determination of thickness of a thin wire - air wedge method.
7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – grating.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
38
8. Determination of refractive index of a liquid and solid using traveling microscope.
9. Determination of energy band gap of a semiconductor diode.
10. Determination of wavelength of LASER and particle size of a given powder.
Total: 30 Hours
11O109 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(Common to all branches)
0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
Imparting knowledge on basic concepts and its applications of chemical analysis.
Training in chemical and instrumental methods.
Develop skills in estimation of a given sample by chemical and instrumental methods.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will able to
1. Analysis of water and alkaline.
2. Determine the rate of corrosion, molecular weight and strength of iron.
3. Estimate the acid quality.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic Knowledge of Volumetric and Gravimetric analysis.
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester
End Examination
Preparation 10 15
Execution 10 15
Observation & Results 10 15
Record 5 -
Model Examination 10 -
Viva Voce 5 5
Total 50 50
List of Experiments
1. Preparation of molar and normal solutions of the following substances – oxalic acid, sodium carbonate, sodium
hydroxide, hydrochloric acid.
2. Water quality of BIT campus – River/Bore well water with respect to Hardness, TDS and pH. 3. Comparison of alkalinities of the given water samples.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
39
4. Conductometric titration of mixture of acids.
5. Determination of strength of iron by potentiometric method using potassium dichromate.
6. Determination of molecular weight of a polymer by viscometry method.
7. Estimation of iron (thiocyanate method) in the given solution by spectrophotometric method.
8. Determination of strength of hydrochloric acid by sodium hydroxide using pH meter.
9. Determination of sodium and potassium ions in water sample by flame photometric method.
10. Determination of corrosion rate and inhibition efficiency by weight loss measurements.
Total: 30 Hours
11O201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II
(Common to all branches)
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
Acquire knowledge to use multiple integrals to find area and volume of surface and solids respectively
Have a good grasp of analytic functions, complex integration and their interesting properties and its
applications
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Solve problems using function of several variables.
2. Resolve problems with multiple and complex integration. 3. Solve problems using vector calculus and analytic functions.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Mathematics of Higher secondary and Engineering Mathematics I
Assessment pattern
S. No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
4 Test II
1 Model Examination
1 Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 40 40 40 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze/ Evaluate 10 10 10 20
5 Create 00 00 00 00
Total 100 100 100 100
4 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
40
Remember
1. Define Jacobian in two dimensions.
2. State Green‘s theorem.
3. Define directional derivative of a vector point function.
4. Define analytic function.
5. What is the formula for finding the residue of a double pole?
6. State Cauchy‘s integral formula.
7. Write the necessary condition for a function f (z) to be analytic.
8. Write the formula for unit normal vector?
9. Write all the types of singularities.
10. State the sufficient conditions for a function of two variables to have an extremum at a point.
Understand
1. If 2 2 ( , )
2 , , cos , sin( , )
u vu xy v x y x r y r compute
x y
.
2. If 2 2 2( , ) 0
y x z x u u uu f showthat x y z
xy xz x y z
.
3. Transform the integral
0 0
),(
y
dxdyyxf to polar coordinates.
4. Change the order of integration in 2
0 0
,
x
dydxyxf .
5. Find a, such that (3x-2y+z)i+(4x+ay-z)j+(x-y+2z)k is solenoidal.
6. What is the greatest rate of increase of 2xyz at (1,0,3)?
7. Test the analyticity of the function w = sin z.
8. Find dz
dw given w = tan z.
9. Evaluate c
z
dz2)3(
where c is the circle 1z
10. Find the residues of the function )2(
4)(
3
zzzf at its simple pole.
Apply
1. Examine the function 2244 242 yxyxyxu for extreme values.
2. Check if 2
,yx
xyv
yx
yxu
are functionally dependent. If so find the relationship between them.
3. By transforming into cylindrical polar coordinates evaluate dxdydzzyx 222 taken over the
region of space defined by 122 yx and 10 x .
4. Using Gauss divergence theorem evaluate s
kyzjyixzFwheredsnF
24ˆ and S is the surface of
the cube bounded by x=0,y=0,z=0,x=1,y=1,z=1.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
41
5. When the function f(z) = u + iv is analytic, show that U = constant and V = constant are orthogonal.
6. Determine the image of 1<x<2 under the mapping z
w1
.
7. Find the area of the cardiod r = 4 ( 1+ cos ) using double integral.
8. Apply Green‘s theorem in the plane to evaluate dyxyydxyxc
)64()83( 22
a. Where c is the boundary of the region defined by x=0, y=0 and x+y=1.
9. If )log( 22 yxu , find v and f (z) such that f (z) =u+iv is analytic.
10. Using Cauchy‘s integral formula evaluate C
z
zz
dze2)1()2(
where C is the Circle 3z .
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Prove that
, ,u v w
x y zv w w u u v
are functionally dependent.
2. If ),(),( vuyxg where xyvyxu 2,22 prove that
2
2
2
222
2
2
2
2
)(4vu
yxy
g
x
g .
3. Evaluate the integration xyzdxdydz taken throughout the volume for which 0,, zyx and
2 2 2 9x y z .
4. Evaluate the following integral by changing to spherical coordinates 2 22 11 1
2 2 20 0 0 1
x yxdxdydz
x y z
5. Verify Gauss divergence theorem for
2 2 2F x i y j z k
where S is the surface of the cuboid formed by the planes x=0, x=a, y=0, y=b, z=0 and z=c.
6. Determine the bilinear transformation that maps the points -1, 0, 1 in the z-plane onto the points 0, i, 3i in the w-
plane.
7. Evaluate
d
2
0cos45
2cos.
8. Using contour integration, evaluate dx
xx
x
0
22
2
49
9. Expand 31
)(
zz
zzf as Laurent‘s series valid in the regions: 31 z and 210 z
10. Show that kyxzjzxizxyF )3()3()6( 223 is irrotational vector and find the scalar potential
function such that F
Unit I
Functions of Several Variables
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
42
Functions of two variables - Partial derivatives - Total differential - Derivative of implicit functions - Maxima and
minima - Constrained Maxima and Minima by Lagrangian Multiplier method – Jacobians application to engineering
problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Multiple Integrals
Double integration in cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change of order of integration - change of variables- Area
and volume by multiple integral- application to engineering problems.
9 Hours Unit III
Vector Calculus Gradient - divergence - curl- line - surface and volume integrals - Green‘s - Gauss divergence and Stokes‘
theorems (statement only) - applications to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Analytic Functions
Analytic functions- Necessary condition of analytic function-Sufficient condition of analytic function(statement
only)- properties - Determination of analytic function using Milne Thomson‘s method, conformal mappings -
Mappings of w= z + a, az, 1/z, ez- bilinear transformation -- application to engineering problems.
9 Hours Unit V
Complex Integration
Cauchy‘s fundamental theorem (statement only)- and application of Cauchy‘s integral formula(statement only) –
Taylor‘s and Laurent‘s series- classification of singularities – Cauchy‘s residue theorem (statement only)- Contour
integration - circular and semi-circular contours ( excluding poles on the real axis )- application to engineering
problems
9 Hours
Total:45+15=60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi, 2000.
2. K .A . Lakshminarayanan ,K. Megalai, P. Geetha and D. Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume II, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi. 2008.
Reference(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume II, S. Chand &
Co., New Delhi, 2009.
2. T. Veerarajan, Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2008.
3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore, 2008.
4. C. RayWylie and Louis .C. Barrett, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications, 2003.
11O202 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Imparting knowledge on principles of environmental science and engineering.
Understanding the concepts of ecosystem, biodiversity and impact of environmental pollution.
Awareness on value education, population and social issues.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
43
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the students will be able to
1. Compare the importance of environment, natural resources, ecosystems and biodiversity. 2. Understand the fundamental physical and biological principles for protecting the environment from
degradation.
3. Summarize the environment and human pollution.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Environmental Science taught in High school
Assessment Pattern
Remember
1. Give the scope and importance of environmental studies.
2. Distinguish between renewable and non- renewable resources. 3. Explain the impacts of mining on forests.
4. Explain why fresh water is a precious resource and classification of different water pollutants?
5. What are the Impacts of modern agriculture?
6. State the two energy laws and give examples that demonstrate each law.
7. List the physical, chemical, and biological factors responsible for soil formation.
8. Give examples of point and nonpoint sources of pollution.
9. Draw a food web that includes ten or more aquatic organisms.
10. Distinguish between primary and secondary pollutants.
11. Identify the four parts of the atmosphere.
12. Describe secondary and primary succession with suitable examples.
13. Define the term extinction.
14. Relate the concept of food web and food chain to trophic levels. 15. Describe energy flow in a ecosystem.
16. Define the roles of producers, herbivore, carnivore, omnivore, scavenger, parasite and decomposer.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
S.No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 15 15
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
44
17. List some of the components of an ecosystem.
18. Distinguish between the biotic and abiotic factors in an ecosystem.
19. Give some impacts of water pollution.
20. Explain the source and effects of e waste.
21. What is the loudest sound possible?
22. What are the laws regarding noise pollution?
23. What is rainwater harvesting?
24. Discuss the concept and reactions of acid rain.
25. Describe the salient features of Wildlife (protection) Act, 1972. 26. What is 3R approach?
27. Give the effects of nuclear fallout.
28. Differentiate between mortality and natality.
29. What is exponential growth and zero population growth?
30. What are the Objective(s) and elements of value education?
Understand
1. Explain why providing adequate food for all of the world's people is so difficult?
2. Rank the five major sources of energy used to produce electricity and classify the energy sources
as renewable or nonrenewable.
3. Describe the causes of desertification and its preventive measures.
4. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of the green revolution. 5. Explain the relationship between technology and global warming.
6. Describe any three health effects of air pollution.
7. Identify "greenhouse gases" and explain how they cause the "greenhouse effect".
8. Identify a few plants and animals with the various biomes.
9. Explain the importance of primary species.
10. Explain the five major types of species interactions and give examples of each.
11. Environmental problems involve social, political, and economic issues—Justify.
12. What problems does noise pollution cause to animals?
13. What type of pollution threatens wetlands?
14. What are the major measures to attain sustainability?
15. Why is urban energy requirement more than rural requirement?
16. What are the major limitations to successful implementation of our environmental legislation? 17. Explain the concept of Malthusian theory.
Apply
1. Compare the energy efficiencies of any two inventions.
2. Name some alternatives to pesticides.
3. Identify four different habitats found in bodies of water and give examples of organisms that live
in each habitat.
4. Explain how we could reduce air pollution?
5. What are the measures to be taken to reduce your own noise pollution?
6. List the top ten polluted countries in the world?
7. Identify the grants available for rain water harvesting in buildings? 8. What are the major implications of enhanced global warming?
9. Discuss the methods implemented by government to control HIV/AIDS.
10. What is the role of an individual in prevention of pollution?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. List reasons why it is important that we seek alternatives to fossil fuels.
2. Explain why fresh water is often in short supply?
3. Give examples of human-made sources of radiation and explain how human-made sources differ
from natural sources of radiation.
Unit I
Introduction to Environmental Studies and Natural Resources
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
45
Environment: Definition- scope - importance – need for public awareness. Forest resources: Use –over exploitation-
deforestation - case studies- mining - effects on forests and tribal people. Water resources: Use – over utilization of
surface and ground water- floods – drought - conflicts over water. Mineral resources: Use – exploitation -
environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources - case studies. Food resources: World food problems
- changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing - effects of modern agriculture- fertilizer-pesticide problems - water
logging - salinity -case studies. Energy resources: Growing energy needs - renewable and non renewable energy
sources. Land resources: Land as a resource - land degradation - soil erosion. Role of an individual in conservation
of natural resources.
Documentation of the effect of degradation of forest resource.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystems and Biodiversity
Concept of an ecosystem: Structure and function of an ecosystem – producers - consumers -decomposers – energy
flow in the ecosystem – ecological succession – food chains - food webs and ecological pyramids. Types of
To explain the properties of conducting, semiconducting and dielectric materials.
To impart fundamental knowledge in optical materials.
To enable the students to understand the magnetic materials.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Select the suitable conducting materials for engineering design 2. Distinguish between semiconductors and dielectric materials.
3. Summarize concepts of optical and magnetic materials.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Engineering Physics taught in I Semester
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
47
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define relaxation time and collision time.
2. Give the postulates of free electron theory.
3. Give the drawbacks of classical free electron theory.
4. Define drift velocity.
5. State Drude-Lorentz theory.
6. What is the probability function f(E) of an electron occupying an energy level E?
7. What are intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors?
8. Give the broad classification of semiconductors based on carriers.
9. State Hall effect.
10. Define photovoltaic effect. 11. Mention the applications of pin photo diode.
12. Write a short note on dipole and dipole moment.
13. List the properties of dielectrics.
14. Write the expressions for electronic and ionic polarization.
15. What is meant by local field in solid dielectrics?
16. Write the Clausius-Mosotti equation for a solid dielectric.
17. Define dielectric breakdown.
18. Define the term fluorescence.
19. What is the sufficient condition for the phosphorescence?
20. What is the principle of LED?
21. Define plastic encapsulation.
22. Write a note on liquid crystal state. 23. Write the drawbacks of LCD.
24. List the advantages of CD-ROM.
25. What is meant by magnetic flux density?
26. Write notes on (i) retentivity (ii) coercivity
27. What is meant by domain?
28. Mention the applications of soft magnetic materials.
29. Mention some materials used for magnetic recording.
Understand
1. How the free electron theory proved to be wrong in terms of thermal conductivity by Wiedemann-Franz
law? 2. Explain the variation of Fermi-Dirac distribution function with temperature.
3. Elucidate the significance of probability function when (i) f(E)=1 (ii) f(E)=0 (ii)f(E)=0.5
4. Calculate the density of electron at 0K.
5. What are the importances of Fermi energy?
6. Why the extrinsic semiconductors are preferred over intrinsic semiconductors?
7. Prove that the Fermi level lies at the middle of the energy gap in intrinsic semiconductor.
8. Give the importance of band gap energy.
9. What are the differences between donor ad acceptor energy level?
10. Is it possible to measure the magnetic field using Hall Effect? Explain.
11. How the photo voltaic effect is utilized in solar cells?
12. All the dielectrics are insulators, but why all the insulators are not dielectrics? 13. Why the orientation polarization occurs only in polar molecules?
14. Prove that the internal field of the atoms is larger than the applied field.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
48
15. Why the chemical and electrochemical breakdowns have close relationship with thermal breakdown?
16. What are the changes observed in BaTiO3 with change in temperature?
17. How can you increase the emission time in luminescence?
18. How the electroluminescence is used in LED?
19. Why the wavelength of the emitted photons in LED depends on energy gap in the semiconductor?
20. Why LCD comes under passive display device?
21. How the data in CD-ROM is read out?
22. What are the advantages of CD-ROM?
23. Give the origin of magnetic moment in magnetic materials. 24. Why the susceptibility of diamagnetic material is negative?
25. What is the reason for the magnetic lines of forces are highly attracted towards the centre of the
ferromagnetic material?
26. Why hard magnetic materials cannot be easily magnetized?
27. Give the reason for using soft magnetic materials in transformers.
28. How the soft magnetic materials are used in magnetic bubbles?
Apply
1. Discuss the reasons for the failure of classical free electron theory.
2. What is the reason for low contribution of electrons to the heat capacity of metals?
3. Sketch the variation of Fermi level with temperature. 4. Explain how phosphorous atoms donate electrons to the conduction band?
5. Where are the donor and acceptor levels located in an impurity semiconductor? Why?
6. Explain how photo pin diodes are used in fiber optical communication?
7. Graphically explain frequency dependence of dielectrics.
8. Why at low temperature the total polarization is maximum?
9. Deduce Clausius-Mosotti relation and explain its use in predicting the dielectric constant of the solids.
10. Why phosphorescence is called delayed fluorescence?
11. Explain the reason for the formation of domain in ferromagnetism and how the hysteresis curve is
explained on the basis of the domain theory?
12. Discuss the bearing of domain theory in soft and hard magnetic materials.
13. Give an account of the origin of atomic magnetization and which source is important in the ferromagnetic
materials? 14. Explain the spontaneous magnetization possessed by ferromagnetic material below Curie point.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.
2. Differentiate p-type and n-type semiconductors.
3. Compare dia, para and ferromagnetic materials.
4. Differentiate soft and hard magnetic materials.
5. Compare LED and LCD.
Unit I
Electrical properties of Metals
Introduction - Derivation of microscopic form of Ohm‘s law- postulates of classical free electron theory- derivation
of electrical conductivity of metals (Drude- Lorentz theory)- merits and demerits. Derivation of thermal conductivity
– Wiedemann-Franz law- verification. Electron energies in metal and Fermi energy- Fermi-Dirac distribution
function and its variation with temperature- density of energy states- calculation of density of electron and fermi
energy at 0K- average energy of free electron at 0K- Importance of fermi energy- problems.
Quantum free electron theory and Band theory of solids. 9 Hours
Unit II
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
49
Semiconducting Materials & Devices
Introduction - elemental and compound semiconductors - Intrinsic semiconductors: density of electrons - density of
holes- determination of carrier concentration and position of Fermi energy- band gap energy determination
(quantitative treatment). Extrinsic semiconductors: carrier concentration in p-type and n-type semiconductors. Hall
effect- theory of Hall effect- experimental determination of Hall voltage- applications. Semi conducting devices:
Variation of Fermi level with temperature and doping concentration in extrinsic semiconductors. 9 Hours
Unit III
Dielectrics
Introduction- fundamental definitions in dielectrics- expressions for electronic, ionic and orientation polarization
mechanisms- space charge polarization- Langevin- Debye equation- frequency and temperature effects on
polarization- dielectric loss- internal field- expression for internal field (cubic structure)- derivation of Clausius-
Mosotti equation – importance. Dielectric breakdown- various breakdown mechanisms with characteristics-
applications of dielectric materials and insulating materials- problems.
Charging and discharging of capacitors. 9 Hours
Unit IV
Optical Materials Introduction-fluorescence and phosphorescence- technique of increasing the emission time. Light Emitting Diode:
principle, construction and working-applications. Liquid crystal display: general properties- dynamic scattering
display- twisted nematic display- applications- comparison between LED and LCD. Disk data storage recording and
read out of data in CD-ROM- principle - magneto optic disk.
Various data storage and retrieval techniques. 9 Hours
Unit V
Magnetic Materials
Introduction-orbital magnetic moment and spin magnetic moment-Bohr magneton-basic definitions –properties of
dia, para and ferro magnetic materials-domain theory of ferro magnetism-process of domain magnetization-
reversible and irreversible domains-explanation of hysteresis curve based on domain theory-hard and soft magnetic materials-recording and read out process in floppy disk and magnetic bubble memory-comparison between floppy
disk and bubble memory-problems.
Magnetic shift register. 9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. Rajendran, Materials Science, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishers Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2011.
2. M. Arumugam, Physics II, Anuradha Publications, Kumbakonam, 2005.
Reference(s)
1. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2006.
2. M.N. Avadhanulu and P.G. Kshirsagar, A Text Book of Engineering Physics, S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2005.
4. V. Raghavan, Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.
5. M. R. Srinivasan, Physics for Engineers, Reprint, New Age International Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
11N205 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To expose the students to study the semiconductor devices and diodes characteristics
To study the characteristics different biasing and configurations of the BJT and FET
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
50
To acquire knowledge about various amplifier circuits
To equip and verify the various rectifier circuits and oscillator circuits
To learn the differential and tuned amplifiers
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Explain the working principles of various semiconductor devices.
2. Analyze the various amplifier and oscillator circuits
3. Construct rectifier and filter circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of Engineering Physics taught in I Semester and Knowledge of Physics of Higher secondary
and State board of Government of Tamilnadu
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
5 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define law of mass of action.
2. What is meant by minority carrier diffusion length?
3. State drift current.
4. What is diffusion current? 5. What is forward and reverse resistance of a diode?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
51
6. Define cut in voltage of a diode.
7. Draw the switching characteristics of diode?
8. Give the expression for transition capacitance of a diode.
9. List out the applications for zener diode?
10. What is tunnel diode?
11. What is valley voltage of tunnel diode?
12. Draw the characteristics curve for transistor.
13. Define current amplification factor in CC transistor.
14. Mention the values of input resistance in CB, CE & CC configuration? 15. Why voltage divider bias is commonly used in amplifier circuits?
16. How FET is known as voltage variable resistor?
17. How self-bias circuit is used as constant current source?
18. Why self-bias technique is not used in enhancement type MOSFET?
19. Mention the types of IC voltage regulator.
20. State conversion efficiency.
21. Which of the transistor circuit is stable? Why?
22. Mention the conditions of proper transistor biasing?
23. In which region the JFET act as a simple resistor and why?
24. What are the types of biasing methods used for BJT biasing?
25. CMRR for the differential amplifier should be high. Comment.
Understand
1. Describe the theory of PN junction and explain how it acts as diode.
2. Draw and explain the I-V Characteristics P-n Junction diode.
3. Compare the temperature dependent characteristics of various diodes.
4. Draw and explain the junction diode switching times.
5. Discuss the operation of single and double tuned amplifiers.
6. Discuss the biasing circuits of BJT and its operating point.
7. Distinguish bias stability and stability parameter.
8. Mention in detail about the biasing method of FET.
9. Derive the current components and Eber moll model?
10. Draw low frequency hybrid model in CE configuration. Give typical values of ‗h‘ parameters. 11. Write comparisons of CC, CE, and CB configuration.
12. Demonstrate the working of transistor as a switch.
13. Derive the expression for CMRR.
14. Give real-time applications for single and double tuned amplifiers.
15. List out the difference between class ‗A‘, class ‘B‘ and class ‗C‘ power amplifiers in terms of collector
efficiency and distortion.
16. Compare the temperature dependent characteristics of various diodes
17. Prove that the maximum efficiency of a class B amplifier in 78.5%.
18. Derive the equation for efficiency of a class B amplifier.
19. Write down Barhausen criterion for oscillations.
20. Draw and analyze the output response graph for centre tapped full wave rectifier. 21. Illustrate Hartley oscillator and derive the equation for oscillation.
22. Illustrate crystal oscillator and derive the equation for oscillation.
23. What is the necessity of constant source in differential amplifier?
24. Derive the equation for differential gain and CMRR.
25. How the amplifiers are classified based on the bias conditions?
26. Draw the transfer characteristics of differential amplifier circuits.
27. Draw typical circuit of transformer coupled multistage amplifier and explain its working. Draw its
frequency response.
28. Draw the circuit diagram differential amplifier using constant current source.
29. Draw the circuit of emitter coupled differential amplifier and explain.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
52
Apply
1. A germanium diode carries a current of 10mA when a forward bias of 0.2V is applied.
a) Estimate the reverse saturation current (Is), b) Calculate bias voltages needed for diode currents of 1mA and 100mA. Comment on the range of these
two voltages.
2. A silicon diode rated 1mA displays a forward voltage of 0.7 volt at a current of 1 mA. Evaluate the reverse
saturation current.
3. Draw the circuit diagram of common source amplifier and derive expressions for voltage gain and output resistance.
4. Explain with an example, how the zener diode acts as a voltage regulator.
5. Draw the circuit diagram of small signal CE amplifier circuit and give its equivalent hybrid model. What is
the role of CC and CE?
6. Derive the expression for varactor diode.
7. Draw and explain the graphical method of determining Q- point for n-channel MOSFET.
8. Obtain frequency response of CE amplifier circuit and find out its band width. What is the impact of CC
and CE on the band width?
9. How even harmonics is eliminated using push-pull circuit, derive the expression?
10. Derive an expression for frequency of oscillation of transistorized Colpitt‘s oscillator.
11. Explain how to stabilize the amplitude against variation due to fluctuations occasioned in Wien bridge oscillator.
12. A full-wave rectifier with a centre- tapped transformer supplies a dc current of 100mA to a load resistance
of R = 20 ohm. The secondary resistance of the transformer is 1 ohm. Each diode has a forward resistance
of 0.5 ohm. Determine the following :
a) RMS value of the signal voltage across each half of the secondary.
b) DC power supplied to the load. c) AC power input to the rectifier. d) Conversion efficiency.
e) Voltage regulation
13. Show that the gain of Wien bridge oscillator using BJT amplifier must be at least three for the oscillations
to occur.
14. Draw the circuit diagram of a RC phases shift oscillator using BJT. Derive the expression for frequency of
oscillators.
15. What is the drawback of class B amplifier? How it is going to overcome using class AB amplifier with neat diagram.
16. Classify various oscillators based on output waveforms, circuit components, operating frequencies and
feedback used.
17. Classify different type of oscillators based on frequency range.
18. Prove that oscillations will not be sustained if, at the oscillator frequency, the magnitude of the product of
the transfer gain and feedback factor is less than unity.
19. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 100. The input voltages applied areV1=1mv and
V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c) CMRR=10,000.
20. A differential amplifier has a differential gain Ad of 120. The input voltages applied are V1=1mv and
V2=0.9mv. Calculate the output voltage for a) CMRR=100 b) CMRR=1000 and c) CMRR=10, 00
21. Derive the expression for single and double tuned amplifiers.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Analyze the below two statements.
a) A p-n junction is a robust device and is a good choice for a diode required in power electronics.
b) Due to the nonlinear, exponential nature of the current, the p-n junction can be used as a Varistor.
2. Recognize the performance of diode in terms of doping of ions.
3. Distinguish the diode and transistor switching characteristics.
4. Illustrate the effect of single and double tuned amplifiers when it is subjected to different range of signals
5. Characterize low and high power applications.
6. Differentiate FET and UJT from BJT.
7. Differentiate the various biasing method of BJT.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
53
8. Differentiate Cascade and Darlington connections of transistor.
Create
1. Design a circuit for electronic PID controller using operational amplifiers.
2. Design a radio transmitter and receiver in PCB board using a various types of oscillators.
Construct an audio amplifier and function generator using electronic components.
Unit I
Semiconductor Devices
Theory of P-N junction – P-N junction as diode – P-N diode currents – Volt-Amp characteristics – Diode resistance – Temperature effect on P-N junction – Transition and diffusion capacitance of P-N diode – Diode switching times
– Zener diode – UJT characteristics.
P-N diode applications
9 Hours
Unit II
Bi-Polar and Field Effect Transistors
Junction transistor – Transistor current components – Input and output characteristics of CE, CB and CC
configurations – Transistor switching time – Junction Field Effect Transistor – Pinch off voltage – JFET Volt-
Ampere characteristics – MOSFETs and their characteristics – FET as a variable resistor.
Relation between transistor parameters
9 Hours
Unit III
Small-Signal and Large Signal Amplifiers
Transistor as an amplifier – Fixed and self-biasing of BJT – Determination of h parameters from characteristics –
Analysis of a transistor amplifier circuit using h parameters - Simplified hybrid model for CE and CB – Cascade and
Darlington connections, Transformer coupled class A, B amplifiers and class B Push-pull amplifiers –
Common source amplifiers – Common drain amplifiers – Feedback amplifiers – Power amplifiers.
Negative feedback
9 Hours
Unit IV
Rectifiers and Oscillators
Half wave and full wave rectifier analysis - Theory of sinusoidal oscillators – Phase shift and Wien bridge
oscillators – Colpitt‘s, Hartley and crystal oscillators- Filters Application of oscillators
9 Hours
Unit V
Differential and Tuned Amplifiers
Differential amplifiers – Common mode and differential mode analysis – DC and AC analysis – Characteristics of
tuned amplifiers – Single and double tuned amplifiers.
Application of amplifiers 9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jacob. Millman, Christos C. Halkias and Sathyabrata Jit, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Limited, New Delhi, 2010 2. Jacob Millman, Christos C. Halkias and K. L. Chetan Pari, Integrated Electronics: Analog and Digital
Circuits and System, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
Reference(s)
1. Robert L. Boylestad & Lo Nashelsky, Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory, Pearson Education, Third
Indian Reprint, 2006 / PHI.
2. David A. Bell, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2008
4. Allen Mottershead, Electronic Devices and Circuits – An Introduction, Prentice Hall of India Private
Limited, New Delhi, 2008
Web Resource
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
54
1. Solid State Circuits, NPTEL – IIT, Chennai, Link: http://nptel.iitm.ac.in/courses.php
11N206 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
To understand the concepts of Object Oriented Programming.
To gain thorough knowledge in programming with C++.
To understand the concepts of file operation.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Differentiate between a procedure oriented language and object oriented language
2. Write programs for simple applications using the features of object oriented programming.. 3. Write simple programs for file operations and error handling mechanism.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge in Basics of ‗C‘ Programming taught in 1st Semester
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†6 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create - 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define object.
2. Define Encapsulation.
3. State the features of object-oriented programming.
4. Define Algorithm.
5. Define Recursion.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
55
6. List the class members.
7. List the categories of static data members.
8. Recall the constructor declaration and definition.
9. State parameterized constructors.
10. Recall the advantages of dynamic initialization.
11. State abstract class.
12. Recall operator overloading.
13. Define virtual function.
14. Reproduce the functionalities of file pointers. 15. Define friend function.
16. Define this pointer.
17. Define templates.
18. Define exceptions.
19. Mention the purpose of exception handling.
Understand
1. Demonstrate the determination of errors while dealing with files.
2. Give examples for dynamic initialization of variables.
3. Indicate the objects usage in function argument.
4. Explain function overloading.
5. Demonstrate the usage of bool data type. 6. Discuss this pointer.
7. Interrelate overloading and constructor.
8. Illustrate dynamic object initialization.
9. Give examples for the operators that cannot be overloaded.
10. Demonstrate casting operator.
11. Interpolate multi-argument templates.
12. Summarize the behavior of the static data members of a class template differ from the behavior of static
data members of a normal class.
13. Explain rules for Virtual Functions.
14. Compute manipulators.
15. Discuss dynamic polymorphism.
Apply
1. Explain the message passing in C++.
2. Examine pseudo code.
3. How does C++apply the operators in the arithmetic expression?
4. Generalize class declaration.
5. Show the format for calling a member function.
6. Organize constructor declaration.
7. Discover the creation of an array using new operator.
8. Organize a class specifier that creates a class called leverage with one private data member Crowbar, of
type int and one public function whose declaration is void proxy().
9. Data items in a class must be private. Explain. 10. Compute runtime polymorphism in C++.
11. Show the difference between constructors from an ordinary function.
12. While copying the objects if you say a = b and assume that '=' operator is overloaded then what it will call,
a copy constructor or operator overloading function.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Critique about static data is accessed by static member function.
2. Define a supplier class. Assume that the items supplied by any given supplier are different and varying in
number. Use dynamic memory allocation in the constructor function to achieve the solution.
3. Develop selection sort as a generic function.
Create
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
56
1. Define an examiner class. Provide all necessary data and function members to provide the following: The
examiner must access answer sheets of at least one subject; He may examine answer sheets of multiple
subjects; The examiner represents a college and also a university; Most of the examiners are local and
represent local university; and have more than one constructor including one default and one with default
argument. Provide a meaningful copy constructor.
2. For a supermarket, define a bill class. All the bill objects will contain bill number, name of clerk preparing
the bill, each item with quantity and price and total amount to be paid. Total items in the bill are varying.
Define dynamic memory allocation constructor for bill class such that any number of items from 1 to 50 can be accommodated in a single bill. There is an array describing each item with a price. The price is to be
picked up from that array. Now overload = operator and provide reason for the need of such operator.
Unit I
Introduction
Need for object oriented programming – Procedural Languages vs. Object oriented approach - Characteristics Object
oriented programming - C++ Programming Basics: Basic Program Construction - Output Using cout - Input with cin
- Data types-Variables and Constants – Operators - Control Statements-Manipulators-Type conversion.
Binary operators
9 Hours
Unit II
Objects and Classes
Simple Class - C++ Objects as Physical Objects – C++ Object as Data types- Constructors and Destructors- Object
as Function Arguments - Returning Objects from Functions - Structures and Classes - Arrays and Strings.
Multidimensional array
9 Hours
Unit III
Operator Overloading and Inheritance
Need of operator overloading- Overloading Unary Operators- Overloading binary Operators-Overloading Special
Operators-Data Conversion-Inheritance: Derived Class and Base Class-Derived Class Constructors-Overriding
Member Functions-Class Hierarchies-Public and Private Inheritance-Levels of Inheritance-Multiple Inheritance.
Single Inheritance
9 Hours
Unit IV
Polymorphism and File Streams
Virtual Function – Friend Function – Static Function-Assignment and Copy Initialization- Streams – String I/O –
Character I/O – Object I/O – I/O with Multiple Objects – File Pointers – Disk I/O with Member Functions- Error
Handling in File I/O.
Friend Function
9 Hours
Unit V
Templates and Exception Handling
Templates: Introduction - Function Templates - Overloading Function Templates - Class Templates – Exception Handling – Syntax, multiple exceptions, exceptions with arguments.
Function Templates
9 Hours
Total: 45 hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert Lafore, Object Oriented Programming in-C++, Galgotia Publication, 2009
Reference(s)
1. Deitel & Deitel, C++ How to program, Prentice Hall, 2006
2. D.S.Malik, C++ Programming, Thomson, 2007
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
57
3. K.R. Venugopal, Rajkumar and T.Ravishankar, Mastering C++, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2006
11N207 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To develop the basic programming skill
To understand the basic concepts of arrays and pointers
To write a program that uses the concepts of inheritance and operator overloading
To make the students to learn object oriented way for solving problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Create class and object for an application.
2. Apply the features of object oriented programming for various applications.
3. Apply the file operation and error handling mechanism for simple applications.
Prerequisite(s)
Basics in Object Oriented Programming
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 10
Conduct of Experiment 10 15
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Model Examination 10 -
Viva-Voce 05 05
Total 50 50
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a program to define a class to represent a BANKACCOUNT. Including the following members: Date
members: Name of the depositor, Account Number, Type of account, Balance Amount in the account.
Member functions:
To assign initial values (Use constructors to initialize the data) To deposit an amount
To withdraw an account after checking the balance
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
58
To display the name and the balance
Note: Try to use all types of constructors
2. Write a program to computer tax using default arguments. A tax compute function takes two arguments
amount and tax percentage. Default tax percent is 15% of income.
3. Write functions to add 2 or 3 numbers of different data types.
4. Implement the above class with dynamic objects and use constructors and destructors.
5. Implement the class STUDENT with necessary data members and member function to print the mark sheet
of a student using array of object.
6. Design three classes student exam and result the student class has data members such as those representing roll number name etc. Create a class exam by inheriting the student class. The exams add a
subject marks as the data member. Derive the class result from the exam class and it has its data member as
a total mark. Write an interactive program to implement this.
7. Implement the concept of operator overloading.
8. Write a program to keep track of number of instances created and alive for the class using static data
member and static member functions.
9. Write a program to add the private data member of two different classes using friend function and friend
class.
10. Program of book shop which sells and books and video tapes. These two class books and tapes are inherited
from the base class called media. The media class has data members for storing title and publication the
book class has data members such as number of pages in a book and tape class has the playing time of a tape each class will have member function read () and show(). In the base class these members have to be
defined as virtual functions. Write a program which models the class hierarchy for book shop and
processing objects for these classes using pointers to the base class.
11. Program to sort a set of numbers of generic data type using template function.
12. Program to copy the content of one file to a new file by removing unnecessary spaces between words.
• Design experiment
• Application oriented experiments
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
S.No Experiment Hours
1 Define a class to represent a bank account to include the following members.
Data Members: Name of the depositors, Account number, Type of account, Balance amount in
the account.
Member functions: To initialize values to data members, To deposit an amount, To withdraw an
account after checking the balance, To display the name and the balance.
6
2 Implement function overloading (eg. Write functions to add 2 or 3 numbers of different data
types.)
3
3 Implement the concept of default argument function. 3
4 Implement the concept of array of objects. 3
5 Implement a class with dynamic objects and use constructors and destructors. 3
6 Implement the concept of Inheritance. 6
7 Implement the concept of operator overloading. 3
8 Illustrate the use of static data member and static member functions by keeping track of number
of instances of object that are created and alive.
3
9 Implement friend functions and friend classes to add the private data member of two different
classes.
3
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
59
10 Implement the concept of virtual function. 3
11 Program to sort a set of numbers of generic data type using template function 6
12 Program to copy the content of one file to a new file by removing unnecessary spaces between
words.
3
11O208 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
(Common for CE,EEE,ME,MXE,BT,IT & TT (I Semester); AE,CSE,ECE,EIE & FT (II Semester)
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
Upon Successful completion of this course, the student should be able to:
Understand and appreciate the importance of Engineering Graphics in Engineering
Understand the basic principles of Technical/Engineering Drawing
Understand the different steps in producing drawings according to BIS conventions
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Interpret the pictorial representation of objects.
2. Recognize the different views of orthographic projection
3. Draw the three dimensional object from the given orthographic views
Prerequisite(s)
Baisc knowledge of geometry taught in High Schools.
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 10 15
Observation and Results 15 25
Record 10 -
Mini-Project/Model Examination /
Viva-voce
15 10
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define Graphic communication or Drawing.
2. List the different drawing instruments.
3. What is blueprint?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
60
4. What are the applications of engineering graphics?
5. What are the two types of drawings?
6. What are the different types of projections?
7. Define Orthographic projection.
8. What do you mean by I angle projection?
9. What is III angle projection?
10. Define Plan.
11. What is Elevation?
12. List the various types of lines. 13. What do you mean by a Plane?
14. Name the five standard sizes of drawing sheets that are specified by BIS.
15. Give the BIS codes for Lettering, Dimensioning and lines.
16. State few important dimensioning rules.
17. What are the two types of Solids?
18. What is Representative Fraction (RF)?
19. What is a Frustum?
20. Define Truncation.
21. Define Section Plane and give its types.
22. What do you mean by development of surfaces?
23. State the principle of Isometric projection. 24. What is Isometric View?
25. Define Isometric scale.
Understand
1. When an object is said to be in III quadrant?
2. Why are the projectors perpendicular to the Projection Plane in the Orthographic projection?
3. What is the Shape of the section obtained when a cone is cut by a plane passing through the apex and center of
the base of the cone?
4. Why II and IV angle projections are not used in industries?
5. What are the differences between I angle and III angle projections?
6. Which method is suitable for developing a truncated prism?
7. Why is a hexagonal headed bolt and nut more common in use as compared to square headed bolt and nut? 8. Which is the most suitable method for drawing the Perspective Projection?
9. What are the prerequisites for Free hand sketching?
10. What are the two methods used to obtain the Isometric view of a circle?
11. Why CAD is preferred over Conventional drafting?
Apply/Evaluate
1. How will you project a point which is above HP and in front of VP?
2. How will you project a point which is below HP and behind VP?
3. What is the method used to determine the True length and inclination of a line inclined to both the planes?
4. How will you project a prism whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position method?
5. How will you project a cylinder when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position method?
6. How will you project a pyramid whose axis is inclined to HP and parallel to VP by Change of Position method?
7. How will you project a cone when the axis is inclined to VP and parallel to HP by change of position method?
8. How will you obtain the Sectional view of solids in simple vertical position cut by planes inclined to any one
reference plane?
9. How will you develop the lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids?
10. How will you develop the complete surfaces of Frustums?
11. Construct an isometric scale.
12. A cricket ball thrown from the ground level reaches the wicket keeper‘s gloves. Maximum height reached by
the ball is 5m. The ball travels a horizontal distance of 11m from the point of projection. Trace the path of the
ball.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
61
13. The Pictorial view of an object is shown below. Draw the following views to full size scale.
a) Elevation in the direction of arrow
b) Left end elevation
c) Plan
14. Read the dimensioned drawing shown below. Redraw the figure to full size and dimension it as per Indian
Standards.
Q. No. 13 Q. No. 14
Unit I
Concepts and Conventions Use of drafting instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of drawing sheets –
Lettering and dimensioning. General principles of orthographic projection – First angle projection – Layout of views
– Projection of points, located in all quadrant and straight lines located in the first quadrant – Determination of true
lengths and true inclinations.
6 Hours
Unit II
Projection of Solids Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference plane
by change of position method.
6 Hours
Unit III
Section of Solids and Development of Surfaces Sectioning of solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to
one Reference: plane – Obtaining the true shape of section. Development of lateral surfaces of simple solids –
prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones.
6 Hours
Unit IV
Isometric Projection and Perspective Projection
Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric projections of simple solids, pyramids, cylinders and
cones. Orthographic projection - Systems of orthographic projection - First angle orthographic projection -
Conversion of pictorial to orthographic views (Free hand).
1. K. V. Natarajan, A Textbook(s): of Engineering Graphics, Dhanalakshmi Publishers, Chennai, 2006
Reference(s)
1. S. Julyes Jaisingh, Engineering Graphics, Tri Sea Publishers, 2010 2. V. Rameshbabu, Engineering Graphics, VRB Publishers Pvt Ltd., 2009
3. K. Venugopal, Engineering Graphics, New Age International (P) Limited, 2002
4. N. D. Bhatt, Engineering Drawing, Charotar publishing House 2003
5. K. L. Narayana and P. Kannaiah, Engineering Graphics, Scitech Publications (Pvt) Limited-2002
List of Experiments
1. Projection of points located in all quadrants.
2. Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes.
3. Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines.
4. Projection of Solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the axis is inclined to one reference
plane by change of position method. 5. Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one reference plane and
obtaining true shape of section.
6. Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids like prisms, pyramids cylinder and cone.
7. Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders.
8. Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views.
9. Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD.
10. Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD.
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No Experiment Hours
1 Projection of points located in all quadrants 3
2 Projection of straight lines located in the first quadrant inclined to both the planes. 3
3 Determination of true lengths and true inclinations of Straight lines 3
4 Projection of Solids when the axis is inclined to one reference plane by change of
position method. 3
5 Sectioning of solids in simple vertical position by cutting planes inclined to one
reference plane and obtaining true shape of section 3
6 Development of lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids. 3
7 Isometric Projections / Views of Solids like prisms, pyramids and Cylinders. 3
8 Orthographic Projection of various components from pictorial views. 3
9 Drawing of front, top and side views from given pictorial views using AutoCAD. 3
10 Drawing sectional views of prism, pyramid and cylinder using AutoCAD. 3
11N209 WORKSHOP PRACTICE
0 0 2 1.0
Objective(s)
To learn the use of basic hand tools and
To know the need for safety in work place
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
63
To gain hands on experience on Carpentry, Fitting, Sheet metal, Plumbing, Arc welding, Foundry
and Basic electrical circuits
To have the basic knowledge on working of domestic appliances
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Prepare simple models/objects and joints.
2. Involve in plumbing, moulding, wiring and soldering activities.
3. Rectify faults in the electrical and electronic devices used in home appliances.
Prerequisite(s)
Basics of Civil and Mechanical Engineering taught in 1st semester
Basics in Engineering Physics taught in 1st semester
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal Assessment Semester End Examination
Preparation 10 20
Observation and Results 10 10
Record 10 -
Mini-Project/
Model Examination /
Viva-Voce
20
20
Total 50 50
Remember
1. What are the tools used in sheet metal work?
2. What are the types of joints in sheet metal work?
3. What is moulding? 4. What is green sand mould?
5. What is gas welding?
6. List out the types of flames in welding.
7. What is meant by carpentry?
8. What is the use of Saw?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
64
9. What are the types of joints in pipe connection?
10. What is staircase wiring?
11. What is the working principle of centrifugal pump?
12. What are the types of valves in plumbing and where it is used?
13. List out the cutting tools used in carpentry with specification.
14. What are the necessary equipments used in Arc Welding?
15. What are the methods used in sheet metal work?
16. List out the types and components of Air- Conditioner.
Understand 1. Compare the Refrigeration system with air Condition system.
2. How the refrigeration system works?
3. How will you select the suitable welding process for various materials?
4. How will make a V joint in the given MS flat?
5. How will you make a green sand mould using solid pattern?
6. How gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints?
7. How metals are manufactured by using casting process?
8. How cavity is formed by using pattern?
9. How the wires are joined by soldering?
Apply / Evaluate
1. Sketch the wiring diagram for a room consist of two fans ,three tubelights, and one plug point. 2. Sketch the line diagram of the plumbing work carried out in your house.
3. Sketch all the wooden furniture present in your house in three dimensional view.
4. How will make a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps?
5. How will form Staircase and Godown wiring? 6. Prepare a hexagonal shape pen stand by using power tools.
7. Prepare a cover with handle by using sheet metal to cover a motor.
8. Prepare a small trolley to carry wastage by using welding work.
List of Experiments
1. Forming of simple objects using sheet metal.
2. Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat.
3. Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump.
4. Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints.
5. Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools.
6. Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps.
7. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator and Window
Air-Conditioner.
8. Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat. 9. Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern.
10. Staircase and Godown wiring.
11. Soldering practice.
12. Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television.
13. Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater.
14.
Total: 30 Hours
Practical Schedule
SI.
No.
Experiment Hours
1 Forming of simple objects using sheet metal. 3
2 Preparing a V joint from the given MS flat. 3
3 Demonstration of Assembly and Disassembly of centrifugal pump. 2
4 Making simple gadget like chair, sofa, table, cell phone stand by using welding joints. 3
5 Making simple gadget like pen stand, box, cell phone stand etc., by using power tools. 2
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
65
6 Making a connection of basic pipe lines, using PVC pipes, that includes valves and taps. 2
7 Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Washing Machine/ Refrigerator and
Window Air-Conditioner.
2
8 Preparing a half round joint from the given MS flat. 3
9 Preparing a green sand mould using solid pattern. 3
10 Staircase and Godown wiring. 2
11 Soldering practice. 2
12 Assembly and Disassembly of Computer System /Television. 2
13 Demonstration of working of domestic appliances: Mixie, Electric Iron/ Heater. 1
11O301 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III
(Common to all branches Except CSE and Bio-Tech) 3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To obtain the knowledge of expressing periodic functions as Fourier series, Fourier transform and Z
transform which is used to analyze signals in signal processing.
Ability to solve boundary value problems in heat and wave equations using partial differential equations.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Solve problems using Fourier series and Fourier transform.
2. Find the solutions for the basic problems with Z-transform, difference and partial differential equation.
3. Apply the skills to solve boundary value problems.
Prerequisite(s) Knowledge of Engineering Mathematics I & II
Assessment Pattern
S. No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
7 Test II
1 Model Examination
1 Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
7 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
66
2 Understand 40 40 40 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze/ Evaluate 10 10 10 20
5 Create 00 00 00 00
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. State the Dirichlet‘s Conditions
2. Define even and odd functions graphically 3. Write down the complex Fourier transform pair
4. State convolution theorem in Fourier transforms
5. Define unilateral and bilateral Z-transform of f(n)
6. State initial value theorem in Z-transforms
7. Define complete solution of a partial differential equation
8. Write the complementary function of non-homogeneous second order equations of distinct and repeated roots
9. What does a2 represent in the equation ytt = a2yxx ?
10. Write any two solutions of the Laplace equation obtained by the method of separation of variables
Understand
1. Find the general solution of .xyzqzxypyzx 222222
2. Solve yxeyxzDDDD 222 2
3. Find the half-range cosine series for the function x0,xxf and hence deduce the sum of the
series
04
12
1
n n
4. Find the Fourier series of period 2 for the function
212
10)(
xx
xxxf
Deduce the sum of
,..5,3,12
1
n n
5. Find the Fourier transform of
1|x|for0
1xforx1xf .
Hence evaluate
0
2sin
dxx
x and
0
4
.dxx
xsin
6. Solve the integral equation dxxxf
0
cos)( = e
7. Find inverse transform 112
42
3
zz
z
8. Find Z –transform of 21
32
nn
n .
9. Use convolution theorem to find the inverse Z –transform of 1412
8 2
zz
z
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
67
10. Give a function which is self-reciprocal under Fourier sine and cosine transform
Apply
1. Find the PDE of all planes having, equal intercepts on the x and y axis.
2. Form the PDE of all planes passing through the origin
3. Expand the function ),(cos)( inxxf as a Fourier series of periodicity 2.
4. A function y=f(x) is given by the following table of values. Make the harmonic analysis of the function in (0,T)
up to the second harmonic.
x 0 T/6 T/3 T/2 2T/3 5T/6 T
y 0 9.2 14.4 17.8 17.3 11.7 0
5. Obtain the constant term and the first harmonic in the Fourier series expansion in (0,12) for the function
6. A taut string of length L is fastened at both ends. The midpoint of the string is taken to a height of b and then
released from rest in this position. Find the displacement of the string at any time t.
7. A string is stretched between two fixed points at a distance 2L apart and the points of the string are given initial
velocities v where v = cx /L 0 < x <L
= c ( 2L - x) /L L < x < 2L
x being the distance from an end point. Find the displacement of the string at any subsequent time.
8. A rod 30 cm long, has its ends A and B at 20ºC and 80ºC respectively, until steady state conditions prevail. The
temperature at the end B is then suddenly reduced to 60º C and at the end A is raised to 40º C and maintained so.
Find the resulting temperature u (x,t).
9. A rectangular plate with insulated surface is 10 cm wide so long compared to its width that it may be considered
infinite length .If the temperature along the short edge y=0 is given by )10
sin(8x
, while the two long edges x=0
and x=10 as well as the other short edge are kept at 00c . Find the steady state temperature.
10. Solve the equation 0,2127 1012 yythatgivenyyy n
nnn .
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Solve (D2-5DD‘+6D‘2) z= y sinx
2. Solve (4D2-4DD‘+D‘2)z = 16 log(x+2y) 3. Solve z = p x + q y + p
2 q
2
4. Evaluate
0
2222 bxax
dx using transform method
5. Evaluate
0
222 ax
dx and
0
222
2
.ax
dxx
6. Find Fourier sine transform of x
e ax
, a >0
7. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of e-ax , a > 0 and hence find Fourier sine and cosine transform of x e-ax
8. Find Fourier transform of 22xae
, a > 0 and hence find Fourier transform of 2
2x
e
9. Find Fourier sine and cosine transform of X n-1
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
68
10 Find inverse transform 112
42
3
zz
z .
Unit I
Fourier Series
Dirichlet‘s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range cosine and sine series –
Parseval‘s Identity - Harmonic Analysis- Application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit II
Fourier Transform
Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution
theorem - Parseval‘s Identity-Finite Fourier Transform- Application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit III
Z -Transform and Difference Equations Z - transform - Elementary properties – Inverse Z- transform – Convolution theorem -Formation of difference
equations – Solution of difference equations using Z- transform - Application to engineering problems.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Solution of
standard types of first order partial differential equations (excluding reducible to standard forms) – Lagrange‘s linear
equation – Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients.
9 Hours
Unit V
Boundary Value Problems
Classification of second order quasi linear partial differential equations – Fourier series solutions of one dimensional
wave equation – One dimensional heat equation (Insulated ends excluded ) – Steady state solution of two dimensional
heat equation (Insulated edges excluded ) – Fourier series solutions in Cartesian coordinates .
9 Hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
Textbook(s) 1 B. S .Grewal , Higher Engineering Mathematics , Khanna Publications , New Delhi ,2000.
2 K.Megalai, P.Geetha and D.Jayanthi , Mathematics for Engineers, Volume III, Vikas Publishing
3 House, New Delhi, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Engineering Mathematics, Volume III, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi, 2008.
2. E. Kreyszig. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Singapore
(2008)
3. T. Veerarajan , Engineering Mathematics ,Tata McGraw Hill Publications , New Delhi, 2008.
11N302 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To study various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using Boolean functions
To study the implementation of combinational circuits
To study the design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits
To expose the students to various memory devices
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
69
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Synthesis simple combinational circuit using K-map/Quine McCluskey method.
2. Analyze/Design simple synchronous and asynchronous sequential circuits.
3. Compare logic families and memory devices.
Prerequisite(s):
Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
8 Test II† Model
Examination† Semester End Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Binary Logic.
2. What is meant by weighted and non-weighted coding?
3. State Demorgan‘s theorem.
4. What are combinational circuits?
5. Give an example of a switching function that contains only cyclic prime implicant.
6. What is prime implicant?
7. What are ‗minterms‘ and ‗maxterms‘?
8. List out the characteristics of digital logic family. 9. List out the various types of flip-flop.
10. What is the difference between a latch and a flip-flop?
11. How to eliminate the hazard?
12. What are the types of counter?
13. What are the two models in synchronous sequential circuits?
14. What is meant by race condition in digital circuit?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
70
15. List out the basic types of programmable logic devices.
16. How PLA differs from ROM?
17. What is mask programmable gate array?
Understand
1. Compute the hexadecimal equivalent of the decimal number 256.
2. Compute the octal equivalent of the decimal number 64. 3. Express x+yz as the sum of minterms.
4. Compute the value of X = A B C (A+D) if A=0; B=1; C=1 and D=1.
5. Compute the complement of x+yz.
6. How will you use a 4 input NAND gate as a 2 input NAND gate?
7. Show the NAND gate using AND gate and OR gate.
8. List out the truth table of the function: F = x y + x y‘ + y ‘z
9. Interpret the switching function Y= BC‘ + A‘B + D
10. Illustrate the truth table of a full adder.
11. Illustrate the truth table of a half subtractor.
12. Draw the circuit of half adder.
13. Draw the wave forms showing static 1 hazard. 14. Distinguish between a decoder and a demultiplexer.
15. Draw the logic diagram of 8 to 1 line multiplexer.
16. How many parity bits are required to form Hamming code if message bits are 6?
17. Generate the even parity hamming codes for the following binary data 1101, 1001
18. How will you convert a JK flip flop into a D flip flop?
Apply
1. Why the NAND and NOR gates are known as Universal gates?
2. Simplify using K-map to obtain a minimum POS expression (A‘ + B‘+C+D) (A+B‘+C+D) (A+B+C+D‘)
(A+B+C‘+D‘) (A‘+B+C‘+D‘) (A+B+C‘+D)
3. Find the Minterm expansion of f (a, b, c, d) = a‘ (b‘+d) + acd‘
4. Show that if all the gates in a two – level AND-OR gate networks are replaced by NAND gates the output function does not change.
5. Implement Y = (A+C) (A+D‘) (A+B+C‘) using NOR gates only.
6. Using a single 7483, Draw the logic diagram of a 4 bit adder/sub tractor
7. Realize a BCD to Excess 3 code conversion circuit starting from its truth table.
8. Implement the switching function F= Σm (0, 1, 3, 4, 7) using a 4 input MUX.
9. Using SR flip flops, design a parallel counter which counts in the sequence
000,111,101,110,001,010,000………….
10. How will you minimize the number of rows in the primitive state table of an incompletely specified
sequential machine?
11. Implement the switching functions:
Z1 = ab‘d‘e + a‘b‘c‘e‘ + bc + de Z2 = a‘c‘e, Z3 = bc +de+c‘d‘e‘+bd and Z4 = a‘c‘e +ce Using a 5*8*4 PLA
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Give the comparison between combinational circuits and sequential circuits.
2. Derive the characteristic equation of a T flip flop.
3. Derive the characteristic equation of a SR flip flop.
4. Derive the characteristic equation of a JK flip flop.
5. Illustrate PAL Structure.
6. Illustrate PLA Structure.
7. Compare SPLD and CPLD.
8. What is the difference between factory and field programmable logic device?
9. Distinguish between PAL and PLA. 10. Give the classification of memory.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
71
Create
1. Develop the state diagram and primitive flow table for a logic system that has 2 inputs x and y and an
output z. And reduce primitive flow table. The behavior of the circuit is stated as follows. Initially x=y=0
whenever x=1 and y = 0 then z=1, whenever x = 0 and y = 1 then z = 0.When x = y = 0 or x = y = 1 no
change in z it remains in the previous state. The logic system has edge triggered inputs without having a
clock 1 .The logic system changes state on the rising edges of the 2 inputs. Static input values are not to
have any effect in changing the Z output.
2. Design the combinational circuit with 3 inputs and 1 output. The output is 1 when the binary value of the inputs is less than 3.The output is 0 otherwise.
3. Design a switching circuit that converts a 4 bit binary code into a 4 bit Gray code using ROM array
4. Design a synchronous counter with states 0, 1, 2,3,0,1 …………. Using JK FF.
5. Construct the state diagram and primitive flow table for an asynchronous network that has two inputs and
one output. The input sequence X 1 X2 = 00, 01, 11 causes an output to become 1.The next input change
then causes an output to return to 0.No other inputs will produce a 1 output.
6. Design an asynchronous sequential circuit with two inputs X and Y and with one output Z. Whenever Y is
1, input X is transferred to Z. When Y is 0, the output does not change for any change in X.
Unit I
Number System & Boolean Algebra
Review of number system; Types and conversion codes – Boolean algebra: De-Morgan‘s theorem – switching
functions and simplification using K-maps & Quine McCluskey method.
Binary codes, Gray code, Excess-3 code
9 Hours
Unit II
Combinational Circuits
Design using logic gates – Design of adders, subtractors, comparators, code converters, encoders, decoders,
Multiplexers and demultiplexers – Function realization using multiplexers.
Full subtractor, Code converters
9 Hours
Unit III
Synchronous Sequential Circuits
Flip flops - SR, JK - MSJK and D and T – Analysis of synchronous sequential circuits; Design of synchronous
sequential circuits – Counters, state diagram; state reduction; state assignment.
T flip-flop
9 Hours
Unit IV
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits
Analysis of asynchronous sequential machines – State assignment – Asynchronous design problem – Difference between Synchronous and Asynchronous Sequential Circuits.
Asynchronous Sequential Circuits
9 Hours
Unit V
Logic Families and Memory Devices
Logic Families: TTL, ECL, CMOS – Memories: ROM, PROM, EPROM – Study of memory ICs – Control signals
and their programming – Programmable Logic Devices: PLA, PAL, PLD and FPGA.
Comparison between SPLD, CPLD and FPGA
9 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
72
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Floyd, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education, 2008
2. M. Morris Mano, Digital Logic and Computer Design, Prentice Hall of India, 2008
Reference(s)
1. John M. Yarbrough, Digital Logic, Application & Design, Thomson, 2010
2. Charles H. Roth, Fundamentals Logic Design, Jaico Publishing, 2009
3. John F. Wakerly, Digital Design Principles and Practice, Pearson Education, 2009
11N303 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To make the students to gain a clear knowledge of the basic laws governing the operation of electrical
instruments and the measurement techniques.
Emphasis is laid on the meters used to measure current & voltage.
To have an adequate knowledge in the measurement techniques for power and energy meters are included.
Elaborate discussion about potentiometer and instrument transformers.
Detailed study of resistance, inductance and capacitance measuring methods.
Study of display devices.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Explain the construction and working principle of various types of measuring instruments..
2. Apply the skills to convert electrical quantity into readable form.
3. Design a circuit to convert changes in resistance or impendence into a change in voltage
Prerequisite(s)
Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits taught in 2nd semster
Basics in Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory taught in 2nd semester
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
73
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†9
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Recall the operating forces present in an analog instrument.
2. Name the four different types of instrument used for making ammeter and voltmeter.
3. Define deflecting torque.
4. Define controlling torque.
5. State the basic principle of PMMC instrument. 6. State the basic principle of moving iron instrument.
7. List the two types of moving iron instrument.
8. State the basic principle of dynamometer type instrument.
9. State the basic principle of rectifier type instrument.
10. Identify two different methods for wattmeter calibration.
11. State the criteria to balance a Wheatstone bridge.
12. State the criteria to balance a Kelvin bridge.
13. Define the term NULL as it applies to bridge balance.
14. List two methods used for the measurement of capacitance.
15. State the number of balance equations and variable elements required for AC bridges.(R)
16. Define the term working current in potentiometer circuits.(R) 17. Define the term standardization of a potentiometer.
18. Recall the demerits of shunts and multipliers.
19. Name two applications of AC potentiometer.
20. List two methods for testing current transformers.
21. Name four errors caused in potential transformer.
22. List the three different ways to express the accuracy.
23. Draw a basic AC bridge network.
24. State the burden of a current transformer.
25. Define chassis ground.
26. List the main source of errors in PMMC instruments.
27. State the Blondel‘s theorem.
28. Name two application of Wien‘s bridge. 29. Recall four merits of digital oscilloscope.
30. Define transfer instrument.
31. State the benefits of fictitious loading.
32. List the four application of DC potentiometer.
33. Name four materials that are used to fabricate light emitting diode.
34. Quote two methods for measurement of inductance.
Understand
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
74
1. Indicate the ammeter and voltmeter connection in a circuit.
2. Estimate the unknown frequency using a Wien‘s bridge.
3. Tell about Megger.
4. Infer the conditions that must be satisfied to balance an AC bridge.
5. Discuss about volt-ratio box.
6. Explain the procedure to measure unknown voltage using polar type AC potentiometer.
7. Illustrate the process to measure unknown voltage using coordinate type AC potentiometer.
8. Express the current and voltage measurement process with the help of instrument transformers.
9. Predict role of ratio and phase angle errors in case of a C.T. 10. Estimate the operation of vertical amplifier used in CRO.
11. Predict the operation of vertical amplifier used in CRO.
12. Tell about astigmatism control.
13. Indicate the specialties of a storage Oscilloscope.
14. Discuss about bistable persistence storage.
15. Predict the special features incorporated in an electrodynamometer wattmeter to make it as a LPF
wattmeter.
16. Discuss the necessity to make the potential coil circuit purely resistive.
17. Tell about creeping of a meter.
18. Indicate the need for LPF wattmeter in power measurement.
19. Discuss about phantom loading. 20. Predict the current coil and voltage coil connection in induction type energy meter.
21. Illustrate the construction and working of moving coil instrument
22. Explain the construction and working of moving iron instrument
23. Illustrate the construction and working of dynamometer type instrument
24. Discuss about the construction and working of rectifier type instrument
25. Express the construction and working of dynamometer wattmeter.
26. Summarize the construction and working principle of the three-phase energy meter.
27. Illustrate the principle of an induction type energy meter and obtain an expression for its deflecting torque.
28. Discuss the power measurement scheme using instrument transformer.
29. Explain the operation of an oscilloscope with its functional block.
Apply 1. Produce the steps to obtain an expression for steady state deflection of a moving coil instrument.
2. Generalize the steps to obtain the expression for steady state deflection of a moving iron instrument.
3. Organize the procedure to get an expression for steady state deflection of a dynamometer type instrument.
4. Prepare an expression for deflecting torque of a dynamometer wattmeter.
5. Sketch the circuit of a Kelvin double bridge used for measurement resistances and examine the condition
for balance.
6. Produce steps to get the expression for Wien‘s Bridge in terms of bridge parameters.
7. Prepare an equation for balancing an Anderson bridge and sketch its phasor diagram..
8. Generalize the procedure to get balance equation of a Schering and sketch its phasor diagram.
9. A moving coil instrument has the following data: number of turns=100, width of coil=20mm, depth of
coil=30mm, flux density in the gap=0.1Wb/m2.Calculate the deflecting torque when carrying a current of 10mA also calculate the deflection if the control spring constant is 2x10-6Nm/degree.
10. In a dynamometer wattmeter the moving coil has 500 turns of mean diameter 30mm. Calculate the torque if
the axes of the field and the moving coil s are at(a)600 (b) 900.When the flux density produced by field
coils is 15 X 10-3Wb/m2,the current in moving coil is 0.05 A and the power factor is 0.866.
11. The pressure coil of an electrodynamometer wattmeter has a resistance of 6600 Ω. When the voltage
applied to the pressure coil is 120V and a current of 20 A flows in the series coil, the deflection is 160.
Calculate the additional resistance that must be connected in the pressure coil circuit to make the constant
of meter equal to 20W per degree.
12. A 3 phase 500 V motor load has a power factor of 0.4 .Two wattmeters connected to measure the input.
13. They show the input to be 30kW. Calculate the reading of each instrument.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
75
14. A Kelvin bridge is balanced with following constants: outer ratio arm 100Ω and 1000Ω; Inner arms ratio
99.92Ω and 1000.6Ω; Resistance of link, 0.1Ω; standard resistance, 0.00377Ω.Calculate the value of
Unknown resistance.
15. A capacitor bushing forms arm ab of a Schering bridge and a standard capacitor of 500pF capacitance and
negligible loss, forms arm ad. Arm bc consists of a non-inductive resistance of 300.when the bridge is
balanced arm cd has a resistance of 72.6Ω in parallel with a capacitance of 0.148µF. The supply frequency
is 50Hz.Calculte the capacitance and dielectric loss angle of capacitor.
16. Calculate the insulation resistance of a cable in which the voltage falls from 100 to 80 V in 20s.The
capacitance is 300pF. 17. A CRO with a sensitivity of 5v/cm is used .An AC voltage is applied to the Y-input. A 10cm long straight
line is observed. Determine the AC voltage.
18. The lissajous pattern on a CRO is stationary and has five input horizontal and two vertical tangencies. The
frequency of the horizontal input is 1000Hz.Determine the frequency of vertical input.
19. A CRO is set to a time base of 0.1ms/cm with a 10cm amplitude .Sketch the display of the pulse signal
waveform with pulse repetition rate of 2000Hz and a duty cycle of 25%.
20. A sampling oscilloscope is being used to observe a 400MHz sine wave. A sampling pulse occurs every 3
ns. Draw five cycles of the 400 MHz signal and place a dot at the sampled point on each of the cycle.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare Moving coil and Moving Iron Instrument. 2. Classify the measuring instruments based on their operating principle and applications.
3. Compare repulsion type and attractive type instrument.
4. Point out the importance of earth‘s resistance value.
5. Differentiate between current transformer and potential transformer.
6. Develop a procedure to calibrate a wattmeter using potentiometer.
7. Analyze the role of delayed sweep in waveform measurements.
8. Compare analog and digital storage oscilloscopes.
9. Develop the technique to protect the instrument from overloading and short circuit conditions.
10. Infer the major conclusions about AC bridges by analyzing the balance equation of Inductance Comparison
Bridge
11. Outline the steps to eliminate the mutual effects between the two elements of the wattmeter.
12. Point out the role sampling CRO to increase apparent frequency of an oscilloscope. 13. Analyze different instruments used for measuring voltage and current.
14. Investigate different instruments used for measuring power and energy.
15. Point out the reasons to get large errors when the power factor is low in power measurement.
16. Infer the conditions to be satisfied by the device for emitting visible light.
17. Compare the operation of different types of bridge circuits.
Create
1. In an Anderson Bridge for the measurement of inductance the arm AB consists of an unknown impedance
with inductance L and R, a known variable resistance in arm BC, fixed resistance or 600Ω each in arms CD
an DA, a known variable resistance in arm DE, and a capacitor with fixed capacitance of 1 microfarad in
the arm CE. The a.c. supply of 100Hz is connected across A and C, and the detector is connected between
B and E. If the balance is obtained with a resistance of 400Ω in the arm DE and a resistance of 800Ω in the arm BC, Formulate the value of unknown R and L.
2. Design a bridge circuit to employ in a harmonic distortion analyzer for discriminating 1 kHz frequency.
Assume R1 = 1 kΩ, R2 = 2 kΩ, and C1 = 0.1 µF.
3. Make proper connection diagram in the secondary of current transformer to safely measure the high current
using low range ammeters.
4. Construct a circuit to measure current using CRO and explain its operation.
5. Devise a potentiometer circuit to measure an unknown voltage (between 0 and 1V). Use a 1.0186V
standard emf cell and assume suitable dial resistances. Explain the voltage measurement process using the
circuit.
Unit I
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
76
Measurement of Voltage and Current
Types of ammeters and voltmeters - PMMC Instruments - Moving iron Instruments- Dynamometer type Instruments
- Rectifier type Instruments.
Comparison of different Instruments
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Power and Energy
Electrodynamometer wattmeter – Theory & its errors – Methods of correction – LPF wattmeter – Phantom loading –
Measurement of power in three phase circuits - three phase wattmeters - Induction type KWH meter – Calibration of wattmeter, energy meter.
Phantom loading
9 Hours
Unit III
Measurement of Resistance and Impedance
DC Bridges- Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin double bridge and Direct deflection methods-AC bridges- Maxwell, Wien‘s
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
77
To impart knowledge on the fluid properties and application to real situations of fluid flow
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Distinguish between Stresses and Strains..
2. Compare rate of loading, shear force and bending moment.
3. Interpret the fundamentals of fluid systems.
4. Classify the pumps, fluid flow and fluid flow measuring devices.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledgw in basic of Cvil amd Mechanical Engineering
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version) Test 1
†10
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 50 50 50 50
4 Analyze - - - -
5 Evaluate - - - -
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember 1. Define stress.
2. Define strain.
3. State Hooke‘s law.
4. Define Elasticity.
5. Give the relationship between bulk modulus, young‘s modulus and poisson‘s ratio.
6. What is the necessity of calculating the values of thermal stresses in structural members?
7. What are the types of beams?
8. What are the different types of end conditions in a beam?
9. What are the different types of loads?
10. Define shear force and bending moment
11. What do you mean by point of contraflexure
12. Define fluids.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
78
13. Enumerate the important fluid properties with their units of measurement.
14. List the various pressure measuring instruments.
15. What is an incompressible fluid flow?
16. List the forces present in fluid flow.
17. What is Euler‘s equation of motion?
18. State Bernoulli‘s theorem.
19. What is specific speed of the turbine?
20. How pumps are classified?
Understand 1. Draw the stress strain curve of a ductile material.
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagram for a simply supported beam subjected to a couple
3. How are fluids classified?
4. Explain the importance of viscosity in fluid flow.
5. What do you understand by Continuity Equation?
6. Under what conditions one can treat real fluid flow as irrotational.
7. List the properties of stream function
8. State the assumptions used in deriving Bernoulli‘s equation.
9. Mention the applications of Bernoulli‘s equation.
10. Compare venture meter with orifice meter and mention the advantages of venture meter.
11. Discuss in brief how and when separation of flow takes place in a reciprocating pump. 12. Differentiate between the volute casing and vortex casing for the centrifugal pump.
Apply
1. How will you calculate yield stress?
2. How will you calculate ultimate stress?
3. Why does the viscosity of a gas increases with the increase in temperature while that of a liquid decreases
with increase in temperature?
4. Sketch the velocity distribution for uniform irrotational flow.
5. Derive the continuity equation for three dimensional flow.
6. Describe the use and limitations of the flow nets.
7. Drive Bernoulli‘s equation for the flow of an incompressible fluid.
8. Explain the principle of venturimeter with a neat sketch. Derive the expression for the rate of flow of fluid through it.
9. What would happen if cavitations occur in centrifugal pump?
Unit I
Simple Stresses and Strains
Tension, compression and shear stresses – Hooke‘s law – stress – strain diagram for mild steel – ultimate stress and
working stress – Elastic constants and relationships between them – composite bars – Temperature stresses
Relationship between stress and strain
Relationship between stress and strain
9 Hours
Unit II
Beams and Bending
Types of beams – Types of supports – shear force and bending moment of beams. Sketching of shear force and
bending moment diagrams for cantilever, simply supported and over hanging beams for any type of loading –
Relationship between rate of loading, shear force and bending moment.
Types of beam supports
9 Hours
Unit III
Fluid Properties and Kinematics
Fundamental units – mass density – specific weight – viscosity – surface tension- capillarity – compressibility.
Streamline – streak line – path line – continuity equation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
79
Types of fluids
9 Hours
Unit IV
Fluid Dynamics and Flow through Pipes
Stream and potential functions – Laminar flow, Turbulent flow-Bernoulli‘s equation – Darcy‘s equation – Pipes in
series and parallel – major and minor losses – hydraulic grade line – venturi meter – orifice meter – manometer.
Moody diagram
9 Hours
Unit V
Hydraulic Pumps
Classification of pumps - Centrifugal pumps - Multistage pumps - Minimum speed to start the pump – Specific
Constructional details, principle of operation, performance, starters and testing of D.C machines
Constructional details, principle of operation, equivalent circuit and performance of transformers
Constructional details, types, principle of operation and performance of three phase and single phase
induction motors
Constructional details and principle of operation of synchronous machines
Constructional details and principle of operation of special machines
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Explain the construction and working of transformers, AC machines and DC machines.
2. Analyze the operation and characteristics of transformers, AC machines and DC machines
3. Summarize the principle of operation of different kinds of special machines .
Prerequisite(s)
Baisc knowledge of physics taught in High Schools
Basic knowledge of Electric Circuit Analysis
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
83
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†12
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Intensive and Extensive property with examples.
2. Define path, process, and cycle.
3. State Kelvin-plank statement of second law of thermodynamics.
4. Define refrigerator.
5. Define heat engine.
6. What are the differences between Petrol and Diesel engine?
7. What are the advantages of Multi- stage compressor over the single stage air Compressor?
8. Define volumetric efficiency of a compressor.
9. Define ton of refrigeration and COP.
Understand
1. What is meant by steady flow system?
2. What is the effect of Cut-off ratio in the efficiency of a Diesel cycle?
3. What are the limitations of first law of thermodynamics?
4. Sketch the P-V diagram of dual cycle and mark the processes.
5. Find out the specific volume of at a temperature of 200º C and 0.7 dry.
6. Differentiate 2-stroke and 4-stroke engines.
7. What are the disadvantages of a single stage reciprocating air compressor?
8. What is the similarity between Diesel and Dual cycle?
9. What is meant by COP?
10. Write the difference between Refrigerator and Air Conditioner.
Apply / Evaluate
1. How will you classify the Internal Combustion engines?
2. How the ignition takes place in C.I. Engine?
3. Find out the specific volume of at a temperature of 200º C and 0.7 dry.
4. For the same compression ratio and heat rejection, which is most efficient: Otto, Diesel or Dual? Explain
with PV and TS diagrams.
5. How the use of multistage compression improves the volumetric efficiency of air compressor?
6. Compare steady state and unsteady state heat transfer.
7. Find the enthalpy and entropy of the dry steam at a pressure of 30 bar.
8. Determine the molecular volume of any perfect gas at 600 N/m2 and 30ºC. Universal gas constant may be
taken as 8314 J / kg mole – K.
9. Differentiate impulse and reaction turbines. 10. How will you increase the Cooling Effect in Refrigerator?
Create
1. Design the efficiency and mean pressure for petrol engine working with the compression ratio of 5.5. The
pressure and temperature at the beginning of the compression are 1bar and 300k respectively. The peak
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
84
pressure is 30bar. Assume ratio of specific heats to be 1.4 for air. (Use of standard steam tables and
refrigeration tables are permitted)
Unit I
D.C. Machines
Constructional details – Principle of operation of D.C. generator - EMF equation – Methods of excitation – Self and
separately excited generators – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound generators – Principle of operation of
D.C. motor – Back EMF and torque equation – Characteristics of series, shunt and compound motors – Starting of
DC motors – Types of starters – Speed control of DC shunt motors. Applications of DC motors
9 Hours
Unit II
Transformers
Constructional details – Principle of operation – emf equation – Transformation ratio – Transformer on no load –
Parameters referred to HV/LV windings – Equivalent circuit – Transformer on load – Regulation - Testing – Load
test, open circuit and short circuit tests.
Transformation ratio
9 Hours
Unit III
Induction Motors Construction – Types – Principle of operation of three phase induction motors – Equivalent circuit – Torque
equation - Torque-Slip Characteristics – Starting of Induction motors – Types of starters – Single-phase induction
motors (only qualitative treatment).
Equivalent circuit
9 Hours
Unit IV
Synchronous Machines
Construction of synchronous machines – Types of synchronous machines – EMF equation – Voltage regulation;
EMF and MMF methods – Principle of operation of Synchronous motor- Synchronous condenser- Synchronous
Motor V curves and Inverted V curves - Applications of Synchronous Motors – Comparison of Synchronous and
Induction Motors.
Voltage regulation of synchronous machine
9 Hours
Unit V
Special Motors
Brushless DC motor – Reluctance motor – Hysteresis motor – Variable reluctance Stepper motor – Permanent
magnet stepper motor – Universal motor.
Application of Permanent magnet stepper motor
9 Hours
Total: 45Hours
Textbook(s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electric Machines, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, 2010.
Reference(s)
1. S. K. Bhattacharya, Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd, 2010.
2. A.E.Fitzgerald and Stephen Umans, Electric Machinery, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd,
2005.
3. B.L.Theraja, Textbook(s) of Electrical Technology, S.Chand publications, 2007
4. Siskind, Electrical Machines, 2011
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
85
11N307 ELECTRICALCIRCUITS&MACHINES LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To study and determine the characteristics of various electric circuit components
To study and simulate Ohm‘s Law and Kirchhoff‘s Laws used in electric circuit analysis
To verify various network theorems used in electric circuit analysis
To study and simulate mesh loop current method used in electric circuit analysis
To equip the students to do the basic operations and characteristics of DC motor and AC motor and help
them to develop innovative ideas in engineering
To study and determine the characteristics of single phase transformers and Induction motor to develop
student experimental skills
To design a simple measurement system for the specified configuration.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcomes As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Use the standard methods to determine the characteristics for various electrical machines and transformers.
2. Measure resistance and impedance using bridges.
3. Determine the parameters of simple electric circuit using network laws/theorems
Prerequisite(s)
Basics knowledge of Electric Circuits and Machines
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
86
1. Define current, voltage and power.
2. Define resistance, inductance and capacitance.
3. List the uses of ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter.
4. State Ohm‘s law.
5. State Kirchhoff‘s laws.
6. Define mesh and node.
7. State Superposition and Milliman‘s theorem.
8. State Thevenin‘s and Norton‘s theorem.
9. Describe the regulation of a transformer. 10. State the principle of motor.
11. List out the types of motor.
12. Define back emf. Give its significance
13. Describe about mutual inductance.
14. Name the types of transformer.
15. Describe the terms Open circuit and short circuit.
16. Define the term transformation ratio.
17. Define power factor.
18. List out the concepts of double field revolving theory and cross field theory.
19. Define the slip of an induction motor.
20. Outline the criteria for balance of a Wheatstone bridge.
Understand
1. Indicate how the ammeters and voltmeters connected in any circuit. State reason.
2. Explain why the voltmeters have high resistance and ammeters have low resistance.
3. Demonstrate the methods available to measure three phase power.
4. Distinguish self excited and separately excited machines.
5. Summarize the methods of speed control of DC motors.
6. Infer the loading arrangement used in a DC motor.
7. Infer the mechanical and electrical characteristics of a DC shunt motor.
8. Indicate the importance of speed control of DC motor in industrial applications.
9. Judge the better of the two methods of speed control is better and justify.
10. Demonstrate why the speed of DC shunts motor practically constant under normal load condition.
11. Summarize the factors affecting the speed of a DC shunt motor. 12. Show the purpose of OC and SC tests.
13. Discuss the disadvantages of low power factor.
14. Give the conditions that must be satisfied to make an AC bridge balance.
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. Difference analog voltmeter and digital voltmeter.
2. Compare the resistance of the armature and field winding.
3. Compare balanced and unbalanced circuits.
4. Outline the method measure the single phase power.
5. Differentiate line voltage from phase voltage.
6. Detect the formula for the resonant frequency in a series RLC circuit.
7. Point out the expression for single phase AC power. 8. Show the relation between the line and phase value of voltage and current in a balanced star connected
load.
9. Show the relation between the line and phase voltage of voltage current in a balanced delta connected
10. Show the relation between the power factor and wattmeter readings in two-wattmeter method of power
measurement.
11. Explain the methods to reverse t the direction of rotation of a DC shunt motor.
12. Analyze why the field rheostat is kept in the position of minimum resistance.
13. Illustrate how the speed of a DC shunt motor vary with armature voltage and field current.
14. Examine why the capacity of a transformer specified as KVA and not as KW.
15. Compare the efficiencies of a transformers and motors.
16. Analyze the importance of transformer core lamination.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
87
17. Detect why the single phase induction motors are not self starting. Classify them according to the starting
methods.
18. Compare LPF, UPF and ZPF.
Create
1. Develop the equivalent circuit of the given single phase transformer by conducting a suitable test
2. Devise a suitable test and determine the fraction of load at which maximum efficiency occurs in the given
single phase transformer.
3. Compile the regulation of single phase transformer at zero pf. 4. Derive the expression for Wien‘s bridge in terms of bridge parameters.
5. Derive the equation of balance for an Anderson bridge. Draw the phasor diagram for condition under
balance.
6. Devise the problems associated with measurement of high resistance.
7. Devise the problems encountered in measurement of high resistance.
List of Experiments
1. Verification of Network Theorems. (Superposition and Thevenin‘s).
2. Verification of Ohm‘s Law and Kirchhoff‘s Laws.
3. Circuit analysis using Mesh Current and Nodal Voltage Method.
4. Three Phase Power Measurement by Two Wattmeter Method. 5. Load test on DC shunt motor.
6. Load test on single phase transformer.
7. Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer.
8. Load test on single-phase induction motor.
9. Measurement of inductance & capacitance using AC Bridge.
10. Measurement of resistance using Wheat stone‘s bridge and Kelvin's double bridge.
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Verification of Network Theorems(Superposition and Thevenin‘s) 6
2 Verification of Ohm‘s Law and Kirchhoff‘s Laws 6
3 Circuit analysis using Mesh Current and Nodal Voltage Method 6
4 Three Phase Power Measurement by Two Wattmeter Method 3
5 Load test on DC shunt motor 3
6 Load test on single phase transformer 3
7 Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer 3
8 Load test on single-phase induction motor 3
9 Measurement of inductance & capacitance using AC Bridge 6
10 Measurement of resistance using Wheat stone‘s bridge and Kelvin's double bridge 6
11 Mini project ---
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
88
11N308 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To acquire knowledge about the functionality of the solid state devices
To learn how to apply the solid state devices for an specified application
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Determine the VI characteristics solid state devices.
2. Obtain frequency responses of amplifiers.
3. Design a rectifier, simple amplifier and oscillator circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Electron devices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define transistor.
2. What are the different types of transistor?
3. List out the various hybrid parameters of transistor.
4. Define JFET.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
89
5. Define UJT.
6. What is meant by rectifiers?
7. List out the types of rectifiers.
8. State amplification factor.
9. Define mutual conductance.
10. Give the circuit diagram of an inverter using enhancement MOSFET.
11. Mention the uses of MOSFET.
12. What is SCR?
13. Define oscillator. 14. List out the types of oscillator
15. What is differential amplifier?
16. Mention its two modes of operation of differential amplifier.
Understand 1. What are the differences between input and output waveforms of rectifiers?
2. Why a low power FET is called as a square law device?
3. Why is a minimum hFE value required for the circuit to function as an oscillator?
4. Why do we need three RC networks for phase shift oscillator?
5. Are drain and source interchangeable in MOSFETs?
6. Find an approximate expression for the frequency of oscillation of Hartley Oscillator.
7. What factors are to be considered for selecting the operating point Q for an amplifier? 8. What is the need for biasing a transistor?
9. What do you understand the dc analysis and ac analysis of differential amplifiers?
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. How will you calculate base current?
2. How will you calculate amplification factor?
3. How the transconductance of a JFET varies with drain current and gate voltage?
4. How does one RC section generate a phase difference of 60o?
5. What is depletion MOSFET? Analyze the basic structure of N-channel depletion MOSFET.
6. Analyze the important physical difference between an enhancement and depletion MOSFET.
7. Write down the expression for frequency of oscillation in wein bridge oscillators.
8. Write the equation for volt-ampere characteristics of photodiode. 9. Determine the h-parameters from the characteristics of CB configuration?
10. How will you determine the h-parameters from the characteristics of CE configuration?
Create
1. Design a UJT relaxation oscillator to generate a saw tooth waveform at a frequency of 600Hz. Assume the
supply voltage VBB=18V, VP=2.9V, VV=1.118V.
2. For an n-channel D-MOSFET IDSS = 10 mA and VGS (off) =-6V. If it operates with VGS = 0V, a load RD =
500 ohm and a power supply VDD = 10 V connected to the drain, find the value of VDS.
List of Experiments
1. Characteristics of transistor under CE, CC and determination of hybrid parameters. 2. V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and Zener diode.
3. Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET.
4. Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator.
5. Characteristics of SCR & MOSFET.
6. Characteristics of single phase half wave and full wave rectifiers with and without filters.
7. Design of Phase shift oscillator and Hartley oscillator.
8. Frequency response of feedback amplifier.
9. Power amplifier.
10. Frequency response of Differential Amplifier.
Mini Project
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
90
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Characteristics of transistor under CE, CC and determination of hybrid parameters 6
2 V-I characteristics of PN junction diode and Zener diode 3
3 Static characteristics and parameter determination of JFET 6
4 Static characteristics of UJT and its application as a relaxation oscillator 6
5 Characteristics of SCR & MOSFET 3
6 Characteristics of single phase half wave and full wave rectifiers with and without filters 3
7 Design of Phase shift oscillator and Hartley oscillator 6
8 Frequency response of feedback amplifier 3
9 Power amplifier 6
10 Frequency response of Differential Amplifier 3
11 Mini project ---
11N309 FLUID CONTROLLER AND APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
Expertise in the various thermodynamic concepts and principles.
To reinforce and enhance the understanding the fundamentals of Fluid mechanics and Hydraulic machines.
To provide practice in making engineering judgments, estimates and assessing the reliability of your
measurements, skills which are very important in all engineering disciplines
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Understand the thermodynamics concepts and principles to implement in the real Engineering field.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
91
2. Measure viscosity, flow rate and discharge level of pumps.
3. Design simple fluid power circuits, Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits.
Prerequisite(s)
Baisc knowledge of Fluid and Solid Mechanics and Applied Thermodynamics
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Internal Assessment Semester end Examination
Preparation 10 15
Observation and Results
25 25
Record 5 -
Mini-project/Model
Examination / Viva-voce
10 10
Total 50 50
Remember
1. What is valve timing and port timing?
2. Define cetane number and octane number?
3. List some factors that affect performance of the engine?
4. Is the heat balancing is necessary
5. Give the firing order based on number of cylinder?
6. What is Frictional power?
7. Define Specific Fuel Consumption?
8. What is Brake power?
9. What roll the viscosity of oil plays in engine? 10. Define fluid statics.
11. What is fluid mechanics?
12. What is fluid kinetics?
13. Define Viscosity.
14. What are Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids?
15. Define Surface Tension
16. What is meant by transition state
17. Define Pascal‘s law
18. What is meant by energy lines.
Understand 1. Real-time application of various cycles.
2. Thermodynamic Laws and application..
3. Concepts of various thermal applications.
4. Efficiency of different type engines.
5. Energy balancing of thermal power.
6. When will you select a reciprocating pump?
7. Compare the viscosity of the different fluid.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
92
8. Difference between the laminar and turbulent flow.
9. How can Apply of Continuity equations?
10. How to apply Bernoulli‘s equation for incompressible fluid.?
11. Difference between Fluid forces and momentum principle
12. Why fluid flow losses in designing fluid circuits ?
Apply/Evaluate
1. How to tune up the engine performance?
2. How to avoid the heat loss in engine? 3. How to differentiate diesel and petrol engine?
4. How to best suit the right engine for the various application?
5. Find various properties of given fluid.
6. Create various types of flow using given fluid and pump.
7. Designing manometers for various applications.
8. Applying Bernoulli‘s equation and finding flow of given fluid flow
Create
1. Can perform testing of blended oil performance.
2. Spirit for advancement of engine components.
3. May try for non-fossil fuels 4. Design and make a simple model to verify P=ρgh.
5. Make a own measuring device to measure the velocity of flowing fluid in a water tap.
6. To perform the calibration of various fluid measurement device.
List of Experiments
1. Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams
2. Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine by varying the load condition
3. Find out the Viscosity value of the given oil sample by using – Red Wood Viscometer
4. Find out the Flash Point and Fire Point Temperature of the given fuel samples
5. Performance test on Multistage Reciprocating Air Compressor by varying the delivery pressure
6. Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter & Venturimeter 7. Analyze the performance of centrifugal pump by varying the discharge level of the water
8. Performance test on Submergible pump by varying the discharge level of the water
9. Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control
i. velocity
ii. direction and
iii. force of single and double acting
10. Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using simulation software
Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Valve Timing and Port Timing Diagrams
3 2 Performance Test on 4-stroke Diesel Engine by varying the load condition 3
3 Find out the Viscosity value of the given oil sample by using – Red
Wood Viscometer 6
4 Find out the Flash Point and Fire Point Temperature of the given fuel samples 6
5 Performance test on Multistage Reciprocating Air Compressor by varying the delivery pressure 3
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
93
6 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter
& Venturimeter 6
7 Analyze the performance of centrifugal pump by varying the discharge level of the water 3
8 Performance test on Submergible pump by varying the discharge
level of the water 3
9
Design and testing of fluid power circuits to control
i)velocity
ii)direction and
iii) force of single and double acting
6
10 Design of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using simulation software 6
11 Mini project -
Total 45
11N401, 11E401 NUMERICAL METHODS AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
Acquire the knowledge of finding approximate solutions of algebraic, transcendental, differential and
integral equations by numerical methods and interpolating the values of a function using Lagrange‘s and
Newton‘s polynomial approximations.
Ability to find solution of initial and boundary value problems using multi step approximations and obtain an optimum solutions of Linear Programming Problems.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Attain solutions to algebraic and transcendental equations..
2. Solve problems using numerical differentiation, integration and interpolation.
3. Find solutions for an ordinary differential equation with initial conditions..
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I,II and III
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
94
Assessment Pattern
S. No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test
I13
Test II
1 Model
Examination1
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 40 40 40 40
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze/ Evaluate 10 10 10 10
5 Create 00 00 00 00
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Algebraic and Transcendental equations.
2. Write the formula for Regula False method & Newton‘s method.
3. What do you mean by Interpolation? 4. State Newton‘s Divided difference formula.
5. State the derivatives of Newton‘s Forward and Backward Interpolation formula.
6. Write the conditions for applying Trapezoidal & Simpson‘s rule.
7. What do you mean by Single step and Multi step method?
8. Write the formula for Euler‘s and Modified Euler‘s method.
9. What are the limitations of Graphical method?
10. Define Slack and Surplus variables.
Understand
1. What do you meant by Numerical methods?
2. What is the condition of convergence of Regula False position method?
3. State the order and condition of convergence of Newton‘s method 4. What are the methods for solving simultaneous algebraic equations?
5. Write the differences between Direct and Iterative methods.
6. State the sufficient condition for solving Gauss seidel method.
7. What do you mean by Power method?
8. Write Milne‘s and Adam‘s Predictor, Corrector formula.
9. What is feasible region?
10. Define Optimum basic feasible solution.
Apply
1. Obtain by power method, the numerically largest eigen value of the matrix
2420
61210
3415
A with the starting vector
1
1
1)0(x .Perform only 4 – iterations.
2. Find N , where N is a real number, by Newton‘s method.
3. Find the parabola of the form y=ax2+bx+c passing through the points (0,0) , (1,1) & (2,20).
4. A third degree polynomial passes through (0,-1), (1,1),(2,1) & (3,-2) find its value at x=4.
13 The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and model examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly, internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
95
5. Find the value of )8('f from the table given below 158.2908.1690.1556.1:)(
12976:
xf
x
6. The table given below reveals the velocity V of a body during the time‗t‘ specified. Find its acceleration at t
= 1.1 8.604.561.527.471.43:
4.13.12.11.10.1:
v
t
7. Solve dy/dx=y2 -x2 / y2+x2 with y(0)=1 at x=0.2 find y .
8. Using Eulers‘s method, find y(0.01) from dy/dx= -x, y(0)=1.
9. Solve the following LPP: Maximize 1 24 10Z x x
Subject to the constraints 2x1+x2 50 ; 2x1+5x2 100 ; 2x1+3x2 90 ; x1, x2 0
10. Write down the four steps to be adopted in solving LPP.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Using Newton‘s method, find the positive root of cos x = 3x - 1.
3. Use Lagrange‘s interpolation formula to find the value of x when y = 20 for the following data.
X : 1 2 3 4 Y : 1 8 27 64
4. By Newton‘s divided difference formula find f(301).
5. A rod is rotating in a plane. The following table gives the angle through which the rod has turned for various
values of the time t secs 20.302.212.149.012.00:
18.06.04.02.00:
t
6. Evaluate
2. 2 2.6
2 2
2 1
dydx
x y using Trapezoidal formula.
7. Given 5 x y‘ + y 2 – 2 = 0 ; y(4 )= 1; y(4.1) = 1.0049 find
i)y ( 4.2 ) by Euler‘s method ii) y(4.3) by Runge-kutta method
iii) y ( 4.4 ) by Adam‘s method. iv) y(4.5) by Milne‘s method.
8. Using Taylor series method, find the value of y(0.1) , given dy /dx = x + y and y(0)=1 and correct to 3 decimal
places .
9. Solve the following LPP
Maximize z = 20 x 1 + 80 x 2 subject to the constraints
4 x 1 + 6 x 2 90; 8 x 1 + 6 x 2 100;
5 x 1 + 4 x 2 80; x 1 , x 2
0
10. Solve the following LPP graphically:
x 300 304 305 307
y 2.4771 2.4829 2.4843 2.4871
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
96
Maximize z = 100 x1 + 40 x
2 subject to the constraints
x1 + 2 x
2 1000; 3 x
1 + 2 x
2 900;
x1 + 2 x
2 500; x
1, x
2 0
Unit I
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Newton Raphson method, Method of false position, Graffe‘s root squaring method, Bairstow‘s method. Solution of system of linear equations: Gauss elimination method, crout‘s method and Gauss-seidel method, Eigen value of a
Numerical differentiation using Newton‘s forward and backward interpolation. Numerical integration- Two and
Three point Gaussian quadrature formulae , Trapezoidal rule and Simpson‘s 1/3 and 3/8 rules- Double integrals using Trapezoidal rule and Simpson‘s rules.
9 hours
Unit IV
Initial Value Problems for Ordinary Differential Equations
Single step Methods: Taylor‘s series method for solving first and second order equations, Euler‘s and Modified
Euler‘s method ,Fourth order Runge- Kutta method for solving first order equations-Multistep Methods: Milne‘s and
Adams- Bashforth predictor and corrector methods.
9 hours
Unit V
Linear Programming
Modelling, Graphical method, Definitions, statement of basic theorems and properties, Simplex method.
9 hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
MAT LAB: Invited Lectures on Mat lab and its applications on Numerical methods.
Textbook(s)
1. P. Kandasamy, K. Gunavathy and K. Thilagavathy, Numerical Methods, S.Chand and Co. New Delhi,
2009.
2. Kanti swarup, Gupta, Manmohan, Operations Research, Sultan Chard & Sons, New Delhi, 1995.
Reference(s)
1. Gupta and Hira, Problems in Operations Research, S.Chand & Co, New Delhi, 1991.
2. M.K.Jain, S.R.K. Iyangar, R.K.Jain ; Numerical Methods For Scientific & Engineering Computation New
Age International ( P ) Ltd , New Delhi , 2005.
3. T.Veerarajan, Numerical Methods with programs in C, Second Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill Publication
Company Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.
11N402 CONTROL ENGINEERING
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
97
To understand the different methods of system representation and obtain the transfer function model for
various types of systems
To impart necessary knowledge in the time domain response and steady state error analysis
To give basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency responses
To understand the concept of stability and methods of stability analysis
To study the various methods of designing compensators for a control system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Obtain mathematical model of a simple system
2. Determine the time and frequency response of mathematical model
3. Analyze the stability of simple systems and design the compensator to improve the system performance.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I, II and III
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†14
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
98
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define control system. 2. Draw the open loop and closed loop control system.
3. Recall the transfer function.
4. Define block diagram.
5. State signal flow graph.
6. Quote Masons Gain formula.
7. Memorize PI controller.
8. State PD controller.
9. Define PID controller.
10. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
11. Outline time response.
12. Name the different types of test signals. 13. Define step signal.
14. Define ramp signal.
15. Define parabolic signal.
16. Describe an impulse signal.
17. Identify the order of a system.
18. State damping ratio.
19. List out the time domain specifications.
20. Define delay time.
21. Define rise time.
22. Define peak time.
23. Define peak overshoot.
24. Select the correct formula for settling time. 25. Memorize the steady state error.
26. Name the generalized error coefficients.
27. Match the time and frequency response.
28. List the frequency domain specifications.
29. Define gain margin.
30. Define phase margin.
31. Describe the Nichols chart.
32. Draw the M and N circles.
33. Recall Nichols plot.
34. Draw the polar plot for the given transfer function, G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2).
35. Quote dominant pole. 36. Match the breakaway and breaking point.
37. Describe Nyquist stability criterion.
38. Memorize the Routh stability condition.
39. Define compensation.
40. List the different types of compensators.
41. Draw the feedback compensation.
42. Draw the bode plot of lag-lead compensator.
Understand
1. Distinguish between open loop and closed loop system.
2. Discuss why negative feedback is invariably preferred in closed loop system.
3. Select the analogous electrical elements in force voltage analogy for the elements of mechanical
translational system. 4. Indicate the analogous electrical elements in force current analogy for the elements of mechanical
translational system.
5. Infer servomechanism.
6. Illustrate the two major types of control system.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
99
7. Discuss the importance of test signals.
8. Judge when a P, PI and PID controller is preferred in process.
9. Distinguish between transient and steady state responses.
10. Tell how the system is classified depending on the value of damping?
11. Show the response of a second order under damped system and mention the time domination specification.
12. Distinguish between type and order of a system.
13. Compute relation between static and generalized error coefficients.
14. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of static error and generalized error coefficients.
15. Summarize the time and frequency response analysis. 16. Express the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
17. Illustrate Bode Plot.
18. Represent the advantages of Nichols chart.
19. Match the correlation between the time and frequency response.
20. Infer how the closed loop frequency response is determined from the open loop frequency response using
Nichols chart.
21. Tell how closed loop frequency response is determined from open loop frequency response using M and N
circles.
22. Express the necessary condition for stability.
23. Show the relation between stability and coefficient of characteristic polynomial.
24. Tell how the roots of characteristic equation are related to stability. 25. Predict how you will find root locus on real axis.
26. Explain asymptotes.
27. Compute the angle of asymptotes.
28. Infer centroid, how it is calculated.
29. Summarize the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compensation.
30. Predict the way to find the crossing point of root locus in imaginary axis.
31. Discuss the time domain specifications needed to design a control system.
32. Judge when lag / lead / lag-lead compensation is employed.
33. Indicate why compensation is necessary in feedback control system.
34. Discuss the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a system.
35. Compute the transfer function of lag-lead compensator and draw its pole-zero plots.
36. Discuss the characteristics of lag-lead compensation. 37. Match the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.
Apply
1. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2). Calculate the steady
state error for unit step input.
2. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =25(s+4)/s(s+0.5) (s+2). Compute the
steady state error for unit ramp input.
3. The closed loop transfer function of second order system is C(s)/R(s)= 10/s2+6s+10. Examine the type of
damping in the system.
4. The closed loop transfer function of a second order system is given by 200/s2+20s+200. Solve the damping
ratio and natural frequency of oscillation.
5. A second order system has a damping ratio of 0.6 and natural frequency of oscillation is 10 rad/second. Calculate the damping frequency
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is G(s)=20/s(s+10). Examine the nature of
response of the closed loop system for unit step input?
7. The damping ratio of a system is 0.75 and the natural frequency of oscillation is 12 rad/sec. Compute the
peak overshoot and the peak time.
8. The damping ratio of a system is 0.6 and the natural frequency of oscillation is 8 rad/sec. Solve the rise
time. The damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation of a second order system is 0.5 and 8 rad/sec
respectively. Calculate the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
9. Use the transfer function G(s)= K/sn to draw the bode plot.
10. Sketch the bode plot for G(s) = 1/(1+sT)
11. Use the transfer function G(s)= 1/(1+sT) to draw the polar plot.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
100
12. Sketch the polar plot of G(s) = 1/[ s2(1+sT1) (1+sT2) (1+sT3)]
13. For the system represented by the following characteristic equation s4+3s3+4s2+5s+10=0. Examine
whether the
14. Show necessary condition for stability is satisfied or not.
Analyze and Evaluate
1. Determine the transfer function of mechanical system.
2. Develop the transfer function of electrical and electromechanical systems.
3. Determine the transfer function of thermal system. 4. Analyze the transfer function of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
5. For a given system G(s) = 10(s+1) / (s2+13s+10), how to detect steady state error and error constants?
6. Analyze the stability of the system using routh hurwitz criterion, root locus technique or nyquist stability
criterion.
7. For a given transfer function G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2), Design the lag, lead and lag lead networks.
Create
1. Construct Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose characteristics equation is
.01616201282 23456 ssssss Also determine the number of roots lying on right half
of s-plane, left half of s-plane and imaginary axis. 2. Create the mathematical model of PI, PD and PID controllers.
3. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function, G(s) = K / s (1+2s). Design a suitable lag
compensator so that phase margin is 40 and the steady state error for ramp input is less than or equal to 0.2.
Unit I
Mathematical Model of Physical Systems
Open loop and closed loop systems with examples – Elements of control system – Mathematical representation of
systems – Transfer function of simple mechanical, electrical and thermal systems - Transfer function of
overall systems using block diagram reduction technique – Signal flow graph.
Comparison between open loop and closed loop system
9 Hours
Unit II
Time Domain Analysis
Standard test signals - Transient response of first and second order systems – Time domain specifications – Steady
state errors and error constants – Generalized error series – Dominant poles of transfer functions – P, I, PD, PI and
PID models of feedback control systems.
Ramp response of first and second order system
9 Hours
Unit III
Frequency Domain Analysis Frequency response of systems - Frequency domain specifications - Polar plot – Bode plot – Constant M and N
Relationship between system parameter and pole location
9 Hours
Unit V
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
101
Compensator Design
Design Specifications – Lag, lead and lag-lead networks – Cascade compensator design using time domain and
frequency domain analysis.
Selection for compensator
9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Text book(s)
1. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publisher, 2010
Reference(s)
1. K. Ogatta, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010
2. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. 2012
3. M. Gopal, Control System Principles and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2012
4. M. N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
11N403 TRANSDUCERS ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge about the principles and analysis of sensors.
Discussion of errors and error analysis.
Emphasis on characteristics and response of transducers.
To have an adequate knowledge in resistance transducers.
Basic knowledge in inductance and capacitance transducers and exposure to other transducers.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to: 1. Analyze the characteristics of transducers..
2. Classify the transducers and identify their applications.
3. Select the appropriate transducer for a simple application
Prerequisite(s)
Basics knowledge of Engineering Physics and basic knowledge of Physics taught in higher secondary
Basic knowledge of Electronics devices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
102
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†15
Test II† Model
Examination† Semester End Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember 1. Define units.
2. Give the classification of units.
3. Define Standards.
4. Define Instrumental error.
5. State the principle of primary transducer.
6. What is active transducer?
7. Name any one analog transducer.
8. List the different static characteristics of a transducer.
9. Define dynamic characteristic.
10. Mention the different type‘s dynamic characteristics.
11. Define mathematical model.
12. What is potentiometer? 13. List out the advantages and disadvantages of potentiometer?
14. Recall the different types of strain gauge?
15. Mention the applications of strain gauge.
16. Define resistance thermometer.
17. What is self-heating error of thermometer?
18. Recall the principle of hotwire anemometer.
19. Identify the applications of thermistors.
20. State the principle of operation of piezo resistive sensor.
21. Define inductance transducer.
22. Mention the three principles of inductance transducer.
23. Recall the principle of variable reluctance accelerometer. 24. Point out the need for demodulator in variable reluctance accelerometer.
25. What is the principle of Induction Potentiometer?
26. Define LVDT.
27. State the applications of LVDT.
28. List the advantages and disadvantages of LVDT.
29. Memorize the principle of the electro-magnetic transducer.
30. Why transducers need a signal conditioning unit?
31. What is digital transducer?
32. State the principle of change of capacitance.
33. Describe the principle of capacitive transducer.
34. List the uses of capacitive transducer. 35. Define magnetostrictive transducer.
36. Name the different magnetostrictive transducers.
37. What are the errors in magnetostrictive transducer?
38. Select the suitable materials for piezo electric transducer.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
103
39. Define fiber optic transducer.
Understand
1. Distinguish between accuracy and precision.
2. What are the different types of static errors? Explain each of them.
3. What are instrumental and environmental errors? How can they be avoided?
4. What is the difference between a primary and a secondary standard?
5. How self-heating error is corrected for in resistance thermometry?
6. For what application, thermistor is preferred as temperature sensor? 7. Distinguish between a resistance strain gauge and a semiconductor strain gauge.
8. Why piezoelectric transducers are useful only for dynamic measurement?
9. How frequency of supply changes the sensitivity of an LVDT?
10. Express how ―true zero‖ is obtained in an Induction potentiometer?
11. Give examples of capacitive transducer applications.
12. Demonstrate how a capacitive transducer used for measuring the displacement?
13. How capacitive transducer used to measure the sound signal?
14. Illustrate the principle of capacitive pressure transducer.
15. Show how slew rate affects the operation of analog to digital converter?
16. How to choose the specific type of A/D for the given application?
17. Compare digital transducer with analog. 18. Indicate the uses of fiber optic transducers.
19. Express the special features of magnetostrictive transducer.
20. In what way MEMS technology improves the efficiency of sensor?
Apply
1. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 sec and a static sensitivity of 0.05mV/ ºc is used to
measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25ºC to 65ºC. The transducer is
adjusted to read 0 and 25ºC.Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the
temperature changes as a step.
2. Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperature changes at a constant rate of
10º per sec from 25ºC to 65ºC.Ten measurements of pressure made by an instrument at different time
intervals give the following readings in kg / cm2: 7.29, 8.03, 8.10, 7.95, 8.01, 7.98, 7.95, 8.07, 7.94 and 7.97.Find arithmetic mean, standard deviation, and most probable error.
3. A variable potential divider has a total resistance of 2kΩ and is fed from a 10V d.c. supply. The output is
connected to a load resistance of 5kΩ. Determine the loading errors for the wiper positions corresponding
to K=xi /xt =0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0. Use the result to plot a rough graph of error versus xi /xt.
4. The output of an LVDT is connected to a 5V voltmeter through an amplifier whose amplification factor is
250. An output of 2 mV appears across the terminals across the terminals of LVDT when the core moves
through a distance of 0.5 mm. calculate the sensitivity of the LVDT and that of the whole set up. The milli-
voltmeter scale has 100 divisions. The scale can be read to 1/5 of a division. Calculate the resolution of the
instrument in mm.
5. A Hall effect transducer is used for the measurement of a magnitude field of 0.5 Wb/m2. The 2 mm thick
slab is made of Bismuth for which the Hall‘s co-efficient is -1x10-6 V m/ (A – Wb m-2) and the current is 3A.
6. A parallel plate capacitive transducer has plates 600 mm2 area which is separated by air by a distance of
0.2mm. The resistance of the transducer is 20 X 106 Ω. Calculate the time constant of the transducer and
find the attenuation of the output 1000 Hz. The permittivity of the air is 8.85 X 10-12 F/m.
7. A quartz crystal has the dimensions of 2 mm X 2 mm X 2 mm. Quartz has the following properties charge
sensitivity = 21 C/N. Young‘s modulus = 8.6 X 1010 N/m2. Permittivity = 40.6 X 10-12 F/m. Calculate
the value of force, charge, and voltage if the crystal is subjected to a strain of 10 X 10-6 m/m.
8. A thermistor has a resistance of 10KΩ at 25C. The resistance temperature co-efficient is -0.05/°C. A
Wien‘s bridge oscillator uses two identical thermistors in the frequency determining part of the bridge. The
value of capacitance used in the bridge is 500 pF. Calculate the value of frequency of oscillations for (i)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
104
20°C (ii) 25°C (iii) 30°C. The frequency of oscillation is f=1/2πRC Hz where R and C are resistance and
capacitance respectively.
9. Determine the acceptance angle for a single fiber with a numerical aperture of 0.096.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare Zero order, First order and second order transducer.
2. Compare RTD, Thermocouple and Thermistor.
3. Compare different types of Analog to digital converter.
Create 1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for LVDT. The output current from the signal conditioning circuit
should be in the range 4 – 20 mA.
Unit I
Characteristics of Transducers
Units and Standards - Calibration methods - Classification of errors - Error analysis - Limiting error - Probable error
- Static characteristics - Mathematical model of transducers - zero, first and second order transducers -
Dynamic characteristics of first and second order transducers for standard test inputs.
Ramp response of first and second order system
9 Hours
Unit II
Variable Resistance Transducers
Principles of operation - Construction details - Characteristics of resistance transducers - Resistance potentiometers -
– Fiber optic transducers - Hall effect transducers - Photoelectric transducers – Introduction to MEMS and Nano
sensors - Bio Sensor
Application of Bio sensor
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J. P. Bentley, Principles of Measurement Systems, Addison Wesley Longman Ltd., UK, 2010
2. E. O. Doeblin, Measurement Systems: Applications and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co., 2008
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
105
3. S. Renganathan, Transducer Engineering, Allied Publishers, 2007
Reference(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, 2007
2. D. V. S. Murthy, Transducers and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009
3. H. K. P. Neubert, Instrument Transducers – An Introduction to their Performance and Design, Oxford
University Press, Cambridge, 2009
11N404 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To understand the basic model of the communication process
To understand the guided and unguided transmission medium
To have an introduction on different analog and digital communication techniques
To familiarize the basic concept of wireless cellular telephone system, Satellite and Optical Fiber
Communications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Interpret the concepts of transmission lines and radio wave propagation
2. Compare the analog and digital communications
3. Summarize the basics of satellite and fiber optic communication .
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Engineering Physics and Basic knowledge of Physics taught in higher secondary
school
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†16
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
106
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Standing Wave Ratio.
2. Define critical frequency 3. Define propagation constant of a transmission line.
4. Name the applications of the quarter-wave line?
5. Define the cut-off frequency of a guide.
6. State the demerits of Square-law Modulator.
7. Identify the primary constants of a transmission line.
8. Identify the purpose of modulation in communication.
9. Define reflection loss and insertion loss in a transmission line
10. State the condition for distortion less line.
11. List the elements of communication system.
12. Write the need for Modulation.
13. Draw the circuit diagram of Balanced Modulator for generating AM with carrier. 14. Define critical Modulation.
15. Define coefficient of modulation and percentage modulation for an AM system.
16. Draw the envelope of AM.
17. State Carson‘s rule of FM bandwidth.
18. Define narrowband and wideband FM.
19. Define modulation index of FM and PM.
20. List out the four most common methods of pulse modulation?
21. Define droop. What causes it?
22. Define slope overload and granular noise.
23. Define multiplexing.
24. List out the vocoding techniques.
25. Define the dynamic range. 26. State Quantization range and Quantization error?
27. Point the advantages of digital transmission.
28. Draw a BPSK waveform for the data stream 10110.
29. Quote ‗Protocol Data Unit‘.
30. Define Bit Error Rate (BER).
31. Mention any two topologies used in data communication.
32. Give the difference between macro cells, mini cells and microcells.
33. Define frequency reuse factor.
34. What is meant by first generation cellular telephone system?
35. Outline the AMPS frequency allocation.
36. What is meant by a microcellular system? 37. List out the classification of AMPS cellular telephones.
38. Define Intersymbol interference.
39. Define Companding.
40. Define TDM.
41. Define aliasing.
Understand
1. Show the equivalent circuit for a metallic two wire transmission line and derive the expression for the
characteristic impedance.
2. Tell any two methods of generating DSB-SC
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
107
3.
4. Discuss in detail the various ways in which a signal propagates through space.
5. Compute the expression for voltage and current at any point on a transmission line in terms of receiving
end voltage and current
6. Mention the transmission line techniques used to match the load impedance and the characteristic
impedance.
7. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat circuit diagram and
waveforms.
8. Explain the high level AM transmitter with neat diagram. 9. Explain the Super-heterodyne receiver with neat diagram.
10. Explain the need for suppressing the carrier in AM wave. Write the expressions of the DSB-SC wave in
time and frequency domain.
11. Explain Narrow band FM in detail.
12. With a neat diagram explain ratio detector.
13. Explain Slope detector with a neat diagram.
14. Explain FM transmitter using direct method.
15. Explain the working principle of Frequency Shift Keying demodulator circuits.
16. Discuss briefly about Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communication Equipment.
17. Write in detail about the satellite link system model with suitable equations.
18. Explain the working principle of the Digital T carrier system. 19. With block diagram, explain the primary blocks of modem.
20. Write briefly about the functions of ISO-OSI seven layer architecture.
Apply
1. Explain how error is detected and corrected using Hamming codes in data communication?
2. Explain near-far effect?
3. An 80 MHz carrier is having an amplitude of 50v is modulated by 3 KHz audio signal is having an
amplitude of 20v. Draw the frequency spectrum of AM wave.
4. Explain the block diagram Binary Phase Shift Keying transmitter and receiver and describe the operation.
5. For the sample and hold circuit determine the minimum number of bits required in a PCM code for a
dynamic range of 80dB. What is the coding efficiency?
6. Explain how will you calculate over modulation of AM?
7. Explain how the ultimate modulation index of FM is estimated? 8. Explain how the ultimate modulation index of FM is estimated?
9. Examine the purpose of sample and hold circuit?
10. Show the use of Numerical Aperture?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate Radian & Steradian.
2. Determine the transmit power for a CDMA mobile unit that is receiving a signal from the base station at
100dBm.
3. Compare different AM methods.
4. Determine the number of cells in clusters for the following values: j=4 and i=2 and j=3 and i=3.
5. Determine the number of channels per cluster and the total channel capacity for a cellular telephone area comprised of 12 clusters with seven cell in each cluster and 16 channels in each cell.
6. A PCM-TDM system multiplexes 32 voice-band channels each with a bandwidth of 0 kHz to 4 kHz. Each
sample is encoded with an 8-bit PCM code. UPNRZ encoding is used. Determine Minimum sample rate,
Line speed in bits per second and Minimum Nyquist bandwidth.
7. Determine the dynamic range in dB for the following n-bit linear sign-magnitude PCM codes: n=7, 8, 12,
and 14.
8. Determine the Nyquist sampling rate for the following maximum analog input frequencies: 2 kHz, 5 kHz,
and 20 kHz.
9. Determine the characteristic impedance for a coaxial cable with the following specifications: d = 0.025
inches, D = 0.15 inches, Relative dielectric constant = 2.23.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
108
10. A transmitter has a power of 50 mW to a 50 Ω transmission line. The transmission line impedance is not
equal to the characteristic impedance of the transmission line. The coefficient of reflection is 0.5.
Determine the reflected power and dissipated power.
11. Contrast the advantage and disadvantages of digital transmission.
12. Differentiate bit rate and baud rate.
13. Compare PCM and DM.
Create
1. Design of Transistor based Amplitude modulator using BC147, envelope detector and to calculate the modulation index for various modulating voltage whose transistor gain is 300.
2. One input to a conventional AM modulator is a 500 kHz carrier with amplitude of 20 V. The second input
is a 10kHz modulating signal with amplitude of 7.5 V. Design a modulator and Find, (i) Frequency limits
for the upper and lower side bands, (ii) Bandwidth, (iii) Upper and lower side frequencies,
(iv)Modulation coefficient and percent modulation.
3. Develop a procedure to find the AM & FM spectrum by using spectrum analyzer?
4. Derive an expression for signal to noise ratio in angle modulated system.
5. Derive Campbell‘s equation.
Unit I
Transmission Lines and Radio wave Propagation Introduction, Electrical model of Transmission line, Step and Pulse Response of Lines, Wave propagation on
lines,Transmission line losses, Impedance Matching, Transmission line Measurements; Radio propagation-
Introduction, Electromagnetic waves, Free space propagation, Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction,
Ground wave propagation, Ionospheric propagation and Line of sight propagation, Propagation in a
Mobile/Portable Environment, Repeater and cellular systems.
Reflection and Refraction of Electromagnetic waves
9 Hours
Unit II
Analog Communication
Elements of communication systems, Time and frequency domain, Noise and communications, Amplitude
modulation, introduction, full carrier AM in time domain and frequency domain, Quadrature AM and AM stereo, suppressed-carrier AM, Angle modulation, Phase modulation, Angle modulation spectrum, FM and Noise, FM
stereo, FM measurements, Receivers, Receivers topologies, Demodulators, Receivers variants, Communication
receivers and receiver measurements.
Duplex, Half-Duplex and Full-Duplex communication system
9 Hours
Unit III
Digital Communication
Introduction, Pulse Modulation, Pulse code modulation, Delta Modulation, Line codes, Time division
multiplexing, vocoders and Data Compression, Digital modulation-Introduction, Frequency and phase shift keying,
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation, Telephone Modems, Modem to computer connections, Cable Modems and
Digital subscriber Lines. Operation of Modem
9 Hours
Unit IV
Cellular Radio
Introduction, The advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS), AMPS control system, Cellular Telephone
Specification and Operation, Cell site equipment, Fax and Data Communication Using Cellular Phones, Digital
Cellular Systems, GSM, IS-95 CDMA PCS, Third Generation PCS.
Fundamental concepts of Cellular Telephone
9Hours
Unit V
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
109
Satellite and Optical Fiber Communications
Orbital satellites, geostationary satellites, look angles, satellite system link models, satellite system link equations;
advantages of optical fiber communication - Light propagation through fiber, fiber loss, light sources and detectors
Light propagation through optical fiber
9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Text Book
1. Roy Blake, Electronic Communication Systems, Thomson Delmar Ltd, New York, 2009
Reference(s)
1. Wayne Tomasi, Electronic Communication Systems, Pearson Education Asia Ltd, New Delhi, 2012
2. William Schweber, Electronic Communication System, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, India, New York, 2007
3. G. Kennedy, Electronic Communication Systems, McGraw Hill book Co, New York, 2005
4. Miller, Modern Electronic Communication, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007
11N405 MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To study the Architecture of 8085, 8086 & 8051
To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8086 & 8051
To introduce the need & use of Interrupt structure
To develop the skill of simple program writing
To introduce the commonly used peripherals / interfacing ICs – To study simple applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods,
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Explain the fundamental features and operation of microprocessor and microcontroller
2. Analyze the concept of peripheral interfaces used in microcontroller
3. Write program to control simple devices.
Prerequisite(s)
Basics knowledge of Digital logic circuits
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
110
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†17
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define processor. 2. Define I/O ports.
3. State the timing diagram of 8085.
4. Define interrupt.
5. How many addressing modes are there in 8085?
6. Define pipeline processing.
7. Define a bus.
8. What do you mean by multiplexed address and data bus?
9. What is the purpose of program counter?
10. What is the significance of stack pointer?
11. List out the general purpose registers in 8085
12. State three important features of M68000 processor.
13. What is NMI? 14. What do you mean by looping, counting and indexing?
15. What is the use of ready signal in 8085?
16. What is the use of CLKOUT and RESET OUT signals of 8085 processor?
17. What is the use of ALE signal?
18. What are the different interrupts available in 8085?
19. What is the significance of DMA?
20. Compare and contrast the 8085 and 8086 microprocessor.
21. List out all the addressing modes used in 8085 & 8086 processors.
22. What do you mean by assembly language?
23. State how the data and address buses are multiplexed in an 8086 microprocessor.
24. Compare serial and parallel data communication. 25. Mention two methods of DMA data transfer.
26. What is RAM refreshing?
27. List two advantages of memory mapped I/O.
28. What do you mean by volatile and non-volatile memory?
29. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller.
30. How external memory devices can interface with 8051?
31. What is the function of DPTR register?
32. What is the significance of SFRs in 8051 microcontroller?
33. List out the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
34. List out all the addressing modes of 8051.
35. Classify the instruction set of 8051.
36. What is the significance of interrupt priority control register in 8051 microcontroller?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
111
37. List out the special function registers of 8051 microcontroller.
38. List out the various modes available for timer in 8051 microcontroller.
39. Compare the 8051, 8031, and 8751 microcontrollers.
40. What are the alternate functions of port 3 in 8051 microcontroller?
41. What is handshake port?
42. List the hardware requirement to interface an LCD using 8255.
43. What do you mean by solenoid?
44. What are the modes of operation supported by 8255?
45. Compare synchronous and asynchronous communication. 46. What is meant by memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O?
47. Define resolution and conversion time in ADC.
48. List out the functions performed by 8279.
49. List out the features of ADC 0804.
50. What is key bounce? How it is achieved?
51. How a keyboard matrix is formed in keyboard interface using 8279?
52. What is the voltage levels used in RS-232?
53. What is the job of TMOD register?
54. What is program?
55. Define the instruction and instruction set.
56. What is meant by data manipulation? 57. How to develop program logic?
58. How to tell the program to the processor?
59. How to code the program?
60. How to test the program?
61. What are all the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
62. What do you mean by servo motor?
Understand
1. Draw the architecture of 8085.
2. Draw the register structure of 8085.
3. Write the pin definitions of 8085.
4. Derive the equation for LC tuned circuit.
5. Explain the generation of control signals. 6. Draw the format of flag register in 8085.
7. Explain the operation of each instruction in the instruction set of 8085.
8. Draw the flowchart to represent the various actions which are to be performed in 8085, 8086 and 8051.
9. Write the two ways to initialize stack pointer at FFFFh.
10. Explain the various steps involved while executing CALL instruction with an example.
11. Explain the contents of accumulator to run SIM instruction.
12. Explain the operational difference between the following pairs of instructions.
13. i. SPHL and XTHL ii. CALL addr and JMP addr iii LHLD and SHLD addriv. XRA and MVI
A, 00H v. INR A and ADI 01H vi. DAD RP and DAA.
14. Write the equation for one T state.
15. Explain the need of software timers. 16. Draw the interrupt structure of 8085 and 8051.
17. Draw the architecture of 8051.
18. Write the summary of 8085 hardware interrupts in table format.
19. What are all the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
20. Draw the I/O port diagram.
21. Explain I/O mapped and memory mapped I/O interfacing technique.
22. Draw the pin diagram and block diagram of IC 1408 DAC.
23. What are the conditions should be considered in the circuit operation of interfacing DAC to 8051?
24. Draw the pin diagram of 0808/0809.
25. Draw the full step and half step excitation sequence of stepper motor.
Apply
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
112
1. To compute the 16-bit sum of N elements of a table. The starting address of table is 4150 whose first entry
is the number of elements N. The result is stored at memory location 4140 and 4141.
2. To convert two BCD numbers in memory to the equivalent hex number. The BCD digits are at locations
4150 and 4151 and the result will be stored at 4152.
3. To find the smallest of N numbers using 8085.
4. Write a program to perform the digital to analog conversion with square waveform using 8085 and8051.
5. Generate a square wave to perform timer operation using 8051.
6. Write a program for performing block transfer operation.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. How will you perform the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stack using 8085 and 8051?
2. How will you transfer the data from one place to another?
3. How will you interface a microprocessor and microcontroller to a given peripheral?
Create
1. Design the real time clock using 8253.
2. Design the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
3. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
4. Design a 4 seven segment LED display using 8051.
1. MunirBannoura, Rudan Bettelheim and Richard Soja,ColdFireMicroprocessors & Microcontrollers, ,
AMT Publishing, 2007
2. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Microcontrollers, Perason Education Asia, Low price edition 2012
3. V.Douglas Hall, Microprocessors and Interfacing Programming and Hardware, Tata McGraw
Hill,2010
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidi& Janice GilliMazidi, The 8051 Micro Controller and Embedded Systems, Pearson
Education, 5th Indian Reprint, New Delhi, 2012
11N406 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To study the IC fabrication procedure
To study the characteristics; realize circuits; design for signal analysis using Op-amp ICs
To study the applications of Op-amp
To study internal functional blocks and the applications of special ICs like Timers, PLL circuits, regulator
circuits, ADCs
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the various steps involved in IC fabrication and analyze the characteristics of op-amp.
2. Design circuit for simple applications using op-amps, 555 Timer, 566-voltage controller oscillator and 565-
phase locked loop.
3. Apply the linear ICs to simple applications.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Digital logic circuits
Basic knowledge of Electronic devices and circuits
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
114
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†18
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define an operational amplifier.
2. List the characteristics of an ideal op-amp.
3. Recall the advantages of integrated circuits. 4. List the popular IC packages available today.
5. Define input offset voltage.
6. Define input offset current.
7. State the reasons for the offset currents at the input of the op-amp.
8. Define CMRR of an op-amp.
9. Name some of the applications of current sources.
10. Define sensitivity.
11. Identify the limitations in a temperature compensated zenar-reference source.
12. Define band-gap referenced biasing circuit.
13. Outline the need for frequency compensation in practical op-amps.
14. List the frequency compensation methods. 15. Outline the merits and demerits of Dominant-pole compensation.
16. Define slew rate.
17. List some of the linear and non – linear applications of op-amps.
18. List out the features of instrumentation amplifier.
19. Point out the applications of V-I converter.
20. State precision diode.
21. Identify the applications of precision diode.
22. List out the applications of Log amplifiers.
23. Point out the limitations of the basic differentiator circuit.
24. Define comparator.
25. Recall the applications of comparator
26. State Schmitt trigger. 27. Define multivibrator.
28. Outline the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback circuits.
29. Name any two audio frequency oscillators.
30. What are the characteristics of a comparator?
31. Define filter.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
115
32. Recall the merits and demerits of both active and passive filters?
33. List some commonly used active filters.
34. Locate some areas where PLL is widely used.
35. List out the basic building blocks of PLL.
36. Define lock-in range of a PLL.
37. Define capture range of PLL.
38. Define Pull-in time.
39. Define delta modulation.
40. State the expression for the VCO free running frequency. 41. Define Voltage to Frequency conversion factor.
42. List out the applications of OTA.
43. Point out the purpose of having a low pass filter in PLL.
44. Identify some typical applications of PLL.
45. List the merits of companding.
46. List out the applications of 555 timers in monostable and astable mode of operations.
47. List out some integrating type converters.
48. Outline the main advantages of integrating type ADCs.
49. Define resolution of a data converter.
50. State the main drawback of a dual-slop ADC?
51. List out the direct type ADCs. 52. State the advantages of dual slope ADC.
53. Define conversion time.
54. Define accuracy of converter.
55. Define settling time.
56. State linearity.
57. Draw the pin configuration of IC741.
58. Define sample period and hold period.
Understand
1. Give some examples of monolithic IC voltage regulators.
2. Extrapolate the causes of slew rate?
3. Discuss the uses of successive approximation type ADC‘s. 4. Discuss the effect of having large capture range.
5. Show the internal block diagram of typical op-amp circuit.
6. Tell the classification of tuned amplifier.
7. Show the functional block diagram of a 723 regulator.
8. Represent the various processes used to fabricate IC‘s using silicon planar technology.
9. Indicate the purpose of oxidation.
10. Give the drawbacks of linear regulators.
11. Demonstrate the working principle of phase locked loop.
12. Indicate the requirements for producing sustained oscillations in feedback circuits.
13. Discuss any two audio frequency oscillators.
14. Illustrate the block diagram of PLL and derive the expression for Lock range and capture range. 15. Explain in detail about demodulation of FM signal using PLL.
16. Discover the reason how the gain is stabilized by negative feedback
17. What happens when the common terminal of V+ and V- sources is not grounded?
18. In practical op-amps, what is the effect of high frequency on its performance?
19. Discover why IC 741 is not used for high frequency applications.
20. Summarize the condition for good differentiation.
Apply
1. Explain the operation of dual slope ADC.
2. With a neat functional diagram, explain the operation of VCO. Also derive an expression for fo.
3. Sketch the process steps used in the fabrication of ICs using silicon planar technology?
4. Use which parameter does the free running frequency of VCO depends on.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
116
5. Explain the need for an instrumentation amplifier? Give a detailed analysis for the same.
6. Examine the principle of operation of successive Approximation ADC.
7. Classify and Explain the types of ADCs
8. Classify and Explain the types of DACs
9. Classify the different types of phase detector.
10. Discover the classification of voltage regulators.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. Justify the reasons for using current sources in integrated circuits.
2. Analyze the Gilbert‘s four quadrant multiplier cell with a neat circuit diagram. Discuss its applications.
3. Differentiate Schmitt trigger and comparator.
4. Distinguish between dry etching & wet etching.
5. Point out the difference between the open loop and closed loop gain of op-amp?
6. Design the monostable multivibrator using 555 timer to produce a pulse width of 100ms.Verify the values
of R and C from the graph.
7. Determine the frequency response of an open-loop op-amp and discuss about the methods of frequency
compensation.
8. Determine the expression for voltage to frequency conversion factor.
9. Compare and contrast negative and positive feedback 10. Differentiate astable and monostable multivibrator.
Create
1. Construct an adder circuit using op-amp to get the output expression as V 0 =-(0.1V1 +V2 +10V3 ) where
V1 , V2 and V3 are the inputs.
2. A 741C op-amp is used as an inverting amplifier with q gain of 50. The voltage gain vs. frequency
Curve of 741C is flat upto 20 KHz. What maximum peak to peak input signal can be applied without
distorting the output?
3. Design an active load for an emitter-coupled pair (differential amplifier) and perform a detailed analysis to
find its differential mode gain and the output resistance.
4. Design a temperature compensated zener-reference source.
5. Design a square waveform generator of frequency 100Hz and duty cycle of 75%.
6. Design a wideband pass filter having fl =400Hz, fh =2 KHz and pass band gain of 4. Find the value of Q of the filter.
7. Design a second order Butterworth high pass filter having lower cut-off frequency 1 KHz.
8. Design inverting amplifier with a gain of -5 and an input resistance of 10Kohm.
9. Design non inverting amplifier with a gain of 10.
10. Design a current source for generating I 0 =25µA. Assume: Vcc =15V, β=100.
11. Design a Widlar current source and obtain the expression for output current. Also prove that widlar current
source has better sensitivity than constant current source.
12. Derive an expression for its frequency of oscillation.
Unit I
IC Fabrication IC classification, fundamentals of monolithic IC technology, epitaxial growth, masking and etching, Diffusion of
impurities, Realization of monolithic ICs and packaging.
Types of packages
9 Hours
Unit II
Characteristics of Op-Amp
Ideal Op-Amp characteristics, DC characteristics, AC characteristics, offset voltage and current - voltage series
feedback and shunt feedback amplifiers, Differential Amplifier, frequency response of Op-Amp.
External frequency compensation
9 Hours
Unit III
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
117
Applications of Op-Amp
Instrumentation amplifier, first and second order active filters, V/I & I/V converters, comparators, summer,
1. Robert F. Coughlin, Fredrick F. Driscoll, Op-amp and Linear ICs, Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Ramakant A. Gayakward, Op-amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Pearson Education, Asia Ltd, 2003.
Reference(s)
1. Roy Choudhary and Sheil B. Jani, Linear Integrated Circuits, New Age Publishing Co, 4 Edition, 2011
2. Jacob Millman and Christos C.Halkias, Integrated Electronics - Analog and Digital Circuits System, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2003
3. David A. Bell, Op-amp & Linear ICs, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2edition, 2007.
11N407 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
By training the students in different aspects of transducers, like magnetic, electrical, mechanical and
optical, she/he can select the transducer for specified applications.
To train the students in handling different kind of transducers like LVDT, Hall effect, Thermocouple, etc,
which will helps them to understand the working principle of the transducers and install the transducers for
measurement of various types of physical quantities
To design a simple measurement system for the specified configuration.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
118
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Measure temperature/resistance, linear displacement, angular velocity or magnetic fields using
sensors/transducers.
2. Analyze the characteristics of strain gauge, encoder or thermocouple.
3. Measure light intensity and level using transducers.
Prerequisit e(s)
Basic knowledge of Sensors and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define an instrument
2. List out the three sources of possible errors in instruments.
3. Define Instrumental error.
4. Define limiting error.
5. Define probable error.
6. Define Environmental error.
7. Define units.
8. Define Standards.
9. Mention the purpose of the measurement.
10. List the methods of measurement.
11. Classify Standards. 12. Define transducer and give an example.
13. Name the different types of transducer.
14. Recall the uses of primary transducer.
15. Define secondary transducer
16. What is passive transducer?
17. State the principle of active transducer?
18. Define analog transducer?
19. Give the classification of units.
20. Define Primary fundamental and auxiliary fundamental units.
21. Define the unit of mass preserved at International Bureau of weights and measures at Severes, Paris.
22. Give one property of piezo-electric crystal. 23. Define an Inverse transducer. Give an example.
24. List out the factors responsible in selection of a transducer.
25. Define static characteristics.
26. Mention different types of static characteristics.
27. What is a dynamic characteristic?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
119
28. Mention different type‘s dynamic characteristics.
29. What are the test inputs of the transducer?
30. Define- zero order transducer.
31. What is Threshold?
32. Define resolution.
33. What is range and span?
34. State the principle of potentiometer.
35. Define gauge factor.
36. What is strain? 37. What is zero error of the transducer?
38. List the input characteristics of the transducer.
39. What is the value of capacitance for measurement of level of a non-conducting liquid?
40. Identify the uses of capacitive transducer.
41. What are the different practical capacitance pickups?
42. Describe the principle of capacitive transducer.
43. Mention the three principles of inductance transducer.
44. Name the materials used for thermistors.
45. Mention the features of thermistors.
46. List out the applications of thermistor.
47. Memorize the principle of resistance thermometer. 48. Define self-heating error of thermometer
49. Point out the different approximation methods of resistance thermometer.
Understand
1. How will you achieve high resolution in digital transducer?
2. Compare accuracy and precision.
3. Demonstrate the procedure to measure liquid level using capacitive transducers.
4. Draw the functional block diagram of a measurement system.
5. How is linearity of a transducer specified?
6. Show how to minimize null voltage in LVDT?
7. Why is periodical calibration of measuring instrument necessary?
8. Discuss about the three ways of specifying the non–linearity of an instrument? 9. Summarize the concept of piezo electric accelerometer for vibration measurement.
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. Add 826 ± 5 to 628 ± 3.
2. Subtract 628 ± 3 from 826 ± 5.
3. A thermometer has a time constant of 3.5 s. it is quickly taken from a temperature 00C to a water bath
having temperature 1000 C. what temperature will be indicated after 1.5 s ?
4. A temperature-sensitive transducer is subjected to a sudden temperature change. It takes 10 s for the
transducer to reach equilibrium condition (5 times constant). How long will it take for the transducer to
read half of the temperature difference?
5. A rotary variable differential transformer has a specification which includes the following information
Ranges: ±300, linearity error ± 0.5% full range
±600, linearity error ± 2.0% full range
Sensitivity: 1.1 (mV/V input)/degree
Impedance: Primary 750 Ω, Secondary 2000 Ω.
a)What will be the error in a reading of 400 due to non-linearity when the RVDT is used on the ±600
range What could be the change in output voltage/degree if there is an input voltage of 3V?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
120
6. A temperature transducer with a time constant of 0.4 s and a static sensitivity of 0.05mV/ ºc is used to
measure the temperature of a hot liquid medium which changes from 25ºC to 65ºC. The transducer is
adjusted to read 0 and 25ºC.
(a) Determine the time taken to read 80% of the final voltage value if the temperature changes as a
step.
(b) Calculate the reading of the transducer at the end of 4 sec if the temperature changes at a constant
rate of 10º per sec from 25ºC to 65ºC.
Create
1. Design and implementation of a measurement system for temperature, level, pressure, magnetic and light intensity measurements
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of linear displacement using inductive transducer.
2. Design of RTD Bridge. 3. Measurement of angular velocity and magnetic field using proximity sensor/Hall Effect transducer.
4. Liquid level measurement using capacitive transducers.
5. Measurement of light intensity using optical transducers.
6. Linearization of thermistor.
7. Piezo Electric accelerometer for vibration measurement.
8. Characteristic of strain gauge for force measurement.
9. Design of linear and angular displacement using resistive transducers.
10. Digital transducer –Shaft angle encoder.
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Measurement of linear displacement using inductive transducer 3
2 Design of RTD Bridge 6
3 Measurement of angular velocity and magnetic field using proximity sensor/Hall
Effect transducer 6
4 Liquid level measurement using capacitive transducers 3
5 Measurement of light intensity using optical transducers 6
6 Linearization of thermistor 6
7 Piezo Electric accelerometer for vibration measurement 3
8 Characteristic of strain gauge for force measurement 3
9 Design of linear and angular displacement using resistive transducers 3
10 Digital transducer –Shaft angle encoder 6
11 Mini project ---
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
121
11N408 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
• To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control
• To inculcate the controller design concepts
• To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modelling
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to: 1. Develop the mathematical model of a system
2. Analyze the response and stability of simple systems using modern engineering tools
3. Design and simulate the response of nonlinear/compensator systems
Prequiste(s)
Basics knowledge of control engineering
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I, II and III
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define control system.
2. Draw the open loop and closed loop control system.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
122
3. Recall the transfer function.
4. Define block diagram.
5. State signal flow graph.
6. Quote Masons Gain formula.
7. Memorize PI controller.
8. State PD controller.
9. Define PID controller.
10. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
11. Outline time response. 12. Name the different types of test signals.
13. Define step signal.
14. Define ramp signal.
15. Define parabolic signal.
16. Describe an impulse signal.
17. Identify the order of a system.
18. State damping ratio.
19. List out the time domain specifications.
20. Define delay time.
21. Define rise time.
22. Define peak time. 23. Define peak overshoot.
24. Select the correct formula for settling time.
25. Memorize the steady state error.
26. Name the generalized error coefficients.
27. Match the time and frequency response.
28. List the frequency domain specifications.
29. Define gain margin.
30. Define phase margin.
31. Describe the Nichols chart.
32. Draw the M and N circles.
33. Recall Nichols plot.
34. Draw the polar plot for the given transfer function, G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2). 35. Quote dominant pole.
36. Match the breakaway and breaking point.
37. Describe Nyquist stability criterion.
38. Memorize the Routh stability condition.
39. Define compensation.
40. List the different types of compensators.
41. Draw the feedback compensation.
42. Draw the bode plot of lag-lead compensator.
Understand
1. Distinguish between open loop and closed loop system.
2. Discuss why negative feedback is invariably preferred in closed loop system. 3. Select the analogous electrical elements in force voltage analogy for the elements of mechanical
translational system.
4. Indicate the analogous electrical elements in force current analogy for the elements of mechanical
translational system.
5. Infer servomechanism.
6. Illustrate the two major types of control system.
7. Discuss the importance of test signals.
8. Judge when a P, PI and PID controller is preferred in process.
9. Distinguish between transient and steady state responses.
10. Tell how the system is classified depending on the value of damping?
11. Show the response of a second order under damped system and mention the time domination specification.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
123
12. Distinguish between type and order of a system.
13. Compute relation between static and generalized error coefficients.
14. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of static error and generalized error coefficients.
15. Summarize the time and frequency response analysis.
16. Express the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
17. Illustrate Bode Plot.
18. Represent the advantages of Nichols chart.
19. Match the correlation between the time and frequency response.
20. Infer how the closed loop frequency response is determined from the open loop frequency response using Nichols chart.
21. Tell how closed loop frequency response is determined from open loop frequency response using M and N
circles.
22. Express the necessary condition for stability.
23. Show the relation between stability and coefficient of characteristic polynomial.
24. Tell how the roots of characteristic equation are related to stability.
25. Predict how you will find root locus on real axis.
26. Explain asymptotes.
27. Compute the angle of asymptotes.
28. Infer centroid, how it is calculated.
29. Summarize the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compensation. 30. Predict the way to find the crossing point of root locus in imaginary axis.
31. Discuss the time domain specifications needed to design a control system.
32. Judge when lag / lead / lag-lead compensation is employed.
33. Indicate why compensation is necessary in feedback control system.
34. Discuss the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a system.
35. Compute the transfer function of lag-lead compensator and draw its pole-zero plots.
36. Discuss the characteristics of lag-lead compensation.
37. Match the lag, lead and lag-lead compensator.
Apply 1. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2). Calculate the steady
state error for unit step input.
2. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function of G(s) =25(s+4)/s(s+0.5) (s+2). Compute the steady state error for unit ramp input.
3. The closed loop transfer function of second order system is C(s)/R(s)= 10/s2+6s+10. Examine the type of
damping in the system.
4. The closed loop transfer function of a second order system is given by 200/s2+20s+200. Solve the damping
ratio and natural frequency of oscillation.
5. A second order system has a damping ratio of 0.6 and natural frequency of oscillation is 10 rad/second.
Calculate the damping frequency
6. The open loop transfer function of a unity feedback system is G(s)=20/s(s+10). Examine the nature of
response of the closed loop system for unit step input?
7. The damping ratio of a system is 0.75 and the natural frequency of oscillation is 12 rad/sec. Compute the
peak overshoot and the peak time. 8. The damping ratio of a system is 0.6 and the natural frequency of oscillation is 8 rad/sec. Solve the rise
time. The damping ratio and natural frequency of oscillation of a second order system is 0.5 and 8 rad/sec
respectively. Calculate the resonant peak and resonant frequency.
9. Use the transfer function G(s)= K/sn to draw the bode plot.
10. Sketch the bode plot for G(s) = 1/(1+sT)
11. Use the transfer function G(s)= 1/(1+sT) to draw the polar plot.
12. Sketch the polar plot of G(s) = 1/[ s2(1+sT1) (1+sT2) (1+sT3)]
13. For the system represented by the following characteristic equation s4+3s3+4s2+5s+10=0. Examine
whether the
14. Show necessary condition for stability is satisfied or not.
Analyse and Evaluate
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
124
1. Determine the transfer function of mechanical system.
2. Develop the transfer function of electrical and electromechanical systems.
3. Determine the transfer function of thermal system.
4. Analyze the transfer function of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
5. For a given system G(s) = 10(s+1) / (s2+13s+10), how to detect steady state error and error constants?
6. Analyze the stability of the system using routh hurwitz criterion, root locus technique or nyquist stability
criterion.
7. For a given transfer function G(s) =10/(s+1) (s+2), Design the lag, lead and lag lead networks.
Create
1. Construct Routh array and determine the stability of the system whose characteristics equation is
.01616201282 23456 ssssss Also determine the number of roots lying on right half
of s-plane, left half of s-plane and imaginary axis.
2. Create the mathematical model of PI, PD and PID controllers.
3. A unity feedback system has an open loop transfer function, G(s) = K / s (1+2s). Design a suitable lag
compensator so that phase margin is 40 and the steady state error for ramp input is less than or equal to 0.2.
List of Experiments
1. Estimation of transfer function of DC servo motor.
2. Determine the transfer function of AC servo motor.
3. Design and simulation of linear and nonlinear systems.
4. Analog and digital simulation of Type-0 and Type-1 system. 5. Time response analysis using MATLAB.
6. Frequency response analysis using MATLAB.
7. Performance analysis of P, PI and PID controllers.
8. Stability analysis of linear systems.
9. Compensator design using MATLAB.
Mini Project Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Estimation of transfer function of DC servo motor 6
2 Determine the transfer function of AC servo motor 3
3 Design and simulation of linear and nonlinear systems 3
4 Analog and digital simulation of Type-0 and Type-1 system 6
5 Time response analysis using MATLAB 3
6 Frequency response analysis using MATLAB 6
7 Performance analysis of P, PI and PID controllers 3
8 Stability analysis of linear systems 6
9 Compensator design using MATLAB 9
10 Mini project ---
11N409 LINEAR AND DIGITAL IC LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To understand the characteristics and applications of op-amp
To design and verify various digital logic circuits from gates to counter
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
125
To design the application oriented experiments based on timer, IC 741 and IC 555
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Design and test simple digital combinational circuits.
2. Design and test simple sequential circuits
3. Configure and test amplifier circuits, monostable or astable multivibrator circuits using linear ICs
4. Design and test simple A/D or D/A convertors.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Linear Integrated Circuits
Basic knowledge of Electonics decices and circuits
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define combinational logic and sequential logic
2. List out the various types of logic code.
3. List out the key difference between synchronous and asynchronous logic circuits.
4. Define grey code.
5. State the function of full adder and full subtractor.
6. Define latch and flip-flop.
7. Define universal gate.
8. Describe shift registers.
9. State the ideal characteristics of op-amp.
10. Define CMRR and slew rate. 11. List out the various applications of op-amp.
12. State the basic difference between op-amp integrator and op-amp differentiator.
Understand
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
126
1. Explain about the parity generator and checker.
2. Extrapolate the gain equation for inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
3. Summarize the important applications of astable multivibrator.
4. Explain why astable multi-vibrator is called as free running relaxation oscillator?
5. Compute the delay time produced by mono-stable and astable multi-vibrator?
6. Explain about the quasi state.
7. Summarize the applications inverting and non-inverting amplifier.
8. Distinguish multiplexer and encoder.
9. Predict which is called as one shot or univibrator and why?
Apply
1. Show how will you choose shift register modes for particular application?
2. Explain how will you identify the type of op-amp from IC code?
3. Show how will you design an op-amp integrator?
4. Compute the formula to convert binary code to grey code.
5. Compute the formula to convert grey to binary code.
6. Classify and Explain the types of ADCs
7. Classify and Explain the types of DACs
8. Explain the classification of phase detector. 9. Sketch the waveform of 4-bit Up-counter and down-counter.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. Identify how will you evaluate the cut-off frequency of a differentiator?
2. Design an inverting amplifier with an input resistance of 2 KΩ, an output resistance of 100 Ω and an open
circuit voltage gain of -30.
3. Design an instrumentation amplifier which has a differential voltage gain of 100 (a gain of 40 dB) and a
common-mode voltage gain of zero.
4. Design a non-inverting high-pass amplifier which has a gain of 15 and a lower cutoff frequency of 20Hz.
The input resistance to the amplifier is to be 10 kΩ in its pass band.
5. Infer how will you design multi-vibrator using 555 timer IC?
6. Identify how does the comparator can be used to produce a square wave?
7. Justify the reasons for using current sources in integrated circuits.
8. Analyze the Gilbert‘s four quadrant multiplier cell with a neat circuit diagram. Discuss its applications.
9. Differentiate Schmitt trigger and comparator. 10. Distinguish between dry etching & wet etching.
11. Differentiate open loop and closed loop gain of op-amp?
12. Design the monostable multivibrator using 555timer to produce pulsewidthof100ms.Verifythe values of R
and C from the graph.
13. Differentiate astable and monostable multivibrator.
Create
1. Design a mixed signal circuit for a specified application.
2. Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter.
3. Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter.
4. Design a temperature compensated zener-reference source.
5. Design a square waveform generator of frequency 100Hz and duty cycle of 75%.
6. Design a wideband pass filter having fl =400Hz, fh =2 KHz and pass band gain of 4. Find the value of Q
of the filter.
7. Design a second order Butterworth high pass filter having lower cut-off frequency 1 KHz.
8. Design inverting amplifier with a gain of -5 and an input resistance of 10Kohm.
9. Design non inverting amplifier with a gain of 10.
10. Design a current source for generating I 0 =25µA. Assume: Vcc =15V, β=100.
11. Design a Widlar current source and obtain the expression for output current. Also prove that widlar current
source has better sensitivity than constant current source.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
127
List of Experiments
1. Design and implementation of full adder and full subtractor circuits.
2. Code converters- Grey to Binary, Binary to grey code, Parity generator and parity checking using logic
gates.
3. Verification of functional tables of RS, JK, T and D flip-flops using ICs.
4. Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo synchronous and asynchronous counters using FF ICs.
5. Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes using suitableICs.
6. i) Implementation of 4:1 multiplexer & 1:4 de-multiplexer.
ii)Implementation of 4:2 encoder & 2:4 decoder using logic gates.
7. Design of astable and Mono-stable multi-vibrator using NE/SE 555 Timer.
8. Application of Op-Amp (Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, Comparator, Integrator and Differentiator).
9. Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter.
10. Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter.
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Design and implementation of full adder and full subtractor circuits 3
2 Code converters- Grey to Binary, Binary to grey code, Parity generator and parity checking
using logic gates 3
3 Verification of functional tables of RS, JK, T and D flip-flops using ICs 3
4 Design and implementation of 4-bit modulo synchronous and asynchronous counters using FF ICs
6
5 Design and implementation of 4-bit shift registers in SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO modes
usingsuitableICs 6
6 i) Implementation of 4:1 multiplexer & 1:4 de-multiplexer
ii)Implementation of 4:2 encoder & 2:4 decoder using logic gates 6
7 Design of Astable and Mono-stable multi-vibrator using NE/SE 555 Timer 6
8 Application of Op-Amp (Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier, Comparator, Integrator and Differentiator)
6
9 Design of 2 bit Analog to Digital Converter 3
10 Design of 4 bit Digital to Analog Converter 3
11 Mini project ---
11N501 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION I
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of industrial parameters
To study about the construction, characteristics and application of different types of load cells, torque and
various velocity transducers
To learn the working of different types of pressure and temperature transducers
To provide exposure to various measuring techniques for acceleration, vibration and density
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
128
To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meet the desired specifications and
requirements of real time processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
2. Select/Apply suitable sensors for measuring vacuum or high pressures.
3. Apply various sensors for temperature measurement.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Sensors and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
19 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define measurement. 2. State the features of seismic velocity transducer.
3. Define density and viscosity.
4. List the different units for pressure measurement.
5. Differentiate between gauge pressure and vacuum pressure.
6. What is dead weight tester?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
129
7. Name the different elastic pressure transducers.
8. Define ionization
9. List out the instruments used to measure low pressure.
10. State the principle involved in thermistor.
11. List any two factors, which decide the response of thermocouple to process temperature.
12. Define linearization.
13. List out the five properties of a material which should be an element of a bimetallic strip.
14. Identify the source of error in filled-system thermometers and quote its compensation techniques.
15. Mention any two limitations of a total radiation pyrometer.
Understand
1. Discuss about the working of magnetostrictive torque transducer.
2. Tell about photoelectric effect.
3. Illustrate the construction and working of variable reluctance accelerometer.
4. Distinguish between API (American Petroleum Institute) and Baume scale.
5. Explain about ultrasonic densitometers.
6. Indicate the different methods used for pressure measurement and explain with example.
7. Explain the McLeod gauges used for vacuum pressure measurement and its limitations.
8. Discuss the principles and working of differential pressure transmitters.
9. Express the procedure to calibrate the pressure gauges.
10. Explain various types of filled in system thermometers. 11. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
12. Illustrate the operation of signal conditioning circuit used for an industrial RTD.
13. Discuss about the laws of thermocouple and infer some special techniques used for high temperature
measurement using thermocouple.
14. Classify the pyrometers and explain the operation of optical pyrometer.
15. Express the speed measurement process using stroboscope.
16. Distinguish between static and dynamic pressures.
17. Indicate the type of inputs required to differential pressure transducer.
18. Express the atmospheric pressure in terms of bar and kg/cm2 scales.
Apply
1. Apply the magnetostrictive effect to torque measurement and explain its operation.
2. Calculate the torque developed by a motor shaft when it is running at 1500 rpm and delivering shaft power of 5 Horse power.
3. Sketch the functional block diagram of AD595 thermocouple signal conditioning circuit
4. Select a piezoelectric material and produce various measuring application based on the material.
5. Generalize the procedure to measure pressure using elastic diaphragm.
6. Prepare a conversion chart for various types of temperature scales.
7. The mass and spring constant of seismic instrument (Mechanical type) is given below. Calculate the natural
frequency and critical damping ratio. m = 0.005 kg, k = 500 N/m.
8. Change the specific gravity at 60o C into Degree API and Degree Baume scales.
9. Prepare conversion charts for various types of pressure scales.
10. Classify the mechanical instruments for measurement of pressure and explain the process to judge the
pressure by comparing known and unknown pressures.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Are bourdon tubes also used as differential pressure gauges? Justify.
2. Identify the role of protection tubes and thermowells in temperature measurement.
3. Compare various types of thermocouples in terms of their material combinations in positive and negative
terminals, accuracy, measurement range and applications
4. Compare 3-types of load cell spring elements.
5. Determine the specific gravity of a float if it just submerges in a liquid of density 1200 kg/m3.
6. Determine which type of transducer is used for contaminated fluid density measurement.
7. Can seismic instrument act as an accelerometer and vibrometer? Justify.
Create
1. Design a signal conditioning circuit for electrical method of pressure measurement.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
130
2. Create a thermocouple to measure 0 to 900oC temperature by selecting suitable metal combinations for
positive and negative legs and design a signal conditioning circuit to get 1V for maximum change in
temperature. Assume the sensitivity of thermocouple =51.7µV/oC. (C)
3. Construct a piezoelectric accelerometer to provide an output voltage of 2V for maximum pressure. By
assuming suitable sensitivity and crystal thickness, formulate the maximum pressure.(C)
4. Design a pressure transmitter to provide 0-5V for 0 -50 psi pressure variations using LVDT and elastic type
conversion elements. Sensitivity of the elastic material is 0.1mm/psi and sensitivity of LVDT is 1mV/mm.
(C)
Unit I
Measurement of Velocity, Torque and Force
Measurement of linear velocity : moving magnet, moving coil and seismic velocity transducer – Measurement of
angular velocity – electromagnetic tachogenerators, photo electric and variable reluctance tachometers – torque
measurements using resistive, inductive, magnetostrictive and digital transducers – measurement of force – load cell
– strain gauge and LVDT load cells, pneumatic and hydraulic load cells.
Application of load cell
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurement of Displacement, Acceleration, Vibration and Density
Measurement of linear and angular displacement – potentiometer, LVDT, piezo-electric, strain gauge accelerometers
– measurement of vibration – seismic instrument as an accelerometer and vibrometer – density and specific gravity – Baume and API(American Petroleum Institute) scales – pressure head type densitometer – float type densitometer –
ultrasonic densitometer – bridge type gas densitometer.
Application of potentiometer
9 Hours
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Units and definitions – standards of pressure – manometers, elastic type – bourdon tubes, diaphragm gauges, bellow
response of thermocouple – special techniques for measuring high temperature using thermocouples – radiation
methods of temperature measurement – radiation fundamentals – total radiation and selective radiation pyrometers –
optical pyrometer – two colour radiation pyrometer.
Optical pyrometer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
131
Textbook(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd.,
New Delhi, 2011
2. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, 2006
Reference(s)
1. R. K. Jain, Mechanical and Industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011
2. Ernest O. Doebelin, Measurement systems Application and Design, McGraw Hill Book Company, New
York, 2007
3. P. Holman, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York, 2011 4. B. C. Nakra and K. K. Chaudary, Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis, Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2006
5. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age International Private
limited, 2005
6. K. Sawhney , A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation, DhanpatRai and
Sons, New Delhi, 2011
Web Resources
http://www.adinstruments.com
http://www.pacontrol.com/
http://www.digital.ni.com/
11N502 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
3 1 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To classify signals and systems & their mathematical representation
To analyze the discrete time systems
To study various transformation techniques & their computation
To study about filters and their design for digital implementation
To study about a programmable digital signal processor and quantization effects
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Classify various signals and systems and understand the roles of sampling and aliasing in digital processing
2. Apply z-transform or Fourier transform for simple discrete time systems.
3. Design of FIR and IIR filters using various methods.
4. Explain the architecture and features of Commercial Digital Signal Processors
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I,II and III
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
132
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
20 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define aliasing effect.
2. Define causal system.
3. What are the properties linear system should satisfy? 4. What is the criterion for the system posses BIBO stability?
5. Define shift invariance.
6. Differentiate energy and power signals.
7. Define Nyquist rate.
8. List the representation of discrete time signals.
9. Sketch the signal x(n) = − 2n; − 4 ≤ n ≤ 4.
10. Define recursive and non recursive discrete time system.
11. Mention the properties of convolution sum.
12. What are the properties of region of convergence?
13. What are the steps to obtain convolution?
14. Give the relationship between Z transform and Fourier transform.
15. State the initial value and final value theorem. 16. State parseval‘s theorem.
17. What is the z transform of δ (n)?
18. What is the condition z transform to exist?
19. Give the relationship between Z transform and Fourier transform.
20. Distinguish between the exponential form of Fourier series and Fourier transform.
21. Define DFT for a sequence x (n).
22. What are ‗twiddle factors‘ of the DFT?
23. Define the shifting property of DFT.
24. Give the number of complex multiplications and additions required for the direct computation of N- Point
DFT.
25. What is the need of the FFT algorithm? 26. State the computational requirements of DFT.
27. What is DIT-FFT algorithm?
28. What is DIF-FFT algorithm?
29. Which FFT algorithm procedure is the lowest possible level of DFT decompositions?
30. Give the computations efficiency of FFT over DFT.
31. What are the applications of FFT?
32. Arrange the 8 point sequence x(n)=1,2,3,4,-1,-2,-3,-4 in bit reversed order.
33. Draw the basic butterfly diagram for decimation in time algorithm.
34. Draw the basic butterfly diagram for decimation in frequency algorithm.
35. Write down the mathematical expression for FIR system.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
133
36. What is the need and choice of windows?
37. Define phase delay and group delay.
38. What is linear phase filter?
39. What are the requirements for converting stable analog filters into stable digital filters?
40. Define bilinear transformation.
41. Why frequency transformation is needed?
42. What is warping effect? What is its effect on magnitude and phase response?
43. Why impulse invariant method is not preferred in the design of IIR filter other than low pass filter?
44. What are properties of the bilinear transformation? 45. What is meant by memory mapped register?
46. Give the various registers used with the ARAU.
47. List out the types of addressing modes.
48. What is immediate addressing?
49. Which register holds the address of the current data memory page?
50. What is meant by interlocked operation?
51. In parallel operation which type of addressing mode can be used?
Understand
1. What are the classifications of Discrete Time Systems?
2. Describe the procedure used to determine whether the sum of two periodic signals is periodic or not. 3. What are major classifications of signals?
4. Distinguish static systems from dynamic systems.
5. Explain sampling can be done with an impulse function.
6. What is meant by quantization step size?
7. Explain different types of quantization error.
8. What are even and odd signals? Explain with examples.
9. When a discrete time signal is called periodic?
10. How aliasing should be avoided?
11. Explain the properties of ROC.
12. State the initial value and final value theorem.
13. State parseval‘s relation in Z-transform.
14. What are the different of evaluating inverse Z-transform? 15. Draw characteristic curve of DC series motor & state two applications of it
16. Draw the flow graph of an 8-point DIF FFT.
17. Draw the flow graph of an 8-point DIT FFT.
18. Describe the decimation in time FFT algorithm and Construct 8-point DFT from two 4- point DFTs and 4-
point DFTs from 2-point DFTs.
19. Describe the decimation in frequency FFT algorithm and Construct 8-point DFT from two 4- point
20. DFTs and 4-point DFTs from 2-point DFTs.
21. State and prove the properties of DFT.
22. Compare cascade and parallel realization of IIR systems.
23. Obtain mapping formula for the impulse invariant transformation.
24. Discuss the stability of the transformation techniques. 25. Describe Butterworth filters.
26. Describe Chebyshew filters.
27. Explain Von Neumann and Harvard architecture.
28. Explain the function of auxiliary registers in the indirect addressing mode to point the data memory
location.
29. Give the key features of digital signal processors.
30. With suitable block diagram explain in details about TMS320 C 54 DSP processor memory
architecture.
31. Explain any one commercial digital signal processors.
Apply
1. A system is characterized by
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
134
Is the system linear?
2. Design a digital Butterworth Filter that satisfies the following constraint using Bilinear transformation. 3. Design a digital Chebyshev filter to satisfy the constraints
4. Obtain the Cascade and parallel realization for the following system.
5. Compute the FFT for the sequence where N=8 using DIF algorithm.
6. Enumerate the various steps involved in the design of low pass digital Chebyshew filter.
7. Write a program to use auxiliary registers in memory pointing and looping. 8. Explain the operation of TDM serial ports in P-DSPs.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Show that the energy (power) of a real-valued energy (power) signal is equal to the sum of energies
(powers) of its even and odd components.
2. Evaluate how cyclic convolution of two periodic sequences can be obtained using DFT techniques.
3. Analyze the properties of two-sided Z-transform and compare them with one sided Z transform.
4. Prove that an FIR filter has an linear phase if the unit sample response satisfies the condition h(n)= ± h(N-
1-n) , N = 0,1,2, …, N-1. Also discuss the symmetric and anti-symmetric cases of FIR filter
Create
1. Consider the system
a) Determine if the system is time invariant. b) To clarify the result in part (a) assume that the signal Identify the system is
c) Sketch the signal x(n)
d) Determine and sketch the signal
e) Sketch the signal
f) Determine and sketch the signal
g) Sketch the signal
h) Compare the signals . What is your conclusion?
2. For a low pass RC network (R=1MΩand C=1µF). Determine the output response for n in the range0 ≤ n ≤
3 when the input has a step response of magnitude 2V and the sampling frequency fs=50 Hz.Confirm the
calculated values using the principle of discrete time convolution.
3. Develop a program to perform addition of two 64 bit numbers.
Unit I
Introduction
Classification of systems: Continuous, discrete, linear, causal, stable, dynamic, recursive, time variance;
classification of signals: continuous and discrete, energy and power; mathematical representation of signals; spectral density; sampling techniques, quantization, quantization error, Nyquist rate, aliasing effect, Digital signal
representation
Selection of sampling rate.
9 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
135
Unit II
Discrete Time System Analysis
Z-transform and its properties, inverse z-transforms; difference equation – Solution by z-transform, application to
discrete systems - Stability analysis, frequency response – Convolution – Fourier transform of discrete sequence –
Discrete Fourier series
Region of convergence in z-transform
9 Hours Unit III
Discrete Fourier Transform & Computation DFT properties, magnitude and phase representation - Computation of DFT using FFT algorithm – DIT & DIF -
FFT using radix 2 and radix 4– Butterfly structure – correlation techniques.
Inverse DFT using FFT algorithm
9 Hours
Unit IV
Design of Digital Filters
FIR & IIR filter realization – Parallel & cascade forms. FIR design: Windowing Techniques – Need and choice of
windows – Linear phase characteristics. IIR design: Analog filter design - Butterworth and Chebyshev
approximations; digital design using impulse invariant and bilinear transformation - Warping, prewarping –
Frequency transformation
FIR realization of Direct form I and II
9 Hours
Unit V
Digital Signal Processors
Introduction – Architecture – Features – Addressing Formats – Functional modes - Introduction to Commercial
Processors (TMS320CSx)
Arithmetic operations using TMS320CSx
9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J. G. Proakis and D. G. Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing Principles, Algorithms and Applications,
PearsonEducation, New Delhi, 2013
2. S. K. Mitra, Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012
Reference(s)
1. Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer and John R. Buck, Discrete – Time Signal Processing, Pearson
Education, New Delhi, 2013
2. Emmanuel C Ifeachor and Barrie W Jervis, Digital Signal Processing – A Practical approach, Pearson
Education, 2002
3. Steven W. Smith, The Scientist and Engineer's Guide to Digital Signal Processing, California
4. B.Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processors, Architecture, Programming and
Applications, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2013
Web Resource 1. Technical Publishing San Diego, California.(www.DSPguide.com)
11N503 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION
2 0 2 3.0
Objective(s)
To provide an overview of Virtual instruments
To bring out the overview of the software
To know about the programming structure of the software
To familiarize the student with the Applications
Program Outcome(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
136
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Summarize the basics of Virtual Instrumentation (VI).
2. Write simple programs using LabVIEW.
3. Analyze operating systems and hardware aspects of the VI
4. Develop VI for simple applications.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of ‗C‘ Programming
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
21 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Virtual Instrumentation.
2. State graphical system design.
3. Name the three palettes used in programming. 4. Identify the three main components of a virtual instrument.
5. Define modular programming.
6. State Sub VI.
7. List the different types of loops used in VI.
8. State the advantages of using loops.
9. Define an array in VI.
10. State multidimensional array.
11. Define auto-indexing.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
137
12. Identify the difference between a Bundle and Bundle by Name functions.
13. List out the different types of 3D graphs.
14. Recall the basic difference between a waveform chart and a graph.
Understand
1. Illustrate the virtual instrumentation model and graphical system design model in detail.
2. Distinguish text-based programming and graphical programming.
3. Show the block diagram of a typical embedded system software and hardware design flow and compare
with stream-lined development flow with graphical system design.
4. Demonstrate how to create, modify and debug VIs using floating tool palettes? 5. Explain the importance of the toolbar buttons that appear on the block diagram.
6. How can a stand-alone application be created?
7. Distinguish between a shift register and a feedback node.
8. Match while loop with For loop.
9. Explain the methods of changing the value of an element in an existing cluster.
10. Paraphrase the importance of the basic elements of a graph.
Apply
1. Use two numeric inputs and perform add, multiply, subtract and divide operation.
2. Divide two numbers and find the remainder and quotient.
3. Create NOT, AND and OR gates using NAND gate and verify their truth table.
4. Discover the equivalent gray code for a given BCD. 5. Compute a sub VI to convert radians to degrees.
6. Prepare a program to find the sum of first 100 natural numbers.
7. Show a VI that generates two 1D arrays and create another array which consists all the elements of the first
two arrays.
8. Discover a VI to generate a sine wave using Simulate Signal Express VI.
9. Use the Scan from string function to find a part of the string in the prescribed format. Also display the
remaining string and offset after the scan.
10. Using the IMAQ Wind Draw function acquire a selected portion of the image
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Identify whether the given number is odd or even.
2. Design a VI that split an input string into two outputs with reference to a separating character. Find the
length of the input string and reverse the string. 3. Develop a program in VI that finds whether the given number is a prime number or not using (a) a For
Loop and (b) a While Loop.
4. Design a VI to plot a circle in the XY graph using a For Loop.
5. Using the match pattern function check whether the given expression is available in the input string.
6. Also display the portion of the string available before the match and after the match, and the offset of the
string after the match.
7. Is it advisable to use two event structures inside a loop? Justify the answer.
Create
1. Create a VI to compute full adder logic using half adder logic as subVI.
2. Construct a 2D numeric array (5X5) containing random numbers and find it transpose.
3. Create a VI which consists of a numeric array with even and odd elements. Separate the odd and even
elements in two different arrays.
4. Design a VI to produce four lines of digital outputs and to control the digital I/O lines on the DAQ device.
5. Create a VI that contains two-dimensional array of numeric controls.
Unit I
Introduction
General functional description of digital instrument – Block diagram of a Virtual Instrument – Physical quantities
and analog interfaces – Hardware and software – User Interfaces – Advantages of Virtual Instruments over
conventional instruments – Architecture of a Virtual Instrument and a its relation to the operating system.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
138
Advantages of Virtual Instruments over conventional instruments
6 Hours
Unit II
Software Overview
VI – Graphical user interfaces – Controls and indicators – ‗G‘ programming – Labels and Text – Shape, size and
color – Owned and free labels – Data type, Format, Precision and representation – Data types – Data flow
programming – Editing – Debugging and Running a Virtual Instrument – Graphical programming palettes and tools
– Front panel objects – Functions and libraries.
Data types
6 Hours
Unit III
Programming Structure
FOR Loops, WHILE Loops, CASE Structure, Formula nodes, Sequence structures – Arrays and Clusters – Array
Operations – Bundle – Bundle/Unbundle by name, graphs and charts – String and file I/O – High level and Low
level file I/O‘s – Attribute modes Local and Global variables.
Bundle/Unbundle by name
6 Hours
Unit IV
Operating System and Hardware Aspects
PC architecture, Current trends Operating system requirements, Drivers – Interface buses – PCI bus – Interface cards – Specification – Analog and Digital interfaces – Power, Speed and timing considerations. Installing
Hardware, Installing drivers – Configuring the hardware – Addressing the hardware in VI – Digital and Analog I/O
function – Data Acquisition – Buffered I/O – Real time Data Acquisition.
Real time Data Acquisition
6 Hours
Unit V
Applications
IMAQ - Motion Control: General Applications – Feedback devices, Motor drives – Instrument connectivity –GPIB,
Serial Communication – General, GPIB hardware & Software specifications – PX1 / PC1: Controller and Chassis
Configuration and Installation – case studies.
Instrument connectivity
6 Hours
Total: 30 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Garry M Johnson, Labview Graphical Programming, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2006
Reference(s)
1. Jeffrey Travis and Jim Kring, LabVIEW for Everyone: Graphical Programming made Easy and Fun, Tata
McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi, 2006
2. LabVIEW: Basics I & II Manual, National Instruments, Bangalore, 2011
Lab Component
1. Creating Virtual Instrumentation for simple applications
2. Programming exercises for loops and charts
3. Programming exercises for clusters and graphs.
4. Programming exercises on case and sequence structures, file Input / Output.
5. Data acquisition through Virtual Instrumentation.
6. Developing voltmeter using DAQ cards.
7. Developing signal generator using DAQ cards.
8. Simulating reactor control using Virtual Instrumentation.
9. Real time temperature control using Virtual Instrumentation.
10. Real time sequential control of any batch process
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
139
Total: 30 Hours
Total: 30 +30 Hours
1N504 PROCESS CONTROL
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To obtain the mathematical models for first order and higher order real-time systems and also understand
the concept of self regulation
To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller modes and controller tuning
methods
To understand the concept of various complex control schemes
To study about the construction, characteristics and application of different types of actuators
To understand how to apply the control schemes for various applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Model a physical process and understand the controller characteristics, selection of controller mode and
control schemes.
2. Obtain optimum controller settings using various tuning methods.
3. Analyze/select final control elements for real-time systems
4. Apply complex control schemes for various, application.
Prerequisite(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
140
Basic knowledge of Control System
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I and II
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†22
Test II†
Model Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 30 30 30 30
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the Objective(s) of process control.
2. Define process. 3. Outline Servo and Regulator problems.
4. Quote, why process control is needed in industries?
5. Recall interacting system and give an example.
6. Recall degree of freedom in process.
7. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.
8. Name the different types of control modes.
9. Label the different types of test inputs.
10. Describe the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.
11. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
12. Name various tuning methods for getting optimum controller settings.
13. Match the feed forward and feedback control system. 14. Define averaging control.
15. Recall the undesirable effects of dead time in a process.
16. Point an actuator.
17. Define the flow capacity of a control valve.
18. Outline cavitation and flashing in control valves.
19. List the various types of valves used in flow control applications.
20. Label the different types of plugs used in pneumatic valves.
21. Name the various control schemes involved in the heat exchanger process.
22. Recall the various control schemes used in boiler drum level control.
23. Define reflux ratio.
24. Draw the P&I diagram of butterfly control valve and various instrument lines.
Understand
1. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
2. Explain the self regulation.
3. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.
4. Extrapolate the need for mathematical modeling of a process.
5. Tell how to conduct an open loop test for a process?
6. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
141
7. Distinguish between offset and error.
8. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
9. Compute the advantage of an electronic controller when compared with pneumatic controller.
10. Tell how the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers.
11. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade control?
12. Show how the process reaction curve can be obtained.
13. Indicate, why is it necessary to choose controller settings that satisfy both gain margin and phase margin? 14. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a process.
15. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.
16. Tell when you employ a valve positioner in a control valve.
17. Discuss why an installed characteristic of a control valve is different from inherent characteristics.
18. Express the need of I/P converter in a control system.
19. Explain the auctioneering control.
20. Predict the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.
Apply
1. Compute the transfer function H 2 /Q for the two tank system shown in the following figure(Assume: Tank
1 and Tank 2 are interacting) 2. A tank operating at 50 feet head 51 lpm out flow through a valve and has a cross section area of 10 square
feet calculate the time constant
3. Select the optimum controller settings for the model G(s)=e -0.5s /(4s +1) using process reaction Curve
Method?
4. Compute the proper Cv for a valve that must allow 150 gallons of ethyl alcohol per minute with a specific
gravity of 0.8 at a maximum pressure of 50 psi and the required valve size
Valve Size ¼ ½ 1 1½ 2 3 4 6 8
Cv 0.3 3 14 35 55 108 174 400 758
5. Use the split-range controller to a pressure control process and explain its operation.
6. Solve the transfer function of a pneumatic valve. 7. Select the gain of proportional controller using Ziegler-Nichols method. Consider a unit step change in the
set point. The process is second order with kp =5, time constant =2, and damping ratio=3. Assume that Gm
(s)=Gf (s) =1 and apply it for interacting system?
Analyze /Evaluate
1. Develop the mathematical model of a self regulating system.
2. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-interacting capacities.
3. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller settings for any process.
4. Illustrate the Proportional, PI, PD and PID controllers.
5. Identify the most suitable control valve for any flow process.
Create
1. Create the mathematical model and implement a suitable feedback controller with proper controller setting
for a two tank interacting system.
2. Design a simple PID controller to maintain the position of an inverted pendulum vertically.
3. Derive mathematical model for coupled three tank cylindrical system
Unit I
Introduction
Need for process control – continuous and batch process – mathematical model of first order level, pressure and
thermal processes – higher order process – interacting and non-interacting systems – servo and regulator operation –
self-regulation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
142
Mathematical model of three tank system
9 Hours
Unit II
Controller Characteristics
Basic control actions – characteristics of On-Off, proportional, single speed floating, integral and derivative control
modes – composite control modes: P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes – response of controller for different types
of test inputs – bumpless transfer – Electronic controllers to realize various control actions – selection of control
mode for different processes – typical control schemes for level, flow, pressure and temperature processes.
Proportional and derivative kick
9 Hours
Unit III
Tuning of Controllers and Multi-loop Control
Optimum controller settings – Evaluation criteria-IAE, ISE and ITAE – ¼ decay ratio – Tuning of controllers by
process reaction curve method – damped oscillation method – Ziegler-Nichol's tuning – Feed forward control -
ratio control – cascaded control – averaging control – inferential and split range control.
Relay based tuning
9 Hours
Unit IV
Final Control Element
I/P and P/I converters – pneumatic and electric actuators – valve positioner – control valve – characteristics of control valves – type of valves: globe, butterfly, diaphragm, ball valves – control valve sizing – cavitation and
flashing in control valves. Response of control valves, electric and electro pneumatic valves – Selection of control
valves
Valve body
9 Hours
Unit V
Selected Unit Operations
Distillation column – control of top and bottom product compositions – reflux ratio. Case study: control of CSTR,
control of heat exchanger, Steam boiler: drum level control and combustion control. Piping and Instrumentation
Diagram (P&ID) symbols –P&ID for level and flow control loops.
Three-Element Drum Level Control System
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
George Stephanopoulos, Chemical Process Control, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012
1. Peter Harriott, Process Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 30th reprint 2008
Reference(s)
1. Donald P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control, Wiley-India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011
2. Dale E. Seborg, D. A. Mellichamp and Thomas F Edgar, Process Dynamics and Control, Wiley-India,
2010.
3. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2008 4. S B Thakore and B I Bhatt, Introduction to Process Engineering and Design, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 30th reprint 2008
11N505 CREATIVITY & INNOVATION AND TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make the students establish and maintain competitive advantage in the industrial environment through
making them capable of applying their innovative skills
To make the students understand the basic concepts of total quality management and appreciate its
importance in today‘s business environment
To enable them to acquire required diagnostic skills and use various quality tools
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
143
To familiarize the students about the quality management system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the role of creative processes in developing innovative products
2. Summarize the principles of total quality management
3. Analyze benchmark problems using TQM Tools and Quality Systems
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
23 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 30 30 30 30
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
144
1. State the need to be creative.
2. State the various techniques for creative problem solving.
3. List the steps of FMEA.
4. Define the goals of innovation.
5. Define the quality dimensions.
6. State deming‘s philosophy.
7. List out the 7 QC tools.
8. Define various types of quality costs.
9. State the duties of quality council. 10. Describe six sigma and its implications.
Understand
11. Distinguish creativity and innovation.
12. Explain the types of innovation and goals of innovation.
13. Elucidate the evolution of TQM.
14. Explicate the process involved in ISO 9000 implementation and certification.
15. Illustrate PDSA cycle.
16. Explain the concept of optimum quality cost.
17. Express Taguchi‘s loss function.
18. Explain the steps involved in bagging the deming‘s quality award.
19. Describe Juran‘s trilogy approach. 20. Demonstrate the means of implementing kaizen in an organization.
Apply/ Analyze / Evaluate
1. Point out the left and right brain functions. Explain their role in problem solving.
2. Analyze the various brain storming techniques.
3. Explain eight creative ideas for the improvement of quality in a field of your choice.
4. Outline the importance of customer / supplier relationship for a departmental store in terms of inspection,
training, and recognition.
5. Compute the steps involved in constructing a house of quality.
6. Determine the importance of 5 S for an organization with example.
7. Analyze the role of leadership in implementing TQM
8. Explain the seven quality control tools.
9. Analyze the productivity improvement due to total productive maintenance. 10. Measure the various factors that impact TQM implementation.
Create
1. Choose any four creative techniques and explain how you do apply them to your instrumentation problem.
2. Explain various creative ideas for improving the automation in any instrumentation industry.
3. Create your organization is in the business of supplying fasteners to leading automobile manufacturers.
Your organization aspires to bag Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award. Narrate how you would go about
achieving this.
4. Create an organization is now thinking of adopting and implementing TQM practices.
5. Integrate the concepts of POKAYOKE.
6. Formulate the role of MR in ISO Certification.
7. Explain how you would go about carrying out this task, if you have been hired as an external consultant for this purpose?
8. Compile the concept of optimum quality cost.
9. Develop taguchi‘s loss function.
10. Explain the concepts of ISO:14000.
Unit I
Creativity
Concept and history of creativity, need for creativity, creative environment, stages of creativity process, creativity
and intelligence, creativity in various contexts, economic view of creativity, measuring creativity, fostering
creativity, creative problem solving – brain storming and various techniques, lateral thinking.
Stages of creativity process
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
145
9 Hours
Unit II
Innovation
Definition, creativity vis-à-vis innovation, conceptualizing innovation, types of innovation, sources of innovation,
goals of innovation, process of technological innovation, diffusion of innovation, factors contributing to successful
technological innovation, failure of innovations, innovation management, measures of innovation.
Sources of innovation
9 Hours
Unit III
TQM Introduction
Definition of Quality – Dimensions of Quality – Quality Planning – Quality costs – Analysis Techniques for Quality
Costs – Basic concepts of Total Quality Management – Historical Review – Quality Statements – Strategic
Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark – Benchmarking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of
Quality, QFD Process, and Benefits –FMEA – Stages of FMEA - Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems –
ISO 9000:2000 Quality System – Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing,
TS 16949, ISO 14000 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits
Stages of FMEA
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Tom Kelly, The Art of Innovation, Doubleday, Random House Inc. USA, 2011
2. Managing Creativity and Innovation (Harvard Business Essentials), Harvard Business School, 2003
3. Dale H. Besterfiled, Carol Besterfiled-Michna, Glen H. Besterfiled, Mary Besterfiled-Sacre, Total Quality
Management, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003 (Indian reprint 2006)
Reference(s)
1. Leigh L. Thompson and Hoon-Seok Choi, Creativity and Innovation in Organizational Teams, Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates, USA, 2006
2. Paul E. Plsek, Creativity, Innovations and Quality, Irwin Professional, USA, 2000 3. Alan G. Robinson and Sam Stern, Corporate Creativity: How Innovation and Improvement Actually
Happen, Berrett-Koehler Publishers, USA, 1998
4. James R. Evans & William M. Lidsay, The Management and Control of Quality, South-Western (Thomson
Learning), 2008
5. J. S. Oakland, Total Quality Management, Butterworth – Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford. 2009
6. Narayana and N. S. Sreenivasan, Quality Management – Concepts and Tasks, New Age International, 2007
11N507 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
146
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To acquire knowledge about the functionality of field instruments and controllers
To gain the programming knowledge in virtual instrumentation for process control
To interface the Data Acquisition card with computer and process station
To design and implementation of controllers for different processes
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Implement or calibrate final control elements or transmitter in real time.
2. Obtain closed loop response of real time systems.
3. Tune controller parameters and implement advanced control schemes
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Process control
Basic knowledge of Control Engineering
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
147
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. List out the Objective(s) of process control.
2. Define process. 3. Outline Servo and Regulator problems.
4. Quote, why process control is needed in industries?
5. Illustrate interacting system and give an example.
6. Recall degree of freedom in process.
7. List the characteristics of ON-OFF controller.
8. Name the different types of control modes.
9. Label the different types of test inputs.
10. Describe the relationship between proportional band and proportional gain.
11. List the merits and demerits of P, I and D controllers.
12. Name various tuning methods for getting optimum controller settings.
13. State ultimate gain and ultimate period. 14. Reproduce the settings recommended by Ziegler and Nichols for feedback controllers.
15. List the features of simple performance criteria used in controller tuning.
16. Match the feed forward and feedback control system.
17. Define averaging control.
18. Recall the undesirable effects of dead time in a process.
19. Point an actuator.
20. Define the flow capacity of a control valve.
21. Outline cavitation and flashing in control valves.
22. List the various types of valves used in flow control applications.
23. Label the different types of plugs used in pneumatic valves.
24. Name the various control schemes involved in the heat exchanger process. 25. Recall the various control schemes used in boiler drum level control.
26. Define reflux ratio.
27. Draw the P&I diagram of butterfly control valve and various instrument lines.
Understand
1. Infer the difference between manipulated variable and controlled variable.
2. Explain the self-regulation.
3. Distinguish between continuous process and batch process.
4. Extrapolate the need for mathematical modeling of a process.
5. Tell how to conduct an open loop test for a process?
6. Judge when a PID controller is preferred rather than PI controller.
7. Distinguish between offset and error.
8. Select a suitable control schemes for temperature process and flow process.
9. Compute the advantage of an electronic controller when compared with pneumatic controller.
10. Tell how the offset can be minimized with P-I controllers. 11. Judge what type of controller is preferred in the inner loop of cascade control?
12. Show how the process reaction curve can be obtained.
13. Indicate, why is it necessary to choose controller settings that satisfy both gain margin and phase margin?
14. Represent, how the feed forward controller improves the performance of a process.
15. Generalize the purpose of final control element in a process.
16. Tell when you employ a valve positioner in a control valve.
17. Discuss why an installed characteristic of a control valve is different from inherent characteristics.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
148
18. Express the need of I/P converter in a control system.
19. Explain the auctioneering control.
20. Predict the importance of air-fuel ratio in combustion chamber.
Apply
1. Solve for the time domain output for any first order transfer function to a step change in input.
2. Use the initial and final value theorems of Laplace transforms to determine the initial and final values of
process output for a unit step input change to the given transfer function G(s) =(5s+12)/(7s+4).
3. Examine the following open-loop unstable process Gp(s)=3/(-2s+1). For a PI controller, Calculate the range
of stabilizing proportional controller gains (kc) for an integral time constant of τ1=2.
4. Examine a process with the following transfer function Gp(s)=1/(s-2)(s+1). Can PI controller satisfy the
necessary condition for stability of this process?
5. A PI controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (2s2+3s+4). Judge the process closed-loop stable.
6. Consider the following process Gp(s) =2.5(-5s+1)/ (10s+1) (2s+1). For P-only control, calculate the range
of process gain to assure closed-loop stability of this process.
7. Apply (simulate) the Tyreus –Luyben parameters for PI and PID controller to the following process gp(s) =
e-5s/ (10s+1). Compare these results with Cohen-Coon.
8. For the given system Gp(s) =15/ (s2+4.9s+0.9), Calculate the PID gains parameters if a closed-loop time
constant of 5 minutes is desired.
9. For the given system Gp(s) =1/ (4s+1), Calculate the PID tuning parameters.
10. A PID controller is used on the second order process Gp(s) =1/ (8s+4). Judge the process closed-loop stable.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Determine the characteristics of a self-regulating system using mathematical model.
2. Analyze why two interacting capacities have more sluggish response than non-interacting capacities.
3. Select the most appropriate types of feedback controller and controller settings for any process.
4. Illustrate the Proportional, PI, PD and PID controllers.
5. Identify the most suitable control valve for any flow process.
Create
1. Develop mathematical model and implement a suitable feedback controller with proper controller setting
for a two tank interacting system.
2. Identify the given process and tune the PID parameters to get the desired response.
3. Design of ON-OFF controller for a given application.
List of Experiments
1. I / P to P / I Converter & I/ P Converter Calibration
2. Closed loop response of interacting and non interacting level process station
3. Testing the valve characteristics and calibration of a control valve
4. Tuning of PID controller for a given system
5. Closed loop control of flow process with and without transportation lag.
6. Closed loop control of temperature process station
7. Closed loop control of pressure process
8. Design of on/off controller for a system
9. Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process
Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 I / P to P / I Converter & I/ P Converter Calibration 3
2 Closed loop response of interacting and non interacting level process station 6
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
149
3 Testing the valve characteristics and calibration of a control valve 3
4 Tuning of PID controller for a given system 3
5 Closed loop control of flow process with and without transportation lag. 3
6 Closed loop control of temperature process station 6
7 Closed loop control of pressure process 3
8 Design of on/off controller for a system 6
9 Implementation of cascade control scheme for level process 6
10 Mini project ---
11N508 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERSLABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To study the Architecture of 8085, 8051 and PIC Microcontroller
To study the addressing modes & instruction set of 8085, 8051 and PIC Microcontroller
To introduce the need & use of Interrupt structure
To develop skill in simple program writing
To introduce commonly used peripheral / interfacing ICs – To study simple applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Apply the code conversion, sorting and arithmetic operations using microprocessor. 2. Apply microcontroller for simple applications
3. Write Program and Interface PIC microcontrollers with various devices.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Basic knowledge of C Programming
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
150
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define processor.
2. State the timing diagram of 8086.
3. Name the addressing modes in 8086.
4. State how the data and address buses are multiplexed in an 8086 microprocessor.
5. What do you mean by assembly language?
6. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller
7. Define pipeline processing.
8. Draw the interrupt structure of 8085 and 8051.
9. Outline the instruction set of 8051.
10. List out the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
11. Match CISC and RISC.
12. Dfine a PIC Microcontroller?
13. Mmorizecross compiler.
14. Outline the purpose of stack block.
15. Dscribe the need or a cross compiler.
16. Draw the format of flag register in 8086.
17. How external memory devices can interface with 8051?
Understand
1. Indicate the pin configurations of 8086.
2. Rewrite the summary of 8085 hardware interrupts in table format.
3. Explain the operation of each instruction in the instruction set of 8086.
4. Compute the 20 bit effective address in an 8086 processor.
5. Interrelate the program counter to the data bus.
6. Express, when we say that the PIC 16 series microcontrollers are 8-bit microcontrollers?
7. Discuss the necessity for providing 4 banks of general purpose registers R0 to R7 in 8051? How can you switch
over to bank1 from bank0?
8. How 8086 interrupt occurs?
9. Give the alternate function for the port pins of port3.
10. Explain the function of the PSEN pin of 8051.
11. How is stack implemented in 8051?
12. Why PIC Microcontroller are preferred compared to other controller?
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
151
1. How will you perform the operations like arithmetic, logical, rotate and stack using 8086, 8051 andPIC
Microcontroller?
2. How will you transfer the data from one place to another?
3. How will you interface a microprocessor and microcontroller to a given peripheral?
4. Differentiate microcontroller and microprocessor.
5. Compare 8051 microcontroller with PIC microcontroller.
Create
1. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
2. Develop the real time clock using 8051 Microcontroller.
3. Formulate the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
List of Experiments
Microprocessor Experiments (8086 Using MASM)
1. 16 bit arithmetic operation
2. Code conversion.
3. Arithmetic program to find square, LCM, and GCD.
4. Sorting.
5. Multibyte Packed BCD addition & subtraction.
Microcontroller Experiments (8051)
6. Design of Traffic Light controller.
7. Design of ADC/DAC Interface.
8. Design of Stepper motor Interface.
Microcontroller Experiments (PIC using Cross C compilers)
9. PIC Binary /BCD counter.
10. I/O Controller Interface
Mini project
.
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 16 bit arithmetic operation 9
2 Code conversion. 6
3 Arithmetic program to find square, LCM, and GCD. 6
4 Sorting. 3
5 Multibyte Packed BCD addition & subtraction. 3
6 Design of Traffic Light controller. 3
7 Design of ADC/DAC Interface. 3
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
152
8 Design of Stepper motor Interface. 3
9 PIC Binary /BCD counter. 6
10 I/O Controller Interface. 3
11 Mini project ---
11N509 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING AND DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To understand the concepts of various modulation techniques
To bridge the gap between theoretical and practical concepts
To indicate the possible source of experimental error and discussing how it would affect output of the
experiment
To have an in-depth knowledge of various signal processing techniques and finite word length effects
To design, implementation, and debugging of DSP algorithms
To design and simulate multi-rate filters
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Modulate the analog and digital transmission of signals 2. Use the simulation tools for the analysis of Digital signal processing concepts.
3. Design digital IIR and FIR filters.
Prerequisite(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
153
Baiscs of Communication Engineering
Basics of Digital Signal Processing
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Draw the circuit diagram of Balanced Modulator for generating AM with carrier.
2. Define critical modulation.
3. State the demerits of Square-law Modulator.
4. Define coefficient of modulation and percentage modulation for an AM system.
5. Draw the envelope of AM.
6. State Carson‘s rule of FM bandwidth.
7. Describe narrowband and wideband FM.
8. Define modulation index of FM and PM.
9. Define phase delay and group delay.
10. Define linear phase filter.
11. List some finite word length effects in digital filters. 12. Describe about multirate filter.
Understand
1. Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat circuit diagram and
waveforms.
2. Explain the high level AM transmitter with neat diagram.
3. Explain the Super-heterodyne receiver with neat diagram.
4. Discuss the need to suppress the carrier in AM wave. Write the expressions of the DSB-SC wave in time
and frequency domain.
5. Explain Narrow band FM in detail. 6. Explain the function of auxiliary registers in the indirect addressing mode to point the data memory
location.
7. With suitable block diagram explain in details about TMS320 C 54 DSP processor memory architecture.
8. Give two methods of generating DSB-SC.
9. Give the requirements for converting stable analog filters into stable digital filters.
Apply
1. Show different AM methods.
2. Explain any one commercial digital signal processor
3. Classify the features of digital signal processors. 4. Sketch AM, FM, PM waveforms.
5. Judge why frequency transformation is needed in communication.
6. Explain the process of sampling.
7. Explain Butterworth filters.
8. Explain Chebyshew filters.
Analyze
1. Compare different modulation techniques.
2. Differentiate decimation and Interpolation.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
154
3. Analyze the four most common methods of pulse modulation.
4. Identify the properties of the bilinear transformation.
5. Outline the operation of TDM serial ports in P-DSPs.
6. Identify is warping effect. Analyze its effect on magnitude and phase response.
7. Categorize Analog and digital filters.
Evaluate
1. Contrast Analog and digital filter
2. Compare decimation and Interpolation.
3. Determine the four most common methods of pulse modulation.
4. Compare Von Neumann and Harvard architecture.
5. Determine the minimum number of bits required in a PCM code for a dynamic range of 80dB. What is the coding efficiency.
6. Assess the various steps involved in the design of low pass digital Chebyshewfilter.
Create
1. For a low pass RC network (R=1MΩand C=1µF). Determine the output response for n in the range
30 n when the input has a step response of magnitude 2V and the sampling frequency fs=50 Hz.
Confirm the calculated values using the principle of discrete time convolution.
2. Construct a program to perform addition of two 64 bit numbers.
3. Compile the dynamic range in dB for the following n-bit linear sign-magnitude PCM codes: n=7, 8, 12, and
14.
4. Develop a program to use auxiliary registers in memory pointing and looping.
5. One input to a conventional AM modulator is a 500 kHz carrier with amplitude of 20 V. The second input is a 10 kHz modulating signal with amplitude of 7.5 V. Design the modulator and find, (i) Frequencylimits
for the upper and lower side bands, (ii) Bandwidth, (iii) Upper and lower side frequencies, (iv)Modulation
3 Design and implementation of time division multiplexing 3
4 Line coding &decoding 3
5 Digital modulation –ASK, PSK, FSK 9
6 Waveform Generation 3
7 Design and implementation of FIR filter 6
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
155
8 Design and implementation of IIR filter 6
9 Design of microcontroller based Ethernet interface to control the industrial
parameters 6
10 Mini project ---
11N510 TECHNICAL SEMINAR I
0 0 0 1.0
Programme Outcome(s)
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s) As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Improve the communication skill
2. Develope technical content preparation and presentation.
3. Interact technically in an open forum.
11N601 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION II
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To study, understand and design of various types of flow meters
To understand the different types of level measurements adopted in industrial environment
To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, moisture, viscosity and pH measurements
To identify, select and design a suitable measurement techniques for industrial applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
156
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to: 1. Analyze, formulate and select suitable flow meters for various flow applications.
2. Analyze and select suitable level meters for various applications.
3. Apply transducers/sensor to measure humidity, moisture and viscosity.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation I
Basic knowledge of Sensor and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†24
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 40 40 40 40
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
Total 100* 100* 100* 100*
Remember
1. Define mass flow rate.
2. Define discharge co-efficient.
3. Name four type of variable area flow meters. 4. State the features of coriolis mass flow meter.
5. List two types of mass flow meters.
6. State two limitations of rotameter type viscometers.
7. Outline the commonly used methods of solid flow measurement.
8. State the karman‘s principle.
9. Define Laser Doppler Effect.
10. List the different units for level measurement.
11. State two advantages of bubbler system.
12. List the types of level switches.
13. Name the different types of level transducers.
14. List two instruments used to measure level in boiler drum. 15. Outline the principle involved in psychrometer.
16. What is actuation depth.
17. List the four main applications of saybolt viscometer.
18. Define dew point.
19. Define absolute humidity.
20. Identify the usage of hygrometers.
Understand
1. Distinguish between orifice and venturi.
2. Tell about inferential flow meter.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
157
3. Discuss about ultrasonic flow meter.
4. Explain the working principle of Pitot tube.
5. Discuss the working of rotameter flow transducer.
6. Discuss the installation of head flow meters.
7. Illustrate the working principle of positive displacement flow meter.
8. Express the principles involved in ultrasonic flow meter.
9. Explain the guidelines for selecting a suitable flow meter for a specific application.
10. Summarize different types of solid flow measurement schemes.
11. Illustrate the operation of capacitance type hygrometer. 12. Infer the different methods used for level measurement based on measurement range and explain with
example.
13. Explain the location correction for hydrostatic level measurement.
14. Explain the nuclear moisture gauge used for moisture measurement in solids and mention its
limitations.
15. Illustrate the working principle of a commercial dew point meter.
16. Indicate the major components of rotameter type viscometer.
Apply
1. Generalize the steps to obtain the equations which relating differential pressure and flow rate of variable
head type devices.
2. An incompressible fluid is flowing in a 100 mm pipe under a pressure head of 1.5 kg/cm2. Calculate the fluid velocity and volume flow rate.
3. Sketch the coriolis flow meters and explain its operation.
4. Differentiate between viscosity and consistency.
5. Examine the importance of air-purge system in industrial liquid level measurement.
6. Calculate the buoyancy force on an object that displaces 5 m3 of water at 20 degree Celsius.
7. Judge the application which needs only capacitive level gauge for measuring its level.
8. Produce the relationship between flow rate and viscosity.
9. The absolute viscosity of a fluid under test is 1000 centipoises. The density of the fluid is 0.8
gm/cm3.Calculate the absolute viscosity and relative viscosity.
10. A sample of wood weighed 150 kg when it was wet and weighed 125 kg after driving of the moisture by
desiccation. Calculate the percentage moisture content of the wood before drying.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. Compare orifice plate and venturi tube.
2. Analyze the difficulty of using dc excitation in electromagnetic flow meter.
3. Develop a procedure to measure liquid level in a boiler drum and point out the difficulties associated with
such measurement.
4. Identify suitable method for continuous level sensing.
5. Classify the capacitance based level measurement schemes.
6. Point out the problems associated with resistance based level measurement.
7. Infer the effect of increase in water temperature when it is supplied to a psychrometer.
8. What might happen if it is not?
9. Outline the procedure to improve the efficiency of the saybolt viscometer
10. Analyze and determine the suitable transducer for corrosive or explosive level measurement. 11. Illustrate the procedure to identify the suitable transmitter/transducer for a given application.
*Create type questions cannot be framed with this syllabus.
Unit I
Flow Meters I
Theory of fixed and variable head type flow meters – Orifice plate – types of Orifice plates, pressure tapping and
CD variations – Venturi tube – flow nozzle – dall tube – installation of head flow meters – pitot tube.
Dall tube
9 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
158
Unit II
Flow Meters II
Positive displacement flow meters : constructional details and theory of reciprocating piston, oval gear and helix
type flow meters – Inferential meter – turbine flow meter – nutating disc – rotameter – theory and installation –
angular momentum mass flow meter – coriolis mass flow meters – thermal mass flow meters.
Turbine flow meter
9 Hours
Unit III
Flow Meters III Principle and constructional details of electromagnetic flow meter – different types of excitation schemes used –
different types of ultrasonic flow meters – laser doppler anemometer – vortex shedding flow meter – target flow
meter – solid flow rate measurement – guidelines for selection of flow meter.
Target flow meter
9 Hours
Unit IV
Level Measurement
Definition of level – visual indicators – float gauges: different types – level switches – level measurement using
displacer and torque tube – bubbler tube – boiler drum level measurement – hydra step systems – electrical types of
level gauges using resistance, capacitance, nuclear radiation and ultrasonic sensors – measurement of level of solids
– paddle wheel type - differential pressure method. Paddle wheel type
9 Hours
Unit V
Measurement of Humidity, Moisture and Viscosity
Units and definitions – dry and wet bulb psychrometers – hot wire electrode and hair type hygrometers– dew cell –
electrolysis type hygrometer – commercial type dew point meter – moisture terms – different methods of moisture
measurement – moisture measurement in granular materials, solid penetrable materials like wood, web type
material - capacitance type - NMR probe for moisture detection – viscosity measurement – different methods of
measuring viscosity – Saybolt viscometers – continuous measurement of viscosity - rotameter for viscosity
measurement.
Electrolysis type hygrometer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. D. Patranabis, Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Ltd., New
Delhi,2011
2. K.Krishnaswamy and S.Vijayachitra, Industrial Instrumentation, New age International Private
limited, 2005
Reference(s)
1. R. K. Jain, Mechanical & Industrial Measurements, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 1999.
2. K. Sawhney and P. Sawhney, A Course on Mechanical Measurement Instrumentation and Control,
DhanpatRai and Co, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Donald P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley Eastern Limited, New Delhi, 2006.
4. Alan S. Morris, Principles of Measurement and Instrumentation, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi,2011.
5. B. C. Nakra and K. K. Chaudry, Instrumentation, Measurement and Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill book Co,
New Delhi, 2009.
6. B. G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Hand Book (Measurement), Chilton Book Co, New York 2008.
11N602 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
159
To provide exposure to various techniques and methods of analysis that occurs in the various regions of the
spectrum
To learn the unique methods of chromatography
To get an adequate knowledge about various techniques for analysis of industrial gases
To understand the concepts of electrodes and biosensors that has potential applications in medical field,
food and beverage industries
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the concepts colorimetry, Spectrophotometry and chromatography.
2. Apply the various techniques used in analysis of industrial gases.
3. Summarize the concepts of pH analyzer, Conductivity analyzer, Dissolved Component analyzer, Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance and Radiation Techniques .
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Industrial Insturmentation I
Basic knowledge of Sensor and Transducer
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
25 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
160
1. Define Beer Lambert‘s law.
2. State transmittance.
3. Define Absorbance.
4. Define column chromatography.
5. Outline retention time?
6. Describe chromatogram.
7. State spectrophotometer.
8. State pollution?
9. Name the types of pollution. 10. Outline principle involved in thermal analyzer?
11. List out the main parts of pH measurement system.
12. Name the types of oxygen analyzer?
13. State half-cell?
14. Define pH value.
15. Quote the dead time in a GM counter?
16. Label the types of mass analyzer
Understand
1. Demonstrate the schematic diagram of a UV spectrophotometer and explain its working.
2. Discuss the sample preparation for solid type material in the IR spectrophotometer.
3. Express the principle of chromatogram and explain it. 4. Distinguish between the gas chromatography and High Pressure Liquid Chromatography (HPLC).
5. Classify the different methods used to estimate the amount of carbon monoxide present in air with the
help of neat instrumentation setups.
6. Summarize the function of Hay‘s Magnetostrictive analyzer used for measurement of oxygen in stream
of gas.
7. Discuss the principle and working of dissolved oxygen analyzer and sodium analyzer.
8. Illustrate the operation of absorption meters.
9. Explain the block diagram of mass spectrometer.
10. Paraphrase the schematic diagram of a NMR spectrometer and explain the importance of each
component.
Apply
1. Manipulate the Beer‘s law for energy absorption and concentration. 2. Explain the principle of Michelson Interferometer in FTIR spectrophotometer?
3. An open tubular column having the bore of 0.18mm and the length is 700cm, the mobile phase is
moving at a velocity of 35cm/sec. The retention time trof the solute is 1.22 min peak width at half
height is 0.75sec. Calculate
(a) Retention time of non-retained compound
(b) Capacity factor
(c) Number of plates
(d) Plate height
4. Explain the concepts of hydrogen sulfide in solid state sensor?
5. Show the detection of smoke in Ionization smoke detector?
6. Examine intensity of radioactive radiation measured in GM and proportional counters?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the relationships between the retention time, retention volume and retention factor.
2. Detect the amount of sulphur dioxide presents in air?
3. Analyze the efficiency of the sodium analyzer and silica analyzer.
4. Justify hydrogen electrode is used as a primary reference electrode
Create
1. Design the different types of electrodes used for the determination of pH and conductivity.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
161
Unit I
Colorimetry and Spectrophotometry
Beer-Lambert‘s law – colorimeters – basic principle of spectroscopy –emission and absorption of radiation –
radiation sources – UV and visible spectrophotometers – single and double beam instruments – sources and
detectors – IR spectrophotometers – attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – atomic absorption
1. Willard, H.H., L. L. Merrit, J. A. Dean and F. L. Seattle, Instrumental Methods of Analysis, CBS
Publishing Co, New York,2010
2. Robert D. Braun, Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co, New York, 2006
Reference(s) 1. D. A. Skoog and D. M. West , Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Holt Sounder Publication,
Philadelphia, 2007
2. G. W. Ewing , Instrumental Methods of Analysis, McGraw Hill book Co, New York, 2009
3. Mann C. K. Vickers, T.J. and W. H. Guillick, Instrumental Analysis, Harper and Row Publishers, New
York, 1994
4. B. G. Liptak, Process Measurement and Analysis, Chilton Book Company, New York, 1995
5. Frank A. Settle, Handbook of Instrumental Techniques for Analytical Chemistry, Prentice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2004
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
162
11N603 VLSI DESIGN
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To introduce MOS theory / Manufacturing Technology
To study inverter / stick diagram / design rules / layout diagram
To study MOS / CMOS circuit design process
To introduce the concepts and techniques of subsystem design
To get familiarized with VHDL programming behavioral/Structural/dataflow/ process
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Summarize the fundamental principles of VLSI design and fabrication technology.
2. Analyze the MOS and CMOS circuit design process.
3. Design a subsystem using combinational logic
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Digital logic circuits
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
26 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define VLSI Design process.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
163
2. Identify the difference between full custom and semi custom.
3. Define transconductance.
4. Name the properties of MOS and CMOS circuits.
5. Define Pull-up to Pull-down ratio of nMOS inverter.
6. Recall the uses of stick diagram.
7. Name the different MOS layers.
8. List the uses of stick diagram.
9. State the importance of design rules.
10. What is wiring capacitance? 11. Define clocked and dynamic CMOS logic.
12. Define switch logic.
13. Outline the concept of parity generator.
14. Define multiplexer.
15. State the difference between combinational and sequential logic.
16. Define packages.
17. What are the types of operators in VHDL?
18. Define test bench.
19. Identify the difference between Verilog and VHDL
Understand
1. Illustrate the steps involved in VLSI design process. 2. Distinguish between CMOS, NMOS and PMOS.
3. Indicate the expression for I ds versus Vds relationships.
4. Explain the process involved in wafer fabrication.
5. Discuss the process involved in ion implantation and deposition.
6. Illustrate the different masks used in twin tub process.
7. Distinguish between nMOS design style and CMOS design style.
8. Show how the inverter delay affects the performance?
9. Summarize the concept of wiring capacitance.
10. Give examples for access data types used in VHDL.
11. Find the difference between Dynamic and clocked CMOS logic.
12. Indicate the different operators available in VHDL.
13. Classify the VHDL data types. 14. Explain the working of parity generator and multiplexers.
Apply
1. Why NMOS technology is preferred more than PMOS technology?
2. Explain the different layers in MOS transistor?
3. Show the steps involved in manufacturing of IC?
4. What is Twin-tub process? Why it is called so?
5. Explain the various etching processes used in SOI process.
6. How an Inversion layer is formed in MOS transistor?
7. Explain the operation of depletion mode MOS transistor.
8. Sketch the flow chart for VLSI physical design cycle.
9. Sketch the XILINX FPGA architecture.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Choose the suitable layout design style for ASIC IC design.
2. Derive the pull up to pull down ratio required for an NMOs inverter driven by another NMOS inverter.
3. Develop a VHDL program for 8 bit full adder using one bit full adder in behavioral modeling.
Create
1. Design and simulate a full adder circuit using VHDL Programming.
Unit I
Overview of VLSI Design Technology The VLSI design process – Architectural design – Logical design – Physical design –Layout styles – Full custom –
Semi custom approaches. Basic electrical properties of MOS and CMOS circuits - I ds versus Vds relationships –
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
164
Transconductance – Pass transistor – nMOS inverter – Determination of pull up to pull down ratio for an nMOS
inverter – CMOS inverter – MOS transistor circuit model.
Pass transistor
9 Hours
Unit II
VLSI Fabrication Technology
Overview of wafer fabrication – Wafer processing – Oxidation – Patterning – Diffusion – Ion implantation – Deposition – Silicon gate nMOS process – nwell CMOS process– pwell CMOS process – Twintub process – Silicon
on insulator.
Oxidation
9 Hours
Unit III
MOS and CMOS Circuit Design Process
MOS layers – Stick diagrams – nMOS design style – CMOS design style – Design rules and layout – Lambda
based design rules – Contact cuts – Double metal MOS process rules – CMOS lambda based design rules – Sheet
1. E. Eshranghian, D. A. Pucknell and S. Eshraghian, Essentials of VLSI circuits and systems, PHI, New
Delhi, 2005
Reference(s)
1. Charles H.Roth, Fundamentals of Logic Design, Jaico Publishing House, Sixth edition 2009
2. N. H. Weste , Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Pearson Education, India, 2010
3. Eugene D.Fabricius, Introduction to VLSI Design, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990
4. Zainalatsedin Navabi, VHDL Analysis and Modelling of Digital Systems, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998
5. Douglas Perry, VHDL Programming by example, Tata McGraw Hill, Sixth reprint 2008
11N604 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To study the various components within an embedded system and their interactions
To study the techniques of interfacing between processors & peripheral device related to embedded system
To enable writing of efficient programs on any dedicated processor
To know about the basic concepts of systems programming like operating system, assembler, compliers etc
and to understand the management task needed for developing embedded system
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
165
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Summarize the concept of Embedded Systems and Memory Organization
2. Analyze the timer, counter devices and buses for device network.
3. Explain about the device drivers and interrupts Servicing Mechanism
4. Design simple embedded system using microcontroller
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Basics of C programming
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
27 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define a system
2. What are the essential structural units in (a) Microprocessor (b) Embedded processor (c) Microcontroller
(d) DSP (e) ASSP (f) ASIP?
3. What do you mean by SOC?
4. Define ROM image.
5. What do you mean by volatile and non-volatile memory?
6. What is the purpose of program counter?
7. What is the significance of DMA?
8. Distinguish between EEPROM and Flash memory. 9. Define bus.
10. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of data transfers using serial and parallel ports.
11. What do you mean by plug and play devices?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
166
12. Define context, interrupt latency and interrupt service deadline.
13. What do you mean by assembly language?
14. Classify the instruction set of 8051.
15. Define resolution and conversion time in ADC.
16. What are all the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
Understand
1. Draw the components of embedded system hardware.
2. Explain the classification of embedded systems.
3. What are the conditions should be considered in selecting a processor for an embedded system?
4. Explain three stage pipeline and superscalar processing.
5. Draw the I/O port diagram.
6. Explain the need of software timers.
7. Draw the interrupt structure of 8051. 8. Draw the architecture of 8051.
9. What are all the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
10. How to code the program and test the program?
11. How to code the program and test the program?
12. Mention the characteristics that are taken into account when interfacing a device port.
13. Draw the ten ways by which the synchronous signals with the clocking information transmit from a master
device to slave device.
14. Draw the signals, clock-inputs, control bits and status flags at registers or memory in a hardware timer
device.
Apply
1. Write a program to perform the digital to analog conversion with square waveform using 8051. 2. Generate a square wave to perform timer operation using 8051.
3. Application areas of embedded systems are telecom, missiles and satellites, computer networking, digital
consumer electronics, automotive and smart cards.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. What are the techniques of power and energy management in a system?
2. What is the role of processor reset and system reset?
3. How are the queues used for a network?
4. How do you use the vector address for an interrupt source?
5. How much shall be reduction in power dissipation for a processor CMOS circuit when voltage reduces
from 5V to 1.8V operation?
6. How do you initialize and configure a device? 7. How do you assign service priority to the multiple device drivers of a system?
Create
1. Design an embedded system for an adaptive cruise control system in a car.
2. Design an embedded system for a smart card and automatic chocolate vending machine.
3. Design the hardware and software for pre-settable alarm system.
4. Design microcontroller system to control traffic signals.
5. Design a 4 seven segment LED display using 8051.
Unit I
Introduction to Embedded Systems
Embedded System - Processor in the System - Hardware Units - Software Embedded into a System – Exemplary
Embedded Systems - Embedded System-On-Chip (SOC) and in VLSI Circuit.
Exemplary Embedded Systems
9 Hours
Unit II
Processor and Memory Organization
Structural Units in a Processor Selection for an Embedded System - Memory Devices - Memory Selection for an
Embedded System - Allocation of Memory to Program Segments and Blocks - Memory Map of a System - Direct
Memory Access - Interfacing Processor - Memories and I/O Devices.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
167
Direct Memory Access
9 Hours
Unit III
Devices and Buses for Device Network
I/O Devices - Timer and Counting Devices - Serial Communication Using the I2C, CAN - Advanced I/O Buses
between the Networked Multiple Devices - Host System or Computer Parallel Communication between the
Networked I/O - Multiple Devices Using the ISA, PCI, PCI-X and Advanced Buses.
Serial communication using the I2C
9 Hours
Unit IV
Device Drivers and Interrupts Servicing Mechanism
Device Drivers - Parallel Port Device Drivers in a System - Serial Port Device Drivers in a System - Device Drivers
for Internal Programmable Timing Devices - Context and the Periods for Context-Switching - Deadline and
Interrupt Latency.
Deadline and Interrupt Latency
9 Hours
Unit V
Embedded System Design using Microcontrollers
Intel's series of micro-controllers - Design case study using 8051, A/D converters and other peripherals devices-
Applications (Biometrics, RFID).
Instruction set
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New
Delhi, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. David E Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Addison Wesley Publishing Co, New Delhi, 2003
2. Michael predko, MykePredho, PICmicro Micro controller Pocket Reference, McGraw Hill book Co, New
Delhi, 2003
3. John B Peatman, Design with PIC Micro controllers, Prentice Hall of India book Co, New Delhi, 2012
4. Muhammad Ali Mazidietal, 8051 Micro controller and Embedded System, Pearson Education, New Delhi,
2003
5. Jonathan W. Valvano, Embedded Microcomputer Systems, Real Time Interfacing, Brooks cole, 2004
11N605 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on different methods of power generation
To provide clear view of the various measurements involved in power generation plants
To understand about the Piping and Instrumentation (P&I) diagram
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
168
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Explain the basics of power generation and measurements used in a power plant.
2. Analyze various control schemes used in boilers.
3. Investigate turbine control process.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
Basic knowledge of Transducer Engineering
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
28 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define cogeneration.
2. List out the advantages of hydro power plant.
3. List out the advantages of thermal power plant.
4. Name the various method of power generation.
5. What is meant by pulversing of coal?
6. Draw the block diagram of thermal power plant.
7. State Chain reactions.
8. Define fission process.
9. Recall the types of boilers.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
169
10. Define piping and instrumentation diagram.
11. List the types of Radiation detector.
12. Name the different types of level sensing device.
13. Define turbine.
14. Define electrical precipitators.
15. List the types of pre-heating methods.
16. List out the parameter to be measured in deaerator control.
17. Define vibration displacement.
18. Identify the purpose of the reservoir?
Understand
1. Represent the pressure transmitting line using P&I diagram.
2. Show why float type level measurement is not suitable for boiler drum level measurement?
3. Explain the operation of ionization smoke detectors.
4. Elucidate the essential of vibration measurement in turbine control.
5. Give the requirements of sustain fission process.
6. Elucidate the properties of a good moderator.
7. Explain the purpose of control rods.
8. Discuss how to determine the actual speed in a stroboscope?
9. Extend the purpose of mechanical type vibration instruments .
10. Tell the need of long retractable soot blowers. 11. Indicate where we use the electrical precipitators?
12. Estimate how the pollution from power plant is reduced.
13. Illustrate the purpose of cooling system used in a power plant.
14. Differentiate between Solar and Wind Power generation schemes.
15. Compare steam turbine and gas turbine.
16. Indicate the device used for current and voltage measurement in power plant.
17. Select the different parameters for failure analysis in power plant.
Apply
1. A 60MW turbo generator set has an overall efficiency of 25%. The calorific value of a coal used is 24
MJ/Kg. Calculate the consumption of coal per kWh and also per day if the load factor is 30%.
2. A stage of an impulse turbine operates close to the maximum blading efficiency. The blades are equiangular; the friction effects in blades may be neglected. The mean blade velocity is 200 m/s and the
steam flow rate is 0.75kg/s. Compute the discharge angle at which the steam leaves the blade and the
diagram power.
3. A nuclear power plant is operated continually for one year producing 500MW. The reactor contained
75 tonnes of 3% enriched uranium dioxide fuel. Assuming the power plant efficiency to be 33%
calculate the mass of U-235 consumed in kg.
4. A condenser for a steam power plant receivers 185 t/h of steam 40 deg Celsius, 92% quality. cooling water
enters 33 deg Celsius and leaves 37 deg Celsius. The condensate leaves at 39 deg Celsius. The pressure
inside the condenser is found to be 0.077 bar. Calculate the cooling water flow required in m3/s.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Distinguish the function of thermal, nuclear and hydro power plant. 2. Compare the different types of boilers.
3. Differentiate between steam turbine and gas turbine.
4. Compare two element and three element drum level control.
Create
1. A steam power plant, operating with one regenerative feed water heating is run at the initial steam
conditions of 35.0 bar and 440°C with exhaust pressure of 0.040 bar. Steam is bled from the turbine for
feed water heating at a pressure of 1.226 bar. Generate (1) Specific heat consumption (2) Thermal
efficiency of the cycle (3) Economy percentage compared with the cycle of a simple condensing power
plant.
Unit I
Overview of power generation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
170
Survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power – importance of
instrumentation in power generation – thermal power plant – building blocks – combined cycle system – combined
heat and power system – sub critical and supercritical boilers
Importance of instrumentation in power generation
9 Hours
Unit II
Measurements in power plants
Measurement of feed water flow, air flow, steam flow and coal flow – drum level measurement – steam pressure and
temperature measurement – turbine speed and vibration measurement – flue gas analyzer – fuel composition analyzer
Radiation detector
9 Hours
Unit III
Boiler control – I
Combustion of fuel and excess air – firing rate demand – steam temperature control – control of deaerator – drum
level control – single, two and three element control – furnace draft control – implosion – flue gas dew point control
– trimming of combustion air – soot blowing
Soot blowing
9 Hours
Unit IV
Boiler control – II
Burners for liquid and solid fuels – burner management – furnace safety interlocks – coal pulverizer control –
combustion control for liquid and solid fuel fired boilers – air/fuel ratio control – fluidized bed boiler – cyclone
furnace
Air/fuel ratio control
9 Hours
Unit V
Control of turbine
Types of steam turbines – impulse and reaction turbines – compounding – turbine governing system – speed and
load control – transient speed rise – free governor mode operation – automatic load frequency control – turbine oil
system – oil pressure drop relay – oil cooling system – turbine run up system – Case study.
Generation station computer
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Sam Dukelow, Control of Boilers, Instrument Society of America, 2001
2. Krishnaswamy.K and Ponnibala.M., Power Plant Instrumentation, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,
2011
Reference(s)
1. Liptak B.G., Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, 2005
2. Jain R.K., Mechanical and Industrial Measurements,Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2008
11N607 VLSI AND EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To design and simulate the various types of combinational and sequential circuits
To design and simulate microcontroller based projects
To study the simulation and synthesis tools.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
171
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Develop the models of digital circuits and simulate them for various operational requirements.
2. Implement the peripherals using 8051 micro controller.
3. Design a simple embedded system application.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of VLSI deisgn
Basic knowledge of Embedded system
Basic knowledge of C programming
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define Combinational Circuit.
2. Define Sequential Circuit.
3. What is a data selector?
4. What is half adder?
5. What is meant by HDL?
6. What are the classifications of sequential circuits?
7. Define Counters.
8. What are the different types of flip-flops?
9. Define Shift Register. 10. What are the types of shift registers?
11. What are the types of shift registers?
12. What is the difference between CISC and RISC?
13. Distinguish between microprocessor and microcontroller.
14. List out the interrupts of 8051 microcontroller.
15. Explain the function of the PSEN pin of 8051.
16. What are the control and I/O instructions used in 8051?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
172
17. List out the advantages and disadvantages of interrupt driven data transfer.
18. Draw the interrupt structure of 8051.
Understand
1. Compare Combinational Logic circuit and Sequential logic circuit.
2. What is the difference between Flip-flop and latch?
3. What is the sum and carry equation of a full adder circuit?
4. Why D Flip-flop is called as transparent latch?
5. Why SR Flip-flop is not used for the design of shift registers?
6. Write the VHDL code for Half Subtractor.
7. What is the use of simulation?
8. What are the differences between synchronous sequential circuit and asynchronous sequential circuit?
9. Why is the Program Counter connected to the data bus?
10. Differentiate assembly language and C language.
11. What are the basic concepts involved in memory interfacing?
12. What are the characteristics that are taken into account when interfacing a device port?
13. How will you configure SCON register of 8051 microcontroller?
14. How do you select the register bank in 8051 micro-controller?
15. Can an input port and an output port have the same port address? Justify.
16. How will you configure TCON register of 8051 microcontroller?
17. Explain the memory structure of 8051 Micro-controller.
18. How will you configure IE register of 8051 microcontroller?
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. How IF, CASE, and LOOP statements can be used to control the flow?
2. How process statements are concurrent statements that delineate areas of sequential statements?
3. How signal assignments are the most basic form of behavioral Modeling?
4. How ASSERTION statements can be used to check for error conditions or report information to the user?
5. How subtypes can add constraints to a type?
6. How packages are used to encapsulate information that is to be shared among multiple design units?
7. What is the necessity for providing 4 banks of general purpose registers R0 to R7 in 8051? How can you
switch over to bank1 from bank0?
8. How will you interface a microcontroller with a given peripheral device?
9. With XTAL = 11.0592 MHz, what value should be loaded into TH1 to have 9600 baud rate?
10. How will you interface an 8- bit ADC with 8051 Micro-controller?
11. How is stack implemented in 8051? 12. How will you interface a 16 X 2 LCD Display using 8051 Micro-controller?
Create
1. Design of CPU.
2. Interface 8051 microcontroller with 6264 RAM.
3. Interface 8051 microcontroller with various peripheral devices.
4. Design a real time clock using 8051 Microcontroller.
List of Experiments
1. Design and simulation of Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor and Full subtractor.
2. Design and Implementation of Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Encoder and Decoder.
3. Design and simulation of Flip-Flop circuits.
4. Design and simulation of counters and shift registers.
5. Design of traffic light controller
6. Simulation of LED interfacing with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler. (For multiple LEDs use delay program)
7. Implementation of LCD display with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
173
8. Implementation of polled waiting loops in 8051.
9. Implementation of interrupt handling in 8051.
10. Design of annunciator using microcontroller.
Mini project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Design and simulation of Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor and Full subtractor 6
2 Design and Implementation of Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Encoder and Decoder 6
3 Design and simulation of Flip-Flop circuits 3
4 Design and simulation of counters and shift registers 6
5 Design of traffic controller 3
6 Simulation of LED interfacing with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler (For multiple LEDs use
delay program) 9
7 Implementation of LCD display with 8051 using Keil CX51 compiler 3
8 Implementation of polled waiting loops in 8051 3
9 Implementation of interrupt handling in 8051 3
10 Design of annunciator using microcontroller 3
11 Mini project ---
11N608 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To get adequate knowledge and expertise for handling field instruments
To understand, analyze and design various measurement schemes that meets the desired specifications and
requirements
To acquire knowledge about the principles of humidity, viscosity and pH measurements
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
174
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
1. Measure physical quantities like level, flow, temperature, viscosity, pH and conductivity by selecting suitable sensing element.
2. Design the circuits to interface, interpret and analyze the measured value for displaying or controlling the
physical variables
Prerequisite(s)
Baisc knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
Basic knowledge of Transducer engineering
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. Define flow meters.
2. Define calibration.
3. List out the types of calibration.
4. Define torque.
5. List out the sources used in UV-visible spectrometer. 6. Define viscosity.
7. State the importance of conductivity of the solution.
8. Define pH.
9. Define humidity.
10. State the basic principle of Hygrometer.
11. What is Psychrometer.
12. Define pH.
13. Define fluidity.
Understand
1. Judge the importance Venturi tube in flow measurement.
2. Tell about is meant by discharge coefficient.
3. Discuss about the term consistency.
4. Classify the mass flow meters.
5. Select the governing equation for the viscosity measurements.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
175
6. Predict the need for calibration.
7. Indicate the need for pH measurement in industries.
8. Express the different units used for pressure measurements.
9. Indicate different units of viscosity used in industries.
10. Judge the different methods used for thermocouple linearization.
Apply / Analyze / Evaluate
1. Produce the steps to calibrate pressure measuring devices using dead weight tester.
2. Identify a sensor to measure the torque and explain the measurement process.
3. Differentiate between open and closed tank level measurement. 4. Point out the method to infer the radiation from an object.
5. Judge the importance of pressure measurements in industry.
6. Discover the principle of thermocouple.
7. Analyze the procedure to convert pressure into current.
Create
1. Construct a circuit diagram to connect field instruments to controller via a data acquisition system and an
ammeter.
List of Experiments
Measurement of flow rate using Orifice meter, Venturi meter and mass flow meters
Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight tester.
Torque and viscosity measurement.
Interfacing of field instruments with controller.
Measurement of humidity and vacuum.
Level measurement using DPT (open tank and closed tank with density correction) & non contact sensor.
UV – Visible spectrophotometer
pH measurement and conductivity measurement.
Design of cold Junction compensation circuit of Thermocouple.
Thermocouple Linearization.
Mini Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
S. No. Experiment Hours
1 Measurement of flow rate using Orifice meter, Venturi meter and mass flow meters 9
2 Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight tester 3
3 Torque and viscosity measurement 6
4 Interfacing of field instruments with controller 3
5 Measurement of humidity and vacuum 3
6 Level measurement using DPT (open tank and closed tank with density correction) &
non contact sensor 6
7 UV–Visible spectrophotometer 3
8 pH measurement and conductivity measurement 3
9 Design of cold Junction compensation circuit of Thermocouple 6
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
176
10 Thermocouple Linearization 3
11 Mini project ---
11N609 TECHNICAL SEMINAR II
0 0 0 1.0
Programme Outcome
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcomes
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Communicate effectively. 2. Prepare and present technical contents.
3. Interact technically in an open forum.
11O701 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS (Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
To understand the basics of Micro and Macro Economics.
To understand the methods by which Demand Forecasting, Cost Analysis, Pricing and Financial
Accounting are done in the Industry.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
177
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Summarize the various kinds of organizations and its legal rights and responsibilities
2. Analyze the relationship between demand, supply, production cost and pricing.
3. Compare the role of micro and macro economics.
Assessment pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
29 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Economics
2. Define Managerial Economics 3. What are the branches of Economics?
4. What are the two methodologies used for Investigation in Economics?
5. Name the other disciplines which are linked to Managerial Economics.
6. List the theories that explain the basic objectives of a firm.
7. What are the basic concepts in Decision making?
8. What are the types of decisions a manager is expected to make?
9. What are the techniques used in the process of decision making?
10. What is opportunity cost?
11. What is Demand?
12. What are the types of Demand?
13. What are the variations in the nature of Demand? 14. State the law of Demand.
15. What are the factors determining Demand?
16. Define Elasticity of Demand.
17. State the different degrees of elasticity of Demand?
18. What are the factors determining Elasticity of Demand?
19. State the Law Of Diminishing Marginal Utility.
20. What is Consumer Equilibrium?
21. List the factors effecting Demand Forecasting.
22. What methods will you use for forecasting demand for a new product?
23. Define Cost.
24. What is a semi variable cost?
25. What are fixed costs? 26. Define Short Run and Long Run costs.
27. Define Optimum Size of a Firm.
28. Define Replacement Cost and Historic Cost.
29. What is a Monopoly?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
178
30. What is an Oligopoly?
31. What is Price Discrimination?
32. What are the reasons for Price Discrimination?
Understand
1. Explain the nature and scope of Economics.
2. Differentiate between Macro and Micro economics
3. List and explain the focus areas of Managerial economics.
4. Give reasons why Mangers aim to Maximize Sales even at the cost of a lower profit.
5. Explain the steps in the decision making process. 6. Differentiate between Mechanistic and Analytical Decision making with examples.
7. Explain Giffens Paradox.
8. Explain with examples, exceptions to the Law of Demand.
9. Explain the nature of Demand.
10. Differentiate between Extension and Increase in Demand.
11. What is the significance of Elasticity of Demand?
12. Differentiate between Point and Arc Elasticity of Demand.
13. What are the assumptions made when talking about the Law of Diminishing Marginal Utility?
14. Explain the characteristics of the Indifference Curve with examples.
15. Explain the concepts of consumer‘s equilibrium and consumers‘ surplus with examples.
16. Can Demand Forecasting principles be applied to Services? Substantiate your answer with an example. 17. What is the difference between Accounting Cost and Economic Cost? Explain with an example.
18. Match the following type of question between Cost Concepts and their Basis of Distinction
19. Why is a study of Cost-Output Relationship necessary for a good Manager?
20. How is Incremental cost different from Sunk Cost?
21. Differentiate between Monopoly and Monopolistic Competition.
22. Explain the concept of a Perfect Market and its features.
23. Explain Total Revenue, Average Revenue and Marginal Revenue.
24. Distinguish between Cost and Price.
25. Explain with an appropriate diagram, the mechanism of pricing in a Perfectly Competitive Market.
26. Explain the role of Time in price determination.
27. Under what conditions can a firm charge different prices for the same products?
28. What are the characteristic features of an oligopoly industry ? 29. What causes Oligopoly?
30. Why does a firm need to have a Pricing Policy?
31. Explain the types and features of Cost Based Pricing.
32. Explain the types and features of Demand Based Pricing.
Apply
1. Compare the merits and demerits of the Deductive Method and the Inductive Method of Investigation.
2. Explain decisions based on the degree of certainty of the outcome with examples.
3. Problems involving Marginal and Incremental Costs.
4. Problems concerning Elasticity of Demand.
5. Problems using statistical methods for Demand Forecasting.
6. Problem – Calculate and plot Average Variable Cost, Average Total Cost, and Marginal Cost and find the optimal production volume.
7. Give examples of products falling under the various kinds of Competition, and the reasons they are able to
survive n the market.
8. Give six examples of products that fall under Monopolistic Competitive pricing.
9. Give six examples of products that fall under Oligopolistic pricing.
10. Pick any six Consumer Items and based on your knowledge of the markets, explain the pricing method that
ou think is most likely to have been followed for each of these items.
11. Compare the types of information that one can derive from a Balance Sheet and a P&L Statement.
Analyze
1. ―The per-capita income of farmers in the country has to be raised by 20% this year to prevent their
migration to cities‖. Analyze this statement from the point of view of Positive and Normative Economics.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
179
2. Decision making improves with age and experience. Discuss.
3. Do a survey of the automotive (only cars) industry and analyze the reasons and timing for discounts offered
from the point of view of elasticity of demand.
4. What are the methods you would adopt to forecast demand for an industrial product? Assuming that the
actual demand versus forecast is very high, what would the most likely reason be for failure of the forecast?
5. ―Most of the cost concepts are overlapping and repetitive‖. Yes or No? Substantiate your answer with
reasons.
6. How would you modify a sealed bid pricing system to take care of different technical approaches by
different bidders for a project for which bids are called for, given that the cost varies depending on the technical approach?
7. What are the steps you would take to control inflation?
Create
1. Create a matrix consolidating the definitions of the word ―Economics‖ as defined by the leading
Economists in the prescribed textbook. Using this define economics the way you understand it, in less than
50 words.
2. Study the price of a commodity over a period of one year and explain the possible reasons for the
fluctuations from an economist‘s point of view.
3. You are in a job which is paying you adequately. You are called for an interview for a job that double your
salary. Unfortunately you miss the only train that will take you in time for the interview. How will you
justify the cost of taking a flight considering the cost concepts you have learnt. 4. Due to cancellation of an export order, you are stuck with a huge stock of jeans of international quality.
5. Device a pricing strategy for disposing this stock without incurring a loss, considering that it is a very
competitive market.
6. (Question paper will contain at least 50% marks on numerical problems)
Unit - I
Introduction
Introduction to Economics, Kinds of Economic Systems, Production Possibility Frontier, Opportunity Cost,
Objective of Organizations, Kinds of Organizations, Business Decision Making,
Legal rights and responsibilities of types of Organization
9 Hours
Unit – II
Demand and Supply
Functions of Demand & Supply, Law of Demand and Supply, Elasticity of Demand, Demand Forecasting Methods,
Price Equilibrium
Role of logistics in managing supply and demand
9 Hours
Unit - III
Production and Cost
Production Function, Returns to Scale, Economies & Diseconomies of scale, Fixed Cost, Variable Cost, Average
Costs, Cost Curves, Break Even point, Law of diminishing Marginal Utility
Costing of a product during the stages of its life cycle
9 Hours
Unit - IV
Pricing & Market Structure
Components of Pricing, Methods of Pricing, Return on Investment, Payback Period, Market Structure and Pricing,
Perfect Competition, Monopoly, Oligopoly, Monopolistic, Non price competition, E-commerce.
The secure payment process in e-commerce.
9 Hours
Unit - V
Introduction to Macro Economics & Financial Accounting
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
180
National Income – GDP, Per Capita Income, Inflation, Stagflation, Deflation, Business Cycle, Stabilization
Policies, Direct Taxes, Indirect Taxes, Balance of Payment. Accounting - Terminology, Book Keeping, P&L,
Balance Sheet.
Role of Central Excise and Customs
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Ramachandra Aryasri and V V Ramana Murthy, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting,
TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited , New Delhi, 2006
Reference (s)
1. V L Samuel Paul and G S Gupta, Managerial Economics – Concepts and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1981.
2. N Maheswari, Financial and Management Accounting, Sultan Chand.
3. R Kesavan, C Elanchezhian and T Sunder Selwyn, Engineering Economics and Financial Accounting,
Laxmi Publication (P) Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.
11N702 INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To provide a clear view on Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)
To learn the various methods involved in automatic control and monitoring
To impart knowledge about the power line automation
To familiarize with the communication protocols
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Develop the PLC program for various applications.
2. Identify the necessity of using Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) for complex projects. 3. Explain the basics about DCS and various interfaces used in DCS.
4. Compare the communication protocols.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
181
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Process control
Basic knowledge of Control System
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
30 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10 Total 100 100 100 100
Remember 1. Define PLC.
2. List out the advantages of PLC over relays.
3. Outline the use of Local Control Unit (LCU).
4. Mention the features of DCS.
5. List out the programming languages used in PLC.
6. Give the applications of PLC and DCS.
7. Identify the components involved in PLC.
8. Define HART.
9. Point the features and applications of SCADA.
10. Enlist the different types of timers.
11. Mention the advantages of HART.
12. Recall the edge trigger. 13. List the applications of HART transmitter.
14. Define topology.
15. State the numerical limits for typical timers and counters.
16. What does DCS system consist of?
17. List the advantages of SCADA.
18. What are the rules addressed for operating a communication system?
19. Define protocol.
20. Describe the basic requirements of communication protocol.
Understand
1. Elucidate the trade-offs between relays and PLC for control applications.
2. Explain why a stop button must be normally closed and a start button must be a normally open. 3. Express the following ladder logic and justify what will happen if it is used?
4. Give a concise description of a PLC.
5. Discuss Programming timers and counters.
6. Describe the programming languages used in PLCs.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
182
7. Express the necessity of reset instructions for all timers and counters.
Apply
1. Examine where can be PLC used in the place of relays?
2. In the figure below, will the power for the output on the first rung normally in ON state or OFF state?
Would the output on the second rung normally is ON state or OFF state?
3. Convert the following flow chart to ladder logic.
4. In dangerous processes it is common to use two palm buttons that require a operator to use both hands to
start a process (this keeps hands out of presses, etc.). To develop this there are two inputs that must be
turned on within 0.25s of each other before a machine cycle may begin.
5. If a counter goes below the bottom limit which counter bit will turn on?
6. Explain any two real time applications of DCS and SCADA in detail.
7. PLC is preferred more than DCS, Defend.
8. Demonstrate the bottle filling system using PLC.
9. How are the program control instructions, math instructions and sequencer instructions used to execute
certain functions in PLC and SCADA?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A conveyor is run by switching ON or OFF a motor. We are positioning parts on the conveyor with an
optical detector. When the optical sensor goes on, we want to Wait 1.5 seconds, and then stop the conveyor.
After a delay of 2 seconds the conveyor will start again. We need to use a start and stop button - a light
should be on when the system is active.
2. Formulate the relation between single loop controller and multiloop controller.
3. Distinguish the concept of interoperability and interchangeability.
4. In what way the TCP/IP protocol is differed from other protocols?
5. Differentiate PROFI bus and MOD bus.
6. Compare timers and counters. 7. Distinguish positive and negative edge trigger.
8. Differentiate between DCS and SCADA.
9. Compare the address capability of different protocols.
10. Ladder logic outputs are coils. Justify.
11. Distinguish between PLC and SCADA automation software.
Create
1. Create a simple program that will use one timer to flash a light. The light should be on for 1.0 seconds and
off for 0.5 seconds. Do not include start or stop buttons.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
183
2. Design a digital PID using PLC for temperature process.
3. Invent ladder logic that uses a timer and counter to measure a time of 50 days
Unit I
Programmable Logic Controller
Evolution of PLCs – Components of PLC – Architecture of PLC – Discrete and analog I/O modules –Programming
languages – Ladder diagram – Function block diagram (FBD) – Programming timers andCounters
Math instructions
9 Hours
Unit II
PLC SCADA and its Applications
Instructions in PLC – Program control instructions, math instructions, data manipulation Instructions, sequencer and
shift register instructions – Case studies in PLC. Introduction to SCADA– components of SCADA – block diagram
– features of SCADA
Instruction list
9 Hours
Unit III
Distributed Control System
DCS – Various Architectures – Comparison – Local control unit – Process interfacing issues Communication facilities
9 Hours
Unit IV
Interfaces in DCS
Operator interfaces - Low level and high level operator interfaces – Displays – Engineering interfaces – Low level
and high level engineering interfaces – Factors to be considered in selecting DCS – Case studies in DCS
Displays
9 Hours
Unit V
Communication Protocols
Introduction to communication protocols- TCP/IP protocol- HART communicator protocol – media access protocol- data link control protocol – Wireless communication(Ip56, Ip58) LAN – PROFI bus – Mod bus – CAN bus- field
bus: introduction – general field bus architecture – basic requirements of field bus standard – field bus topology –
interoperability – interchangeability
RS232
9 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. F.D. Petruzella, Programmable Logic Controllers, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, Third edition, 2010
2. Michael P. Lukas, Distributed Control Systems: Their Evaluation and Design, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
1986 3. John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical data communications for instrumentation and
control, Newnes/Elsevier, 2003
Reference(s)
1. K. L.S. Sharma, Overview of Industrial Process Automation, Elsevier, 2011
2. John W Webb and Ronald A Resis, Programmable Logic Controller, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi, 2009
3. Benjamin C Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India,2007
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
184
11N703 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL
3 1 0 3.5
Objective(s)
To get adequate knowledge about enhanced control strategies and enhancements in PID controllers
To understand the concept of computing the future output of a plant based on available data and proposed
control action
To impart knowledge about multi-loop, multivariable, batch control schemes and their control strategies
To familiarize with the issues and controlling methods in workable plant wide control
To get adequate knowledge about stability of digital system and design of digital controllers
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to: 1. Analyze the various advanced control schemes
2. Investigate the need for multi-loop and multivariable control systems
3. Identify the role of batch control and plant wide control
4. Design digital controller for simple systems.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Process control
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
185
Basic knowledge of Control System
Basic knowledge of Mathematics I,II and III
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†31
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create - - - -
Total 100* 100* 100* 100*
*Create type questions cannot be framed with this syllabus.
Remember
1. Define feedback control.
2. List out the conditions for stability of feedback control systems.
3. Recall the functions of selective control.
4. Recognize the override control in virtual instrumentation software. 5. Define fuzzy logic controller.
6. Point the need of adaptive control.
7. List out the cause for anti-reset windup.
8. Draw the block diagram of model predictive control.
9. Define gain scheduling.
10. State the available design techniques for the design of feedback controller.
11. Define model predictive controller.
12. State the difficulties in controlling a MIMO system.
13. Quote the advantage of reference trajectory.
14. State any two methods for enhanced single loop control strategies.
15. List out the four advantages of MPC.
16. Name the parameters to be specified in order to design an MPC system. 17. Define linear regression
18. Point the model predictive control law.
19. Recognize the elements in MPC.
20. Define centralized multivariable control system.
21. State the stability theorem related to multi-loop control system.
22. State the properties of Relative Gain Array(RGA).
23. List out the properties of the state transition matrix of discrete time system.
24. List the strategies for reducing control loop interaction.
25. State the various operating levels of batch control system.
Understand
1. Show the block diagram of feedback control systems. 2. Indicate a flowchart for performing stability analysis of a non-linear process model.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
186
3. Paraphrase problem with anti-reset windup.
4. Judge whether transfer function be derived for a nonlinear system.
5. Infer the strengths and weaknesses of a feedback control system.
6. Illustrate the need for gain scheduling and adaptive control schemes in process control.
7. Extrapolate the need for parameter estimation in a process control.
8. Explain the Objective(s) of model based predictive control.
9. Indicate the significance of eigen values and eigen vectors?
10. Interrelate function between linear regression and least square methods.
11. Summarize the effects of process interaction and loop interaction? 12. Demonstrate the method to calculate relative gain.
13. Interrelate the controlled variable and the manipulated variable in a multi-loop control scheme.
14. Indicate how to identify the subsets of MVs and CVs of a multi-loop system.
15. Paraphrasethe tuning method of two interacting loops separately and retain the stability of the overall
process.
16. Judge why the stability cannot be grounded for the overall control system where both loops are closed.
17. Demonstrate the effects when inputs are coupled to the outputs with negative relative gains.
18. Summarize the benefits of decoupling control scheme.
19. Explain ―Drive and wait‖.
20. Interpret rapid thermal processing.
21. Illustrate the effects of recycle control. 22. Extrapolate how to incorporate the safety in plant and control system design.
23. Illustrate the effects of dead time in a process. How to overcome this?
24. Interpret how to design a digital controller for a given process.
Apply
1. Find the dynamic response of a first order lag system with time constant τp =0.5 and static gain Kp =1 to
(a)a unit impulse input change,(b)a unit step change (c)a sinusoidal input change of sin0.5t. Examine the
behavior of the output after long time (t →infinity) for each of the input changes above.
2. Consider a first order system with τp = 30 sec and Kp =1. Initially, the system is at steady state. Then the
input changes is given linearly with time: m(t)=t. Produce an expression that shows how the output changes
with respect to time for the given input.
3. Judge whether second order system is equivalent to two first order systems in series?
4. Consider a feedback control system with the following transfer functions.
Examine the stability if a proportional controller is used (Gc =Kc ).
5. Consider a process that can be described by the transfer function matrix
Assume that two proportional feedback controllers are to be used so that G c1 =Kc1 and Gc2 =Kc2 .
Calculate the values of Kc1 and Kc2 that result in closed-loop stability for both the 1-1/2-2 and 1-2/2-1
configurations.
6. Consider a process that can be described by the transfer function matrix
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
187
Manipulate the RGA approach to determine the recommended controller pairing based on steady state
consideration. Judge whether dynamic configuration suggest the same pairing?
7. Examine the interaction among the loops of a distillation column.
8. A 2x2 process has the steady state gain matrix
Calculate determinant, RGA, eigen values and singular values of K. Use K12 = 0 as the base case; then
recalculate the matrix properties for a small change, K12 = 0.1sec
9. Examinea continuous time transfer function
Convert the continuous time model into discrete time model (Assume N=1, T=0.4).
10. Judge whether given system is stable. Sampled data control systems represented by the following
characteristic equation using Jury‘s stability test6Z2-2Z+1=0
Analyze/Evaluate
1. Consider the level control system implemented with a computer whose inputs and outputs are calibrated in
terms of full range (100%). The tank is 1 m in diameter and the valve on the exit line act as a linear
resistance with R= 6.37min/m2. The level transmitter has a span of 0.5 m and an output range of 0 to
100%. The flow characteristic of the equal percentage control valve is related to the fraction of lift by
the relation f =1)30(
. The air-to-open valve receives a 3 to 15 psi signal from an I/P converter, which in
turn, receives a 0 to 100% signal from the computer implemented proportional controller. When the
control valve is fully open ( =1), the flow rate through the valve is 0.2 m3/min. At the nominal operating
condition, the control valve is half open ( =0.5). Detect the closed-loop response to a unit step change in the set point for three values of the controller gain: Kc=1, 2 and 5.
2. Consider a feedback control system with the following transfer functions Gc=Kc, . Judge whether the
closed-loop system produces unstable response if
1s
1G
15s
1GG
12s
1G mdpv
controller gain Kc is too large.
3. Flow control loops are usually fast compared to other loops, and so they can be considered to be at steady
state (essentially). In this case, Integral control is recommended. Judge whether for Gd= Gp=Kp, the integral
control provides satisfactory control for both set point change and disturbance. 4. Why do we claim that there are a large number of control configurations for a MIMO process? Determine
the number of alternative control loop configuration for a process with N controlled variables and M
manipulations, where M>N.
5. A process has a transfer function matrix
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
188
110s
6e
112s
3e
18s
2e
14s
5e
)(3s-3s-
-4s-5s
sGp
Develop expressions for the ideal de-couplers and indicate how they can be simplified based on
practical considerations.
6. Consider a process that consists of a liquid chemical tank with two level indicators, a heater, inlet pump,
outlet pump and two valves. Assume that we want to perform the following sequence of operations: a) Start the sequence by pressing a button S
b) Fill the tank with a liquid by opening valve V1 and turning ON the pump P1 until the upper level L1 is
reached.
c) Heat the liquid until the temperature is greater than TH. The heating can start as soon as the liquid level
above the lower limits L0.
d) Empty the liquid by opening valve V2 and turning ON pump P2 until the lower level L0 is reached.
e) Close the valves and go to step (a) and wait for a new sequence to start.
Develop information flow diagram, sequence function chart and ladder diagram for above sequence
process
7. Illustrate how to design a digital controller for any given process.
Unit I
Introduction
Brief review of dynamic behaviour of processes, single-loop feedback control systems, stability analysis and design
offeedback control systems – Enhanced single loop control strategies – selective control/override systems, nonlinear
control systems, adaptive control systems – PID enhancements: anti-reset windup, auto-tuning, gain scheduling and
self tuning
Time delay compensation
9 Hours
Unit II
Model based control systems
Parameter estimation using linear regression and least squares – state space and transfer function representations andtheir inter relationships – Internal model control preliminaries and model predictive control – model
predictive control elements and algorithms – commercial model predictive control schemes – case study: distillation
column control.
Prediction for SISO models
9 Hours
Unit III
Multi-loop and Multivariable Control Systems
Process interaction and control loop interaction, pairing of controlled and manipulated variables – selection of
manipulated variables and controlled variables – tuning of multi-loop PID control systems – decoupling and
multivariable control strategies – strategy for reducing control loop interaction – centralized MVC systems. Case
study: control of mixing tank using multivariable control concept.
Singular value analysis
9 Hours
Unit IV
Batch Control and Plant wide control
Batch control systems: control during the batch – run-to-run control – batch scheduling and hierarchy. Plant
widecontrol issues – steady state and dynamic effects of recycle –control and optimization hierarchy – plant wide
control examples: MPN and HDA process – interaction of plant design and control system design. case study: HDA
process (Toluene hydrodealkylation process)
Sequential and logic control
9 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
189
Unit V
Digital Controllers
State space representation of discrete data systems – modified z-transform - stability of discrete data system – Jury‘s
stability test – digital PID – position and velocity form – Deadbeat algorithm – Dahlin‘s algorithm – Kalman‘s
algorithm – pole placement controller – dead time compensation – Smith predictor algorithm.
Canonical form for discrete time system
9 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s) 1. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, Process Dynamics and Control, John Wiley
&sons, 2010
2. B. Wayne Bequette, Process Control: modelling, Design, and simulation, PHI learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi,2008
3. E. F. Camacho, C. Bordons, Eduardo F. Camacho,Model Predictive Control in the Process Industry,
Springer, 2007
Reference(s)
1. M. Chidambaram, Computer Control of Processes, Narosa publishing house, 2010
2. Thomas E. Marlin, Marlin Thomas, Process Control: Designing Processes And Control Systems for
DynamicPerformance, McGraw Hill Publication, 2000
3. LennartLjung, Ellen J. Ljung, System Identification: Theory for the user, Prentice Hall, 1999 4. Pradeep B. Deshpande, Raymond H. Ash, Computer Process Control With Advanced Control Applications,
Instrument Society of America, 1988
5. Ray Ogunnaike, Babatunde A. Ogunnaike, W. Harmon Ray, Process Dynamics, Modeling, And Control,
Oxford University Press, 1994
11N704 BIO MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To gain adequate knowledge on human physiology and working of bio potential electrodes
To understand the role of instrumentation in bio medical engineering field
To get ample knowledge on ECG, EEG, EMG and ERG
To analyze parameters of medical imaging and its measurements
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Course outcomes(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Analyze about human physiology and bio potential electrodes.
2. Compare the electro – physiological, blood flow and non – electrical parameter measurements
3. Interpret the concepts of medical imaging, blood cell counting, assisting and therapeutic devices.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of biology taught in higher secondary school
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
190
Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
32 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define cell structure.
2. Define depolarization of a cell.
3. State a cell.
4. State the principle fluid medium in cell.
5. Describe the bio signal frequency range for various sections of the human body.
6. Define electrode potential.
7. Describe the working of sodium pump.
8. Name the principle ions responsible for action potential. 9. Define electrodes.
10. List the electrodes that have high input impedance.
11. Define micro-electrode and where is it used?
12. Describe about ventricular fibrillation?
13. State the sensitivity rate of ECG.
14. List the characteristics of ECG preamplifier.
15. List out the important parts of an ECG recorder.
16. List the lead configurations used in ECG.
17. State einthoven triangle.
18. Point the frequency range of ECG signals.
19. List the two types of electrodes used for ECG recording. 20. List the ranges of frequency and voltage related to EEG.
21. Describe the salient features of needle electrodes.
22. State EEG.
23. Describe about 10-20 electrode system in EEG.
24. Define EMG.
25. List the clinical uses of EMG instrument.
26. Name the machine that is used to find epilepsy.
27. State why AC magnetic fields are used in electromagnetic blood flow meters.
28. Define cardiac pacemaker.
29. Name the normal pH value of the blood.
30. Define cardiac output.
31. Mention the basic NMR components. 32. Name the use of superconducting magnets in the MRI systems.
33. Name the imaging system having more non-invasive character.
34. Define residual volume.
35. State stroke volume.
36. Define tidal volume.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
191
37. Describe the most abundant negative ions in our body.
Understand
1. Describe the characteristics of resting potential and action potential in the cell.
2. Explain the origin of different heart sounds.
3. Explicate the cardio pulmonary blood circulation system.
4. Explain the depolarization and repolarization of heart muscle with reference to ECG wave form.
5. Describe 10-20 electrode systems used in EEG.
6. Explain the analysis of EEG signal.
7. Describe the recording setup used in EMG. 8. Discuss measurement of blood pressure and possible errors due to trauma or other psychological effects on
the patient.
9. Discuss the principle and working of electromagnetic blood flow meters.
10. Explain the working of X-ray machine.
11. Elucidate the operation of ultrasonic imaging systems.
12. Explain Computer Tomography.
13. Explain the infrared thermo graphic instrumentation with suitable diagram.
14. Discuss shortwave diathermy, microwave diathermy and ultrasonic diathermy.
15. Describe the various medical thermo graphic techniques and their merits and demerits.
Apply
1. The ECG of a patient is being recorded using the three standard frontal plane leads. Judge If the cardiac
vector is oriented at an angle of 45 degrees to Lead I and has a magnitude of 3mV, what are the voltages
seen on Leads I, II and III?
2. A patient has a cardiac output of 4 liters/min, a heart rate of 86 beats per minute and a blood volume of 5
liters. Calculate the stroke volume and the mean circulation time. Calculate When is the mean blood
velocity in the aorta (in feet per second) when the vessel has a diameter of 30mm?
3. In the standard 12-lead ECG recording system, compute how many electrodes are required to be attached to
a human subject for recording any one of the unipolar chest lead signals?
4. Sketch the working of an ECG machine with a neat block diagram.
5. Compute the ultrasonic imaging system (M-mode) with a suitable diagram.
6. Compute the function of ventricular asynchronous pacemaker and ventricular synchronous pacemaker. 7. Classify the body organ having the highest attenuation of ultrasound.
8. Classify the applications of biotelemetry.
9. Classify out the merits of medical thermography.
10. Classify the typical EMG signal range
Analyze / Evaluate
1. By using which type of electrode the hydrogen ion concentration of the blood is easily determined?
2. Distinguish between metallic microelectrode and non-metallic microelectrode.
3. Analyze the different types of heart sounds.
4. For perfect lock, what should be the phase relation between the incoming signal and VCO output signal?
5. On what parameters does the free running frequency of VCO depend on?
6. Outline the various electro surgery techniques used in diathermy unit. 7. Analyze the essentials that a coupling medium like olive oil or special jelly are essential in ultrasonic
imaging system?
8. Justify the following statement: MRI is superior to other imaging systems.
9. A certain patient monitoring unit has an input amplifier with a CMRR of 1, 00,000:1 at 60 Hz. At other
frequencies, CMRR is 1000:1. Do you consider these ratios adequate for the monitoring the ECG? Explain.
10. Point the medical name of low blood pressure.
11. Classify the types of electrodes that are used to record EEG.
Create
1. Design a coronary-care hospital suite. Show the all rooms in a layout plan. Illustrate all your
instrumentation systems by block diagrams.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
192
2. Volume of air expired and inspired during each respiratory cycle varies from 0.5 to 3.9 litres during
exercise, what is this value called and what does it mean?
3. A person has a total lung capacity of 5.95 litres. If the volume of air left in the lungs at the end of maximal
expiration is 1.19 liters, what is his vital capacity?
4. Construct an adder circuit using op-amp to get the output expression as V0 = - (0.1V1+V2+10V3) where V1,
V2 and V3 are the inputs.
5. Construct the patient monitoring system.
6. Explain the CAT scanner.
7. State the nernst equation with an explanation. 8. Construct the biotelemetry system.
9. Explain the importance of counting RBC, WBC and platelets.
10. Elucidate the factors specified in designing a bio-medical instrumentation system.
Unit I
Human Physiology and Bio Potential Electrodes
Cell and their structures – action and resting potential – nervous system: functional organisation of the nervous
system, structure of nervous system, neurons, synapse – transmitters and neural communication – cardiovascular
system– basic components of a biomedical system – different types of electrodes – sensors used in biomedicine –
selection criteria for transducers and electrodes – electrical safety – grounding and isolation
Macro shocks
9 Hours
Unit II
Electro – Physiological and Blood Flow Measurement
ECG – EEG – EMG – ERG – lead system and recording methods – typical waveforms – electromagnetic and
ultrasonic blood flow meters
Recording set up of ECG
9 Hours
Unit III
Non – Electrical Parameter Measurement
Measurement of blood pressure – blood flow cardiac output – cardiac rate – heart sound – measurement of gas
volume – flow rate of CO 2 and O2 in exhaust air – pH of blood – ESR and GSR measurements
pH of blood
9 Hours
Unit IV
Medical Imaging Parameter Measurements and Blood Cell Counting
X- RAY machine – Computer Tomography – Magnetic Resonance Imaging system – ultra sonography –
endoscopy– bio-telemetry – manual and automatic counting of RBC, WBC and platelets
bio-telemetry
9 Hours
Unit V
Assisting and Therapeutic Devices
Cardiac pacemakers – defibrillators - ventilators – muscle stimulators – heart lung machine – dialysers - limb prosthetics – orthotics – elements of audio and visual aids
orthotics
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. R.S.Khandpur, Hand Book of Bio-Medical instrumentation, Tata McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.,
2007
2. J.G. Webster, Medical Instrumentation: Application and Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2010
Reference(s)
1. Leslie Cromwell, Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
193
2. G. Well, Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2011
11N707 DESIGN PROJECT LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To obtain adequate knowledge in design of various signal conditioning circuits, instrumentation systems,
controller and control valve
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to: 1. Implement the Variable frequency drive and HMI for real time process.
2. Design of simple transmitter circuit using sensor/transducers and amplifiers.
3. Calibrate final control elements or transmitter.
4. Perform panel wiring, documentation of instrumentation projects and development of P&I for simple
process.
Prerequisite(s)
Basic knowledge of Process control
Basic knowledge of Sensor and Transducer
Basic knowledge of Industrial Instrumentation
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Internal
Assessment
Semester End
Examination
Preparation 10 15
Observation and Results 15 20
Record 10 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember 1. What is mean by piping and instrumentation diagram?
2. What is holding current in SCR?
3. List out the three types of variable frequency driver.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
194
4. Define control valve sizing.
5. What are the different types of orifice plate?
6. What is the principle operation of Rotameter?
7. Mention the four main parts of the control valve.
8. What is the level of the voltage between the input terminals of an op-amp?
9. List out the ideal characteristics of op-amp.
10. List out the types of controllers.
11. Define RTD.
12. List out the types of active filters. 13. Mention the elements needed for control panel wiring.
Understand
1. When do we need P&I diagram?
2. Why inherent characteristics of control valve should considered while selection of control valve?
3. What are the different ―turn on‖ methods of SCR?
4. What is firing angle?
5. When do we need a controller in a system?
6. Why orifice plate is not preferred for measuring flow of dirty fluids?
7. What is the difference output voltage of any signals applied to the input terminals of an op-amp?
8. Why RTD is named as PT-100?
9. Where do we need active filters? 10. How to read control panel wiring?
11. Why do we need report for an industrial project?
Apply
11. An op-amp has an open-loop gain of 100,000 and a cutoff frequency of 40 Hz. Find the open-loop gain at a
frequency of 30 Hz.
12. An orifice plate flow meter has been selected for a maximum flow rate of 2 500 kg/h. The flow meter has a
published accuracy of ±2% of actual flow. For a flow of 700 kg/h, over what range of flow will accuracy be
maintained?
13. Determine the temperature of the RTD, given a measured voltage of -59.7 millivolts between test points C and D in this circuit. Assume a 100 Ω RTD with α = 0.00392.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare resistance temperature detector and thermocouple.
2. How will you identify the type of op-amp from IC code?
3. Differentiate between normally open type and air to open type control valves?
4. Differentiate the function low pass filter and high pass filter.
Create
1. Design control panel wiring diagram for a heat exchanger process
2. Design an transmitter resistance temperature detector whose temperature range is 0 – 150 degree celcius.
List of Experiments
1. Development of P&I diagram for a heat exchanger process.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
195
2. Testing and calibration of a control valve
3. Implementation of Variable Frequency Drive circuit for motor speed control.
4. Calibration of conductivity transmitter
5. Orifice sizing and Rotameter design using simulation software.
6. Design of instrumentation amplifier.
7. Configuring Human Machine Interface for a given application
8. Control panel design & wiring.
9. Design of RTD based 2wire/4 wire Temperature transmitters.
10. Preparation of documentation of instrumentation project and project scheduling for the above case study.
(Process flow sheet, instrument index sheet and instrument specifications sheet, job scheduling, installation
procedures and safety regulations).
Mini-Project
Total: 45 Hours
Practical Schedule
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Development of P&I diagram for a heat exchanger process 3
2 Testing and calibration of a control valve 6
3 Implementation of Variable Frequency Drive circuit for motor speed control 6
4 Calibration of conductivity transmitter 3
5 Orifice sizing and Rotameter design using simulation software 3
6 Design of instrumentation amplifier 3
7 Configuring Human Machine Interface for a given application 6
8 Control panel design & wiring 3
9 Design of RTD based 2wire/4 wire Temperature transmitters 3
10 Preparation of documentation of instrumentation project and project scheduling for the
above case study. (Process flow sheet, instrument index sheet and instrument
specifications sheet, job scheduling, installation procedures and safety regulations)
6
11 Mini project ---
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
196
11N708 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY
0 0 3 1.5
Objective(s)
To obtain practical knowledge in advanced controllers like Programming Logic Controller (PLC) and
Distributed Control System (DCS)
To get exposure in implementing advance controllers for various analog and digital applications
To design discrete controller for a transfer function model
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Design digital controller for simple systems.
2. Implement PLC/HMI/SCADA based control scheme to real time process
3. Implement DCS based control scheme to real time process
Prerequestie(s)
Basic knowledge of Advanced process control
Basic knowledge of Process control
Assessment Pattern
Bloom’s Taxonomy Internal Semester End
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
197
(New Version) Assessment Examination
Preparation 05 05
Conduct of Experiment 10 10
Observation and Analysis of Results 15 20
Record 05 -
Mini-Project / Model Examination/ Viva-Voce 15 15
Total 50 50
Remember
1. State deadbeat algorithm.
2. State the theoretical properties required for a digital control algorithm.
3. State dahlin algorithm.
4. List out the effects of Proportional-reset controller.
5. Name the features of a digital PID controller.
6. Quote the cause for proportional kick.
7. List out the different types of PID architecture.
8. Define Programmable logic controller.
9. List out the modes of operations in PLC.
10. Define robustness of a digital control algorithm.
11. List out the sequence of operations carried in PLC programming.
12. Point the effects of ON/OFF controller.
13. Identify effects of transportation lag.
14. List out the conditions for drawing the ladder logic.
15. Define DDC.
16. Define single closed loop system.
17. Recall the advantages of Distributed Control System (DCS).
18. Define the Local Control Unit (LCU)?
19. List out the significance of DCS.
20. Label the basic blocks of DCS.
Understand
1. Illustrate how you design a digital controller for a given process.
2. Infer the effects of dead time in a process.
3. Paraphrase the strengths and weaknesses of a feedback control system.
4. Interpolate the method to remove integral windup.
5. Express the need of I/P converter in a control system.
6. Explain why redundancy controller needed in DCS.
7. Illustrate the criteria to choose the PLC for a particular application.
8. Represent the function of engineering interface in PLC.
9. Write the operation of local control unit in PLC.
10. Explain the need for interlock.
11. Summarize the function of redundant communication links in communication network.
12. Explain the cause of ringing effect in process control.
13. Interpret the significance of modified Z transform.
14. Illustrate the methods to calculate the scan time of a PLC.
15. Infer the need for model predictive control for a non linear process.
Apply
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
198
1. Solve the initial and final values of process output for a unit step input change to the given transfer function
(5s+12)/(7s+4) using the initial and final value theorems of Laplace transforms.
2. Discover the gain of PID controller proportional gains (kc) for an integral time constant of τ1=2 for the
given open-loop unstable process gp(s)=3/(-2s+1)..
3. Judge PI controller satisfy the necessary condition for stability of the given with the following transfer
function gp(s)=1/(s-2)(s+1).
4. Feedback control system with the following transfer functions. 1G 1
KG KG m
p
p
pvv
s
.
Examine the stability if a proportional controller is used (Gc=Kc).
5. Compute the ladder diagram for a PLC that will perform each of the following function when a NC push
button is pressed.
i. Switch a pilot light on
ii. De-energise a solenoid
iii. Start a motor running
iv. Sound a horn
6. A PI controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (2s2+3s+4). Examine the stability of the given
system.
7. Consider the following process gp(s) =2.5(-5s+1)/ (10s+1) (2s+1). Identify the process gain to assure
closed-loop stability of this process.
8. Compute a PLC ladder program which converts the measurement of temperature in
i. Fahrenheit to Celsius
ii. Fahrenheit to Celsius
9. Compute a PLC ladder program for an automatic ON/OFF controller with differential gap ± 1% of set
point.
10. A PID controller is used on the second process gp(s) =1/ (8s+4). Examine the stability of the system.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate hybrid system architecture and central computer system architecture.
2. Compare DCS architecture with centralized computer system architecture.
3. Contrast the performance of the P, PI and PID controller for a second order system.
4. Differentiate the function of Series PID and Parallel PID architecture.
Create
1. Design ladder diagram to control level in four tank coupled system
2. Design and implement Interlocks for bottle filling system using DCS
List of Experiments
1. Simulation of second order system with and without dead time using discretization method and Runge-
Kutta method.
2. Control of Elevator and Vending machine for health drink using PLC.
3. Development of Human Machine Interface using any SCADA package.
4. Design of Dead beat / Dahlin algorithms.
5. Level and flow control using PLC.
6. Pressure and flow control using DCS.
7. Creating an analog – open loop & Digital loop using DCS
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
199
8. Feed forward with feedback control for temperature control process.
9. Configuring DCS- System for given application.
10. Creating interlock logic in DCS.
Mini project Total: 45 Hours
PRACTICAL SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Experiment Hours
1 Simulation of second order system with and without dead time using discretization method
and Runge – Kutta method 3
2 Control of Elevator and Vending machine for health drink using PLC 6
3 Development of Human Machine Interface using any SCADA package 6
4 Design of Dead beat / Dahlin algorithms 3
5 Level and flow control using PLC 3
6 Pressure and flow control using DCS. 3
7 Creating an analog – open loop & Digital loop using DCS 6
8 Feed forward with feedback control for temperature control process 3
9 Configuring DCS- System for given application 6
10 Creating interlock logic in DCS 6
11 Mini project ---
11N709 PROJECT WORK I
0 0 0 3.0
Program outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
200
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Analyze real-time problems with industry and faculty for formulating a framework.
2. Apply engineering and management principles to one‘s own project work 3. Perform effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary
settings.
11O801 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS (Common to all branches)
2 0 0 2.0
Objective(s)
To study the basic issues in Professional Ethics.
To appreciate the rights of others and to instill moral, social values and loyalty.
To enable the student in their engineering profession who explore the ethical issues in technological
society.
Program Outcomes (PO’s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
201
practice.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Summarize the basic principle of ethics, effective interpersonal, teamwork and leadership skills
2. Develop confidence for self learning and continuous learning
3. Practice professional ethics
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New version)
Test I†33
Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 30 30 30 30
2 Understand 30 40 40 40
3 Apply 40 30 30 30
4 Analyze/Evaluate - - - -
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember 1. Define Human Values.
2. What are Morals and Values?
3. What do you mean by Civic virtue and Respect for others?
4. Write the various meanings of ―Spirituality‖?
5. List four different types of Virtues.
6. Mention different Human values.
7. What is meant by moral autonomy?
8. Classify the types of inquiry.
9. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas?
10. List the levels of moral development suggested by Kohlberg.
11. What do you understand by self-interest and ethical egoism?
12. What are the steps needed in confronting moral dilemmas? 13. What are the three virtues of religion?.
14. What are the professional responsibilities?
15. What is meant by ―Informed consent‖ when bringing an engineering product to market?
16. What is engineering experimentation?
17. What are the different roles and functions of ―Code of Ethics‖?
18. What are the Limitations of ―Code of Ethics‖?
19. Name some of the engineering societies which published ―codes of ethics‖.
20. What is meant by a disaster?
Understand
1. Which are the practical skills that will help to produce effective independent thought about moral issues?
2. Why does engineering have to be viewed as an experimental process?
†The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
202
3. Why isn‘t engineering possible to follow a random selection in product design?
4. Why is the ―code of ethics‖ important for engineers in their profession?
5. What does the Balanced Outlook on Law stress in directing engineering practice?
6. Are the engineers responsible to educate the public for safe operation of the equipment? How?
7. What kind of responsibility should the engineer have to avoid mistakes that may lead to accident due to the
design of their product?
8. What is the use of knowledge of risk acceptance to engineers?
9. Why is Environmental Ethics so important to create environmental awareness to the general public?
10. Why do the engineers refuse to do war works sometimes?
Apply
1. How does the consideration of engineering as a social experimentation help to keep a sense of autonomous
2. participation is a person‘s work?
3. How does the ―code of ethics‖ provide discipline among the engineers?
4. How would you classify the space shuttle Challenger case accident?
5. How does the manufacturer understand the risk in a product catalog or manual?
6. How does the knowledge of uncertainties in design help the engineers to access the risk of a product?
7. How can the quantifiable losses in social welfare resulting from a fatality be estimated? Give some
examples.
8. How does the engineer act to safeguard the public from risk?
Unit I
Human Values
Morals, Values and Ethics – Integrity – Work Ethic – Service Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for Others – Living
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course outcome(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
204
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Provide solution to engineering problem using engineering tools.
2. Prepare necessary documentation for the project work.
3. Present the technical content about the work carried out.
11O10B BASIC ENGLISH I*34
3 00 3.0
Objective(s)
To offer students the basics of the English Language in a graded manner.
To promote efficiency in English Language by offering extensive opportunities for the development of four
language skills (LSRW) within the classroom.
To give an intense focus on improving and increasing vocabulary.
To improve Spelling and Pronunciation by offering students rigorous practice and exercises.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design
documentation, make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply
these to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Converse in English with more confidence.
Prerequisite(s)
Knowledge of English taught in High School
*Subject to continuous assessment
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
1 Basic words- 12 most used words in
English, usage and pronunciation
Starting a conversation and
talking about what one does
Sentence construction
bolstered by mother
tongue
2 Basic words- 20 oft used words, usage
and pronunciation
Analysing an action plan Creating and presenting
one‘s own action plan
3 Basic words with a focus on spelling Discriminative listening Informal conversation
4 Basic words- 10 oft used words, usage
and pronunciation
Content listening and
Intonation
Reading comprehension
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
205
Unit I
Unit II
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
6 Basic words + greetings to be used at
different times of the day
Formal conversation Intonation to be used in
formal address
7 Last 28 of the 100 most used words Informal conversation
between equals
Reading practice and peer
learning
8 Using the 14 target words to form
bigger words
Informal dialogues using
contracted forms
Guided speaking- talking
to peers using contracted
forms
9 Palindromes, greetings- good luck,
festivals
Placing a word within its
context- culling out meaning
Offering congratulations
10 Tutorial
Unit III
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
11 Homophones Formal and informal methods of self-introduction
Let‘s Talk is a group activity that gives them some important
pointers of speech
12 Homophone partners, matching
words with their meanings
Contracted forms of the –be
verbs, ‗ve and ‗s
Translating English sentences to
Tamil
13 Briefcase words- finding smaller
words from a big word
Formal and informal ways
of introducing others
Team work- speaking activity
involving group work, soft skills
14 Compound words and
pronunciation pointers
Giving personal details
about oneself
Using the lexicon
15 Tutorial
Unit IV
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
16 Proper and common nouns Asking for personal
information and details
Pronunciation pointers- an
informal introduction to
the IPA
17 Pronouns Telephone skills and etiquette Reading aloud and
comprehension
18 Abstract and common nouns Dealing with a wrong number Reading practice and
comprehension
19 Group names of animals, adjectives Taking and leaving messages
on the telephone
Pronunciation pointers
20 Tutorial
Unit V
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
21 Determiners Interrupting a conversation
politely- formal and informal
Pair work reading
comprehension
22 Conjugation of the verb ‗to be‘- positive
and negative forms
Thanking and responding to
thanks
Comprehension questions
that test scanning,
skimming and deep
5 Tutorial
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
206
reading
23 Am/is/are questions Giving instructions and
seeking clarifications
Small group activity that
develops dialogue writing
24 Present continuous tense-form and usage Making inquiries on the
telephone
Finishing sentences with
appropriate verbs
25 Tutorial
Unit VI
Module Vocabulary/ Grammar Skills Sets Skill Sets
26 Words with silent ‗b‘
Present continuous questions
Calling for help in an
emergency
Dialogue writing
27 Words with silent ‗c‘
Simple present tense- form and usage
Making requests and
responding to them politely
Identifying elements of
grammar in text extract
28 Simple present tense- rules Describing people Guided writing
29 Words with silent ‗g‘
Questions in the simple present tense
Describing places Filling in the blanks with
correct markers of tense
30 Tutorial
Total:45 Hours
Resources
1. Basic English Module, L&L Education Resources, Chennai, 2011.
11O10C COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH *35
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To equip students with effective speaking and listening skills in English
To help the students develop speaking skills in Business English
Programme Outcome(s)
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design
documentation, make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply
these to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
1. Develop the fluency and language competence of learners of Business English at the lower intermediate
level.
* Subject to continuous assessment
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
207
Unit I
Grammar and Vocabulary
Vocabulary for describing different company structures and company hierarchy – Practice using wh – questions;
there is / there are, Definitions of Quality, Vocabulary of quality management – Using nouns and adjectives to form
group nouns – Phrases for offering and accepting help and invitations – Telephone terms – Verb tenses – Questions
and responses – Conditionals – Gap Filling Exercises.
9 Hours
Unit II
Listening
Business Presentation – Conversation between old friends; introducing a stranger – A Quality Manager talks about
his work – Conversation between acquaintances – Sales talk at a sports equipment stand – Small talk among
colleagues – A tour of a factory in Italy – Lunch in the factory canteen – A meeting to improve the efficiency of
internal communication – A phone conversation arranging to meet – A credit card salesman talks to the bank – A
conversation between business acquaintances - A management meeting about a recent merger – A conversation
about a town, a country and its people.
9 Hours
Unit III
Speaking
Pronunciation Practice – Describing organizations - A company presentation –– Practicing of conversation starters
and closers with friends and strangers – Practice of simple language and step – by – step procedures to describe
complex ideas – Explaining visual information – The language of increase and decrease applied to graphs and bar
charts - Presenting a work – related graph – Making a telephone call – A sports equipment buyer and a
manufacturer‘s sales representative talk business – Entertaining a visitor in your country – A short marketing
meeting – Negotiating to meet around a busy schedule – Pairs or small groups discuss the implications of problems
at an electronics factory – Finding out all you can about a partner – Chairing and holding meetings – Pairwork on
questions and answers about places and people.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Reading
Signalling the structure of a presentation – introducing, sequencing and concluding a talk - Explaining concepts and
ideas – The pattern of phone call conversations – Giving, getting and checking information – Common Business
phrases – Giving encouragement: phrases for positive feedback; more emphatic adjectives and adverbs – Giving
facts and explaining functions and processes – Asking for and clarifying information – How to state your point,
agree and disagree – Practice of frequency, quantity and number - A short marketing meeting – Suggesting and
agreeing times and places – Phrases for the Chairperson – People at work: their emotions, skills and attitudes.
9 Hours
Unit V
Writing
Making conditions using the present and future conditional Phrases for stalling for time - Common telephone
phrases and responses - Business Communication – Calling for Quotation – Letter asking for Clarification –
Transcoding – Rearranging the sentences – Cloze – Explaining visual information – Explaining concepts and ideas –
Giving, getting and checking information – Business description – Informal negotiations.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jeremy Comfort, Pamela Rogerson, Trish Stott, and Derek Utley, Speaking Effectively – Developing
Speaking Skills for Business English, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2002.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
frequency operation – types of lasers: gas lasers, solid state lasers, liquid lasers and semiconductor lasers
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
221
Gas lasers
9 Hours
Unit IV
Industrial Application of Lasers
Lasers for measurement of distance and length, velocity, acceleration, atmospheric effects, sonic boom, pollutants,
current and voltage – material processing: laser heating, melting, scribing, splicing, welding and trimming of
materials – removal and vaporization – calculation of power requirements of laser for material processing
Removal and vaporization
9 Hours
Unit V
Hologram and Medical Applications
Holography: basic principle, methods – holographic interferometry and application, holography for non-destructive
testing – holographic components – medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue interactive – laser instruments for
surgery, removal of tumors of vocal cards, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynecology and oncology
Holographic components
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. J.M. Senior, Optical Fiber Communication – Principles and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2010
2. John F. Ready, Industrial Applications of Lasers, Academic Press, 2012
Reference(s)
1. G. Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, McGraw Hill, 2010
2. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, Introduction to Opto Electronics, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
3. Donald J. Sterling, Technicians Guide to Fiber Optics, Delmar publisher, 2009
4. M. Arumugam, Optical Fiber Communication and Sensors, Anuradha Agencies, 2010
5. Monte Ross, Laser Applications, McGraw Hill, 2006
6. Mr. Gupta, Fiber Optics Communication, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
11N002 ADVANCED CONTROL ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To generate an optimal knowledge about design of PI, PD and PID controllers and feedback compensators
To familiarize state space system theory and analysis
To provide a solution to state equations and to study various computational algorithms
To understand the nonlinear system and to develop a control scheme
To acquire an excellent knowledge in computer control of systems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
222
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Control Engineering
Basics of Mathematics I,II, III
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Design controller/compensator for simple systems .
Represent simple systems in the form of state equations and provide a solution for them .
Obtain describing functions and analyze the stability of nonlinear system.
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
43 Test II† Model
Examination† Semester End Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 30 30 30 30
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define compensation.
2. Define feedback compensation.
3. State lag compensation.
4. State lead compensation.
5. Describe lag-lead compensation. 6. Define P, PI -controller and its characteristics.
7. State PID-controller and its effect on system performance.
8. List the disadvantage in rate feedback and how it is eliminated.
9. Name the factors to be considered for choosing series or shunt/feedback compensation.
10. List the advantages of state space analysis.
11. Match state and state variable.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
223
12. Identify the state model of nth order system.
13. Define state diagram.
14. State phase variables.
15. Name the drawbacks in transfer function model analysis.
16. List the basic elements used to construct the state diagram.
17. Name the advantages of state space modelling using physical variable.
18. List the advantage and the disadvantage in canonical form of state model.
19. Recall the properties of state transition matrix.
20. Define the characteristic equation of a matrix.
Understand
1. Distinguish between series compensation and feedback compensation.
2. Discuss when lag/lead/lag-lead compensation is employed.
3. Tell the effect of adding a pole to open loop transfer function of a system.
4. Discuss the effect of adding a zero to open loop transfer function of a system.
5. Summarize the effects of PI/PD/PID controllers on system performance.
6. Explain the relation between Φm and ά in lead compensator.
7. Represent the block diagram of state model.
8. Represent the signal flow graph of state model.
9. Distinguish between homogenous and non-homogenous state equation.
10. Illustrate the different methods available for computing eAt . 11. Summarize state transition matrix and explain how it is related to state of a system.
12. Explain the properties of the state transition matrix of discrete time system.
13. Tell how the eigenvectors are calculated, when the eigen values are distinct?
14. Give the steps for computing state transition matrix eAt Cayley-Hamilton theorem.
15. Estimate the transformed canonical state model of a system.
16. Judge how you will find the transformation matrix, Pc for transforming the state model to controllable
canonical form.
17. Express the block diagram of a system with state feedback.
18. Summarize the observable phase variable form of state model.
19. Distinguish between phase plane and describing function methods of analysis.
20. Discuss the limitations of analyzing nonlinear systems by describing function and phase plane methods.
21. Match the describing function of dead zone and saturation nonlinearity. 22. Explain how you will determine the stable and unstable limit cycles using phase portrait.
Apply
1. Examine the dominant pole Sd for unity feedback system having maximum peak overshoot Mp < 12% and
settling time ts < 3 sec for 2% error.
2. Calculate the derivative constant for a given system with Sd = -1.6+j1.2 and G(Sd) = 2.96240-ے,.
3. A discrete time system is described by the difference equation, Y (k+2) +3Y (k+1) +5Y (k) =U (k).
Calculate the transfer function of the system.
4. The state model of a discrete time system is given by X(k+1)=AX(k)+BU(k), Y(k)=CX(k)+DU(k).
Examine its transfer function.
5. The transfer function of a system is given by Y(s)/U(s) =10/ (4sP2P+2s+1).Calculate the differential
equation governing the system. 6. The response of the system is, y = ax+b dx/dt .Compute the system is linear or nonlinear.
7. A system has a non linear element with describing function Kn= (1/X) 45-ے in cascade with,
G(jω) =10 2/jω (1+j0.5ω). Calculate the limit cycle of the system.
8. Explain the architecture of a Distributed Control System (DCS) with a neat sketch and discuss the
functioning of its various parts.
Analyze and Evaluate
1. Outline the steps involved in the design of feedback compensators and PD, PI and PID controllers.
2. Develop the state model in phase variable form and canonical form for a given transfer function.
3. Determine a feedback controller through pole placement for a completely controllable and
observable system.
4. Determine the describing function of saturation nonlinearity, dead zone non linearity, dead zone
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
224
and saturation non- linearity and relay with dead zone and hysteresis.
5. Design the state model of armature controlled DC motor and draw the state diagram.
6. The state model of a system is given by
3
2
1
X
X
X
=
320
032
100
3
2
1
X
X
X
+
0
2
0
[u] and y= [1 0 0]
3
2
1
X
X
X
.
Determine whether the system is completely controllable and observable.
7. Analyze the canonical state model of the system, whose transfer function is
.)4)(3)(2(
)5(2)(
sss
ssT
Create
1. Create the root locus of the system whose open loop transfer function is G(s) =K/[s(s+2) (s+4)]. Find the
value of K so that the damping ratio of the closed loop system is 0.5.
2. Develop the program for the impact of the sensitivity and coordinated movement under a certain direction
creating a sensing and simulation program by impact of sensitivity.
3. Generate a ladder logic program for bottle filling system.
4. Derive the describing function of Dead-Zone and Saturation nonlinearity.
Unit I
Controller Design
System performance and specifications – Feedback compensators – Proportional Derivative (PD), Proportional
Integral (PI) and PID controllers – Characteristics, Design – Manual and automatic tuning-Multi modal approach
Multi modal approach
9 Hours
Unit II
State Space System Theory
Concept of State, state variable and state model – State model of linear system – State space representation using
physical variables, phase variables, canonical variables – Decomposition of transfer functions - Direct decomposition, cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition - Transforming general state model into
canonical model – Derivation of transfer function matrix
State space representation using canonical variables
9 Hours
Unit III
Solution of State Equation
State transition matrix and its properties – Computation using Laplace transform method, canonical transformation
method, Cayley Hamilton method – Controllability and Observability of systems – Pole placement by state feed
back – Observer systems
Properties of State transition matrix
9 Hours
Unit IV
Phase plane analysis & Describing function
Concept of phase analysis - Phase portraits-singular points – Symmetry in phase plane portraits-Constructing Phase
Portraits- Phase plane analysis - isocline method, Delta method-Existence of limit cycles. Describing function
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
225
fundamentals- Definitions-Assumptions-Computing describing functions-Nyquist criterion and its extension-
Existence of limit cycles-Stability of limit cycles.
Existence of limit cycles
9 Hours
Unit V
Lyapunov Stability
Lyapunov direct method, positive definite functions and lyapunov functions, invariant set theorems, lyapunov
analysis of linear time invariant systems, the variable gradient method, performance analysis, existence of Lyapunov
functions. Existence of Lyapunov functions
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. K. Ogata, Modern Control Engineering, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010
1. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi,
2010 2. Richard C. Dorf and Rober H. Bishop, Modern Control Systems, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2010
3. Benjamin C. Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2012
4. Alberto Isidori, Non linear Control systems, Springer Verlag, , 2000
5. J.J.E.Slotine and W.Li Applied, Nonlinear control, Prentice Hall, 1998
6. R. Marino and P. Tomei, Nonlinear control design - Geometric, Adaptive and Robust, Prentice Hall,1995
11N003 OPERATING SYSTEMS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the fundamental concepts of operating systems such as processes, threads, files,
semaphores, etc.,
To know the development of application programs in an operating system environment
To understand the principles of concurrency and synchronization and apply them to write correct
concurrent programs
To understand the basic resource management techniques in an operating system
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
226
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Computer Science
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Explain the basics of operating systems .
Summarize the resource allocation and difficulties in resource allocation by an operating system
Compare with different operating systems
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†44
Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. List the advantages of Multiprogramming.
2. Define shell.
3. Recall Time-sharing systems.
4. List the various disk-scheduling algorithms. 5. Describe swap space resides.
6. Define: Virtual memory.
7. Describe hard disk and mention its purpose.
8. When will page fault occur?
9. Mention the purpose of paging the page tables.
10. State paging.
11. Define IPC.
12. Which phenomenon occurs when the processor spends most of its time in swapping pages, rather than
executing them?
13. List the system calls used for process management.
14. How are devices represented in UNIX?
Understand 1. Differentiate symmetric and asymmetric multiprocessing.
2. Summarize "multi-programming".
3. Explain "online" system.
4. Differentiate between platform and environment.
5. Give an example of an operational environment when the system would have to be both multi-
programming and on-line system.
6. Differentiate paging and swapping.
7. Illustrate Safe State and what is its use in deadlock avoidance?
8. Associate some scheduling algorithms that could result in starvation.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
227
9. Compare and contrast the free space and swap space management.
10. Compare paging with segmentation with respect to the amount of memory required by the address
translation structures in order to convert virtual addresses to physical addresses.
11. Differentiate between user mode and kernel mode.
Apply
1. Suppose that a disk drive has 5000 cylinders, numbered 0 to 4999. The drive is currently serving a request
at cylinder 143, and the previous request was at cylinder 125. The queue of pending requests, in FIFO order
is 86, 1470, 913, 1774, 948, 1509, 1022, 1750, 130. Starting from the current head position, compute the
total distance (in cylinders) that the disk arm moves to satisfy all the pending requests for each of the following disk-scheduling algorithms.
2. Suppose the head of moving-head disk with 200 tracks, numbered 0 to 199 is currently serving a request at
track 143 and has just finished a request at track 125. if the queue of requests is kept in the
3. FIFO order 86, 147, 91, 177, 94, 150, 100, 175, and 130. Compute total head movement to satisfy these
requests for the following disk scheduling algorithms.
4. Under what circumstances do page faults occur? Explain the actions taken by the operating system when a
page fault occurs.
5. Consider a paging system with the page table stored in memory.
a. If a memory reference takes 200 nanoseconds, how long does a paged memory reference take?
b. If we add associative registers, and 75 percent of all page-table Reference(s) are found in the
associative registers, what is the effective memory reference time? (Assume that finding a page- table entry in the associative registers takes zero time, if the entry is there.)
6. Assume we have a demand-paged memory. The page table is held in registers. It takes 8 milliseconds to
service a page fault if an empty page is available or the replaced page is not modified and 20 milliseconds
if the replaced page is modified. Memory access time is 100 nanoseconds. Assume that the page to be
replaced is modified 70 percent of the time. Discover the maximum acceptable page-fault rate for an
effective access time of no more than 200 nanoseconds.
7. Assume that 80 percent of the accesses are in the associative memory and that, of the remaining, 10 percent
(or 2 percent of the total) cause page faults. Examine effective memory access time.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A user program can disturb the normal operations of a system. Analyze.
2. Identify the procedure for memory protection.
3. Sometimes segmentation and paging combined into one scheme. Justify. 4. What problems could occur if a system allowed a file system to be mounted simultaneously at more than
one location?
5. Why must the bit map for file allocation be kept on mass storage rather than in main memory?
6. If a system has 128 MB RAM and 1 GB hard Disk, and a process decides to use its fully allotted Virtual
Memory 2^32 - 2GB = 2 GB, how is it practically possible? But this works in all machines. How?
7. Judge multithreaded solution using multiple user-level threads achieve better performance on a
multiprocessor system than on a single-processor system.
8. A certain computer provides its users with a virtual-memory space of 232 bytes. The computer has 218
bytes of physical memory. The virtual memory is implemented by paging, and the page size is 4096 bytes.
A user process generates the virtual address 11123456. Explain how the system establishes the
corresponding physical location. Distinguish between software and hardware operations.
Create
1. Explain the situation under which the most frequently used page-replacement algorithm generates fewer
page faults than the least recently used page replacement algorithm.
2. Create your own shell that completes the following problem: Ask the user their name, Compare it to your
name and Give a reply.
3. How would you remove a semaphore / shared memory whose owner processes have died?
4. Develop an environment to see the data of a Unix Hard Disk from the Windows OS.
Unit I
Introduction
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
228
Introduction to operating system concepts: multitasking, multiprogramming, multi user and multithreading – types
of operating systems: batch operating system, time-sharing systems, distributed OS, network OS, real time OS –
various operating system service – architecture – system calls
Multithreading
9 Hours
Unit II
Process Management
Process concept – process scheduling – operation on processes – CPU scheduling criteria – scheduling
algorithms: First Come First Serve (FCFS), Shortest Job First (SJF), Priority Scheduling, Round Robin (RR), Multilevel Queue Scheduling
Round Robin Scheduling
9 Hours
Unit III
Memory Management
Logical and physical address space – swapping – contiguous memory allocation – non-contiguous memory
allocation – paging and segmentation techniques – segmentation with paging – virtual memory management –
Demand paging and page replacement Algorithms – Demand Segmentation
Contiguous memory allocation
9 Hours
Unit IV
File Systems, Process Synchronization and Deadlocks
Different types of files and their access methods – directory structure – various allocation methods: disk scheduling
and management and its associated algorithms – Introduction to distributed file system – Critical Section Problems
– Semaphores: methods for handling deadlocks, deadlock prevention, avoidance and detection, deadlock
system call for processes and file systems management – shell interpreter – Windows architecture overview –
windows file systems Performance Issues
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Abraham Silberschatz, Greg Gagne and Peter Galvin, Applied Operating System Concepts, John Wiley &
sons, Singapore, 2003
Reference(s)
1. D. Dhamdhere, Operating Systems – A concept based Approach, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2012 2. William Stallings, Operating Systems, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2009
3. Ruth A. Watson, Introduction to Operating Systems and Networks, prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2008
4. Harvey M. Deltel, Paul J. Deltel, David R. Choffnes, Operating Systems, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2004
5. Jean Bacon and Tim Harris, Operating Systems, Addison Wesley, New Delhi, 2003
6. Mukesh Singhal and Niranjan shivaratri, Advanced concepts in Operating Systems, Tata McGraw Hill,
2011
11N004 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
229
To develop an understanding of electromagnetic-field fundamentals by emphasizing mathematical,
analytical rigidity and physical conceptual reasoning
To analyze engineering systems based on electrostatic fields, steady electric currents and magneto static
fields in arbitrary material media
To apply vector calculus to solve a large variety of static field problems
To study Maxwell‘s equations and use these equations to solve time-varying field problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Engineering physics and physics in higher secondary
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Summarize the fundamentals of Electrostatics and Magnetostatics.
Analyze the concept of Electrodynamic fields.
Apply the concept of electromagnetic theory in electromagnetic waves.
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
45
Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated
for 50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
230
1. Define self inductance.
2. Define mutual inductance.
3. State coulomb‘s law.
4. Define electric field intensity.
5. Define line integral and surface integral.
6. State curl of a vector and its property.
7. List the applications of Gauss law.
8. Identify the significant feature of wave propagation in an imperfect dielectric?
9. Define divergence. 10. State Gauss law for electric fields.
11. State Faraday‘s law.
Understand
1. Indicate the relationship between the unit vector for spherical and Cartesian coordinate system, spherical
and cylindrical coordinate system.
2. Express Laplace equation in cylindrical and in Cartesian coordinate system.
3. Can a static magnetic field exist in a good conductor?
4. Predict when the wave is incident obliquely over dielectric-dielectric boundary?
5. Discuss the methods to be used to eliminate the eddy current losses.
6. Show the expression for potential between two spherical shells.
7. Distinguish between solenoid and toroid. 8. Distinguish between conduction and displacement currents.
Apply
1. Explain reflection by a perfect dielectric when a wave is incident normally on a perfect conductor.
2. Explain Faradays and Lenz‘s law of induction.
3. Compute the relation between field theory and circuit theory for an RLC series circuit.
4. Explain reflection by a perfect dielectric when a wave is incident normally on a perfect dielectric and
derive expression for reflection coefficient.
5. Compute the general Electromagnetic wave equation.
6. Derive all the Maxwell‘s equations.
7. Solve an expression for energy and energy density in a magnetic field.
8. Compute the magnetic boundary relations.
9. Calculate the magnetic flux density at a point Z on the axis of a circular loop of radius ‗a‘ that carries a direct current I.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Point out the situations does we mostly use method of moments. What does the accuracy depend in
evaluating the fields by using the method of moments?
2. Identify the conditions in which the field intensity be solenoidal and irrotational.
3. Analyze the capacitance of a capacitor storing 1J with 500 V applied.
4. Defend hysteresis. Draw the hysteresis loop.
5. Develop the expression for the torque experienced by a current carrying loop, placed in a magnetic field?
6. Four positive charges of 10-9 C each are situated in the XY plane at points (0, 0) (0, 1) (1, 0) and (1, 1).
7. Determine the electric field intensity and potential at (1/2, 1/2).
8. Determine the force per meter length between two long parallel wires A and B separated by 5cm in air and carrying currents of 40A in the same direction.
9. A circular disc of radius ‗a‘ m is charged with a charge density of σ C/m .Point out the electric field
intensity at a point ‗h‘m from the disc along its axis.
10. Given a electric field E = (6y/x2) x + 6/x y + 5 z. Determine the potential difference V AB given A(7,2,1)
and B( 4,1,2)
11. Analyze the forces /length between two long straight parallel conductors carrying a current of 10A in the
same direction. A distance of 0.2m separates the conductors. Also find the force/length when the
conductors carry currents in opposite directions.
12. Two conducting concentric spherical shells with radii a and b are at potentials V 0 and 0 respectively.
13. Determine the capacitance of the capacitor.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
231
14. Determine the magnetic field intensity at a distance ‗h‘ m above an infinite straight wire carrying a steady
current I.
15. Water has much greater dielectric constant than mica. Justify.
Create
1. Formulate at which condition is Gauss's law especially useful in determining the electric field intensity of a
charge distribution?
2. A fixed voltage is applied across a parallel plate capacitor. Does electric flux density depend on the ∈
3. of the medium? Explain. 4. Transform a vector given into cylindrical co–ordinates.
Unit I
Introduction
Sources and effects of electromagnetic fields – vector fields – different co-ordinate systems – divergence theorem –
Stoke‘s theorem
Vector fields
9 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics
Coulomb‘s law – electric field intensity – field due to point and continuous charges – Gauss‘s law and application –
electrical potential – electric field and equipotential plots – electric field in free space, conductors and dielectric –
dielectric polarization – electric field in multiple dielectrics – boundary conditions – Poisson‘s and Laplace‘s
equations – capacitance – energy density – dielectric strength
energy density
9 Hours
Unit III
Magnetostatics
Lorentz law of force, magnetic field intensity – Biot-Savart law - Ampere‘s law – magnetic field due to straight
conductors, circular loop and infinite sheet – magnetic flux density (B) – B in free space, conductor and magnetic
materials – magnetization – magnetic field in multiple media – boundary conditions – scalar and vector potential –
magnetic force – torque – inductance – energy density – magnetic circuits
Torque
9 Hours
Unit IV
Electrodynamic Fields Faraday‘s laws – induced EMF – static and dynamic EMF – Maxwell‘s equations (differential and integral
forms) – displacement current – relation between field theory and circuit theory
Rlation between field theory and circuit theory
9 Hours
Unit V
Electromagnetic Waves
Generation of EM waves – Electro Magnetic Wave equations – wave parameters: velocity, intrinsic impedance,
1. K.A. Gangadhar, Field Theory, Khanna Publishers, 2009
Reference(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
232
1. John D. Kraus, Electromagnetics, McGraw Hill book Co., New York, 2005
2. William H. Hayt, Engineering Electromagnetics, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, New Delhi 2011
3. Joseph A. Edminister, Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics, Schaum Series, Tata McGraw Hill book
Co, New Delhi, 2010
11N005 MECHATRONICS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To know about combination of electronics and mechanical concepts
To know about real time applications in mechatronics
To impart a technical knowledge in stages of designing in mechatronics
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Sensor and Transducer
Basics of Control Engineering
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
Compare the different types of sensors, transducers and actuators.
Obtain mathematical model of simple systems and configure control strategies/controller for them .
Design simple mechatronic systems.
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I†46
Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination 1 Remember 10 10 10 10
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
233
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is Mechatronics? Give four examples.
2. State the applications of servo system.
3. What are the elements present in the Mechatronics? 4. List the advantages of mechatronics design over traditional design.
5. Identify the different mechatronics systems used in automobiles.
6. What is the working principle of an eddy current proximity sensor?
7. What is meant by sensors? Give some examples
8. List out a few electrical actuators.
9. What is open loop and closed loop system?
10. Suggest suitable actuator for robot arm joint and justify
11. List out the basic elements of closed loop system.
12. Differentiate the analogue and digital control systems.
13. What is settling time and rising time?
14. What is the purpose of signal conditioning? 15. List out the process of signal conditioning.
16. Define CMRR.
17. Define sampling theorem.
18. What is meant by aliasing?
19. Draw the R-2R ladder network.
20. Mention the types of analog to digital converter.
21. Describe various elements of measurement system with the help of a block diagram.
22. What is meant by hysteresis error of a transducer?
23. Derive the equation for a translational mechanical system model with spring and mass.
24. What is the difference between instrumentation amplifier and difference amplifier ?
25. What is switch bounce?
26. What is smart sensor? 27. Draw the pin connection of IC 741.
28. Write the function of accumulator register.
29. Draw the block diagram of the pre and post-processing of measurement data
30. Define: transducer.
31. List out the classification of sensors.
32. What is non- inverting amplifier?
33. Define: basic principles of measurements
34. Identify the sensor, signal conditioner and display elements in the Bourdon pressure gauge.
35. List the factors to be considered for the selection of microcontroller.
36. What do you mean by electronic counter?
37. Draw the ladder rungs to represent two switches are normally open and both have to be closed for a motor to operate.
38. Define hydraulics.
39. What is a fluid power system?
40. What is meant by wait state?
41. What is meant by polling?
42. Mention any four statements in problem definition of mechatronics system design.
43. What are the various movements of robots?
44. Define mechatronics and sketch the representation of mechatronics system
45. What are the factors to be considered for selecting solenoids?
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
234
Understand
1. Explain briefly about evolution of Mechatronics
2. Explain the roll of sensors and actuators in a servo system
3. Discuss the Sensors used temperature and current measurement.
4. Explain the concept of digital control with example
5. What is the necessity of information technology in Mechatronics?
6. Explain briefly about advanced approaches in Mechatronics.
7. Explain the different types of encoders.
8. What are the parameters used for selecting displacement and Proximity sensor. 9. Describe the principle and function of CRO with neat sketch.
10. Discuss about applications of Operational amplifiers.
11. Explain the difference between open loop and closed loop system
12. Explain the various types of data display
13. Briefly explain about Resistive transducer and its types.
14. Briefly explain the mechatronics system components.
15. What are the basic elements of a closed loop system? Explain.
16. Explain the use of microcontroller for a house hold application.
17. Write a program to divide 8-bit numbers and to store the result in memory again by Microprocessor using
8085.
18. Discuss the working of microprocessor controlled traffic signal system. 19. Explain the architecture of a PLC and explain about its elements
20. Create a ladder diagram for the following application: A pneumatic system with Double-solenoid
21. valves controls two double acting cylinder A and B. the sequence of cylinder operations are as follows:
cylinder A extends followed by cylinder B extending, then the cylinder B retracts and finally the cycle is
completed by the cylinder a retracting and Explain the logic of the PLC circuit used.
22. Design a pick and place robot using mechatronics elements and explain about the robot control
23. With necessary diagrams, explain the automatic car parking system.
24. Explain the construction and working of tachogenerator.
25. What is the transduction principle and explain at least five effects to which transduction can be attributed.
26. Compare the traditional design and mechatronics design with suitable example.
27. Briefly explain how data handling is carried out in PLC.
28. What is meant by internal relays?
Apply
1. What is the non-linearity error, as a percentage of full range, produced when a 1kΩ potentiometer has a
load of 10kΩ and is at one-third of its maximum displacement?
2. What will be the change in resistance of an electrical resistance strain gauge with a gauge factor of 2.1 and
resistance 50Ω if it is subject to strain of 0.001?
3. A platinum resistance temperature detector has a resistance of 100Ω at 0°C, 138.50Ω at 100°C and
4. 175.83Ω at 200°C. What will be the non-linearity error at 100°C if the detector is assumed to have a linear
relationship between 0 and 200°C?
5. Design an operational amplifier circuit that can be used to produce an output that ranges from 0-5v when
the input goes from 0 to 100mV.
6. An inverting amplifier has an input resistance 0f 2kΩ. Determine the feedback resistance needed to give a voltage gain of 100.
7. Design of summing amplifier circuit that can be used to produce an output that ranges from -1 to -5V When
the input goes from 0 to 100mV.
8. Differential amplifier is to have a voltage gain of 100. What will be the feedback resistance required if the
input resistance are both 1kΩ.
9. What is the resolution of an ADC with a word length of 12 bits and an analogue signal input range of
100V?
10. A sensor gives a maximum analogue output of 5V. What word length is required for an ADC if there is to
be a resolution of 10mV?
11. Design a pneumatic valve circuit to give the sequence A+, followed by B+ and then simultaneously
followed by A- and B-.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
235
Analyze / Evaluate
1. How will you identify the sensor, signal conditioner and display element in the measurement system of
mercury in glass thermometer and a bourdon pressure gauge?
2. How will you calculate common mode rejection ratio of differential amplifier?
3. How will you calculate the resolution of A to D converter?
4. How will you calculate flow rate of stem movement?
5. How will you calculate step angle for hybrid stepper motor?
Create
1. Design a digital thermometer system which will display temperatures between 0 to 99°C. You might like to consider a solution based on the use of a microprocessor with RAM and ROM chip or microcontroller
solution.
2. Design a system involving a PLC for the placing on a conveyor belt of boxes in batches of four.
Unit I
Sensors and Transducers
Introduction to Mechatronics systems – measurement systems – control systems –microprocessor based controllers –
sensors and transducers – performance terminology – sensors for displacement, position and proximity; velocity,
Traditional design of mechatronics systems, basic elements of closed loop system
9 Hours
Unit II
Actuation Systems
Pneumatic and hydraulic systems – directional control valves – rotary actuators mechanical actuation systems –
cams – gear trains – ratchet and pawl – belt and chain drives – bearings. electrical actuation systems – mechanical
switches – solid state switches – solenoids – construction and working principle of dc and ac motors – speed control
of ac and dc drives, stepper motors-switching circuitries for stepper motor – ac & dc servo motors
Servo and proportional control valves, rack- and- pinion and the screw-and-nut systems
9 Hours
Unit III
System Models and Controllers
Building blocks of mechanical, electrical, fluid and thermal systems, rotational –transnational systems,
electromechanical systems – hydraulic – mechanical systems – continuous and discrete process controllers – control mode – two-step mode –proportional mode – derivative mode – integral mode – PID controllers – digital controllers
– velocity control – adaptive control – digital logic control – micro processors control
Mathematical model of electrical, mechanical and thermal systems
To learn hydraulic fluid / Pneumatic air fundamentals including generation and distribution.
To understand working principles, operation of hydraulic and pneumatic components.
To expose to various techniques of circuit building in pneumatics.
Have exposure to diagnose / troubleshoot Hydraulic pneumatic, electropneumatic circuits.
To know about the ladder logic diagram to programmable logic control of fluid power system.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Physics in higher secondary
Basics of Fluid and Solid Mechanics
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
Explain the basic concepts of fluid power theory and fluid conditioning .
Distinguish between hydraulic and Pneumatic System Components .
Design simple hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
237
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
47 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define the term fluid power.
2. Name three basic methods of transmitting power?
3. Define the term mass density. 4. Define the term absolute viscosity and kinematic viscosity.
5. Define surface tension, capillarity.
6. What is oxidation stability?
7. What are fluid power symbols?
8. State Pascal‘s law.
9. State the continuity equation.
10. What are the various energy losses occur when liquid flows through a pipe?
11. What is the function of pump?
12. What do you mean by slip?
13. What is pump cavitation?
14. Define volumetric efficiency.
15. Define Mechanical efficiency. 16. What is overall efficiency of pump?
17. What is the function of hydraulic actuator?
18. What are the types of hydraulic cylinder?
19. What is the function of a Hydraulic motor?
20. Name the basic types of rotary actuators?
21. What is the function of direction control valve?
22. What is check valve? What are its functions?
23. What is pressure control valve?
24. What is flow control valve?
25. What is sequence valve?
26. What is the function of an accumulator? 27. Define the term intensifier ratio.
28. What is the use of pressure switch?
29. List the various types of accumulator.
30. What are limit switches?
31. What do you meant by electrical relay?
32. What is the purpose of a timer?
33. Define pneumatics.
34. State Boyle‘s law, Charles law.
35. What is the function of air filter?
36. What do you mean by FRL unit?
† The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
238
37. What is the function of pneumatic actuator?
38. What do you meant by sequencing of cylinders?
39. What is hydropneumatic circuit?
40. What is servo system?
41. What are servo valves?
42. What is the function of servo amplifier?
43. What is fluidics?
44. State the coanda effect.
45. What is PLC? 46. What are the fluid sensors?
47. What is meant by contact sensing?
48. What do you meant by SRT-Flip flop?
49. List three major units of a PLC.
50. What does the term trouble shooting refer?
51. List four basic requirements on which the life of the fluid power system depend.
Understand
1. What is the fundamental difference between Hydraulics and pneumatics?
2. State the effect of temperature and pressure on viscosity of liquids?
3. What is the difference between the force and pressure? 4. Differentiate between the laminar and turbulent flow?
5. Where the hydrodynamic displacements pumps are employed? Why?
6. Which pump-external gear, internal gear, screw vane and piston –generates the least noise? Why?
7. Why are centrifugal pumps not preferred for fliud power application?
8. Why are double acting cylinders known as differential cylinders?
9. Which hydraulic motor is generally the most efficient? Why?
10. State the difference between the hydraulic motor and hydraulic pump?
11. When do you prefer poppet type hydraulic valves?
12. Distinguish between a pressure control valve and pressure relief valve?
13. Why is pressure measurement considered as a crucial process in the hydraulic system?
14. For what type of application, you would prefer to use pneumatic systems rather than hydraulic system?
15. Why are mufflers used in pneumatic system? 16. Why is extension stroke faster than the retraction stroke in a regenerative circuit?
17. What is the difference between an OR Gate and an EXCLUSIVE –OR Gate?
18. Where the fluidics control system preferred than other control system?
19. If a pump is delivering insufficient oil what are the possible causes and also give remedies for them?
20. What will you do to reduce /prevent excessive heating of oil in a hydraulic system?
Apply/Evaluate
1. To investigate a hydraulic and pneumatic system
Requirements: Two syringes of equal size.
A plastic tube of about 10 cm that will fit tightly over the opening of both syringes.
Draw out the plunger (piston) of one syringe and push in the plunger of the other syringe. Connect the two syringes
by means of the plastic tube.
Push in the plunger of one syringe. Draw that plunger out again.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
239
2.
For the Hydraulic System shown, following data are given:
Pump is adding 5 hp (3730 W) to fluid
Pump flow is 0.001896 m3/s Pipe has 0.0254 m inside dia
Sp. Gravity of oil = 0.9
Kinematic viscosity of oil is 100 CS
Elevation difference between station 1 & 2 is 6.096 m
Pipe lengths: 1 ft = 0.305 m, 4 ft = 1.22 m, 16 ft = 4.88 m
Find pressure available at inlet to hydraulic motor. The pressure at the oil top surface level in the hydraulic tank is
atmospheric (01 MPa).
Create
1. The feed system of a press could be operated either manually or automatically with the following
preconditions.
The press tool should be in position.
The work piece must be clamped.
No part of the operator‘s body should be in the working area.
2. Design a schematic circuit which will operate one spring return cylinder from any one of three identical
valves.
3. Design a schematic circuit that requires the operator to push one of two buttons that in turn shifts a
detented, two position, and four-way valve. The valve is air-piloted in both directions and operates a
double acting cylinder.
4. Design and Assemble an ―Automatic Cam Cycling‖ circuit.
Unit I
Fluid Power Systems and Fundamentals
Introduction to fluid power, Advantages of fluid power, Application of fluid power system. Types of fluid power
systems, Properties of hydraulic fluids – General types of fluids – Fluid power symbols. Basics of Hydraulics-
Applications of Pascals Law- Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynold‘s number – Darcy‘s equation – Losses in pipe,
valves and fittings.
Properties of hydraulic fluids
9 Hours
Unit II
Hydraulic System and Components
Sources of Hydraulic Power: Pumping theory – Pump classification – Gear pump, Vane Pump, piston pump,
construction and working of pumps – pump performance – Variable displacement pumps. Fluid Power Actuators:
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
240
Linear hydraulic actuators – Types of hydraulic cylinders – Single acting, Double acting special cylinders like
tandem, Rodless, Telescopic, Cushioning mechanism, Construction of double acting cylinder, Rotary actuators –
Fluid motors, Gear, Vane and Piston motors.
Pump classification
9 Hours
Unit III
Design of Hydraulic circuits.
Construction of Control Components : Direction control valve – 3/2 way valve – 4/2 way valve – Shuttle valve –
check valve – pressure control valve – pressure reducing valve, sequence valve, Flow control valve – Fixed and adjustable, electrical control solenoid valves, Relays. Accumulators and Intensifiers: Types of accumulators –
Accumulators circuits, sizing of accumulators, Intensifier – Applications of Intensifier – Intensifier circuit.
Applications of Intensifier
9 Hours
Unit IV
Pneumatic System and components
Pneumatic Components: Properties of air – Compressors – Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator Unit – Air control
valves, Quick exhaust valves, and pneumatic actuators. Fluid Power Circuit Design, Speed control circuits,
synchronizing circuit, Penumo hydraulic circuit, Sequential circuit design for simple applications using cascade
method.
Properties of air
9 Hours
Unit V
Design of Pneumatic Circuits
Introduction to PLC - ladder diagrams, PLC applications in fluid power control. Fluid power circuits Failure and
Trouble shooting. Fluidics – Introduction to fluidic devices, simple circuits. Servo systems – Hydro Mechanical
servo systems, Electro-hydraulic servo systems and proportional valves.
Application of PLC
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education New Delhi, 2006
Reference(s)
1. S.R. Majumdar, Oil Hydraulics, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.
2. James L Johnson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2003.
3. S.R. Majumdar, Pneumatic systems – Principles and maintenance, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
4. Andrew Parr, Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Jaico Publishing House, 2006.
5. Illangov Soundarrajan, Introduction to Hydraulics and Pneumatics, Prentice hall of India, 2007.
Websites
1. www.hydraulicspneumatics.com
2. www.hydraulics-pneumatics-engineering.com
3. www.mekanizmalar.com/menu_pneumatic.html
11N007 MICROPROCESSOR BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To develop a vast knowledge in system design
To know about frame work of programming in systems
To acquire a real time control in systems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
241
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Microprocessor and Microcontroller
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Classify the need for microprocessor based system design and its framework.
Identify the microprocessor resources and analyze real time control for simple applications.
Analyze the software building blocks.
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†48 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is the Need for Microprocessor based design?
2. What is a Microprocessor?
3. What is a PCI bus?
4. What is a watchdog timer?
5. Define ADC and DAC.
6. Name different addressing modes of 8086 with atleast one example of each mode. 7. What is the function of the following instructions (i) JCXZ (ii) Lock Prefix (iii) Bound (iv) ESC
8. List the five software interrupt instructions of the microprocessor and explain each one.
9. What roll is played by the PCI interface?
10. What is an interrupt?
11. What is big-endian and little-endian?
12. What is an assembler?
Understand
1. With the help of block diagram explain the concept of shared-bus operation.
2. Discuss the two hardware interrupts in 8086/8088 microprocessors.
3. Why we need watchdog timers?
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
242
4. Describe in detail the software interrupts available in INTEL family. How interrupts are executed in real
and protected mode.
5. Explain the following Directives (i) PUBLIC (ii) EXTRN (iii) MODEL (iv) PROC
6. How real mode interrupts are different from protected mode interrupts?
7. Explain the operation of the protected mode Interrupt
8. How memory Paging is used for memory addressing?
9. Explain the different modes of operation of 8254 Timer using relevant waveforms.
Apply
1. Write instructions to do the following operation.
(i) Subtract the data, stored 10 words after the location addressed by SI, from DX .
(ii) Rotate all the bits of AL left three places.
(iii) ADD BX with DX and save the result in BX.
(iv) Add CX to the data stored at memory location WELL.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare 80186, 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium based on their data bus width, Address bus width and
memory size.
2. Explain the necessity of decoding when memory device is attached to a microprocessor? With neat diagram
indicate how a simple NAND gate decoder is used to select a 2716 EPROM memory component for memory locations FF800H-FFFFFH.
Create
1. Write a program in assembly language to find the largest of n numbers stored in the memory.
Unit I
Introduction
Need for microprocessor based design – Design cycle – dimensions of the design problem – hardware design and
software design – system integration.
Design cycle
9 Hours
Unit II
Microprocessor Resources
Family members – bus widths program and data memory parallel ports – D/A and A/D converters – reset circuitry –
watchdog timers –power down considerations.
D/A and A/D converters
9 Hours
Unit III
Real-Time Control
Interrupt structures programmable timers – real-time clock – latency – interrupt – density and interval constraints
Latency
9 Hours
Unit IV
Programming Framework
CPU registers – structure – addressing modes – instruction sets – assembly languages – assemblers
Instruction sets
9 Hours
Unit V
Software Building Blocks
Queues – tables and strings – program organization – micro processor expansion methods – I/O hardware
alternatives – development tools – Motorola and Intel micro processors details
Development tools
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
243
Text Book 1. Michael Slater,Microprocessor – based design: A Comprehensive Guide to Effective Hardware Design,
Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi 2004
Reference(s)
1. John, B. Peatman, Design with Micro controllers, McGraw Hill International Ltd, New York 2002
2. S.Eralan and A.Ahluwalia, Programming and Interfacing the 8051 micro controller, Addison
Wesley,New York 2012 3. Intel Manual on 16 bit-embedded controllers, 1991
4. Motorola manual on 8 and 16 bit micro controllers
11N008 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion
To study the stability analysis of digital control system
To model systems in the time domain and design feedback controllers based on various algorithms
To know about the compensators in digital controllers
To model or to identify a discrete-time system with a linear input-output relation
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Control Engineering
Basics of Digital Logic Circuits
Basics of Advance process control
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will able to:
Analyze the digital control system performances.
Represent simple systems in the form of state equations and provide a solution for them.
Design a compensator/controller for a simple system .
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
49 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
244
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define sampling theorem.
2. Name the types of sampling process.
3. State quantization?
4. Recall zero order hold?
5. List the advantages of digital control system?
6. Label the limitations of digital control system? 7. Quote the equation for frequency response of first order hold.
8. List the advantages of digital PID controllers.
9. Quote the equation for digital PID controller?
10. Describe the significance of integral controller?
11. Quote the relationship between S and Z plane.
12. List the types of stability analysis of digital control system.
13. Point out the necessary condition for stability by Jury/s stability test?
14. Outline the sufficient condition for stability by Jury/s stability test?
15. Recall state space analysis?
16. List the advantages of state space approach.
17. Match state of the system and state variables.
18. Define state vector. 19. Define state trajectory and Give the state model of the given system.
20. Identify the solutions of discrete time equations.
21. Describe the methods of determining state transition matrix?
22. Quote the transformation of state variables?
23. List the types of discretization.
24. Define Euler‘s approximation.
25. Define Eigen values and Eigen vectors.
Understand
1. Show the symbolic representation of a ZOH and FOH.
2. Predict the transfer function of zero order hold device.
3. Explain sampling theorem. 4. Compute the pulse transfer function of digital PID controller. Also design procedure of PID controller.
5. Explain methods of analog to digital conversion.
6. Express the different types of sampling operation? Explain each of them.
7. Explain the weighted resistor digital to analog converter.
8. Explain the condition satisfied for reconstruction of sampled signal into continuous signal.
9. Explain the principle operation of digital to analog conversion.
10. State and explain Jury‘s stability.
11. Explain procedure for obtaining the pulse transfer function of cascaded elements.
12. Summarize the design procedure of digital controller through bilinear transformation.
13. Explain procedure for obtaining the pulse transfer function of closed loop system.
14. Explain the procedure root locus techniques for digital system.
15. Demonstrate the steps to transformation from classical form to state-space representation cascaded elements.
16. Compute state transition matrix by Laplace transform.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
245
Apply
1. Explain the theorem required to satisfy to recover the signal e(t) from the samples e*(t).
2. The discrete time signal x(n)=6.35cos(π /10)n is quantized with a resolution (a) Δ=0.1 or Δ=0.02. Judge
many bits are required in the A/D converter in each case?
3. Compute the pulse transfer function of two cascaded systems, each described by the difference equation y
(k) = 0.5y (k-1) + r(k).
4. Using Jury‘s stability criterion calculate the range of K, for which the characteristic equation z 3 + Kz 2 +
1.5Kz − (K + 1) = 0 is the closed loop stable.‘ 5. Graph root locus in the z-plane for the system shown in Figure for 0< K <∞. Consider the sampling period
T = 4 sec.
6. Compute a state space representation of the system given in Figure. The sampling period T is 1 sec. Also
obtain the state transition matrix.
7. The block diagram of a digital control system is shown in the figure. Sketch a compensator D(z) to meet
the following specifications:
(a) Velocity error constant, Kv≥ 4 Sec.,
(b) Phase margin≥ 400 and
(c) Band width =1.5 rad. /sec
8. Calculate the state model for the following difference equation. Also find its state transition matrix.
y(k+2) + 3y(k+1) + 2y(k) = 5u(k+1) + 3u(k).
9. Consider a discrete linear discrete - data control system, whose input - output relation is described by the
difference equation y (k+2) +2y (k+1) +y (k) =u (k+1) +u (k). Compute the following canonical models.
i. Observable canonical form.
ii. Controllable canonical form.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. A sampler and ZOH are now introduced in the forward loop (Figure 3). Relate the stability of the sampled-
data system via bilinear transformation and justify the stable linear continuous time system becomes
unstable upon the introduction of a sampler and ZOH.
2. Consider a control system that has the open-loop transfer function
For this system design a phase-lag-lead controller. Such that the compensated system has a steady state
error of less than 4% and a phase margin greater than 500.
3. The open loop transfer function of a unity - feedback digital control system is given as
Detect the root loci of the system for 0< K <∞. Indicate all important information on the root loci.
Create
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
246
1. A block diagram of a digital control system is shown in Figure 6. Design a PID controller D(z), to eliminate
the steady-state error due to a step input and simultaneously realizing a good transient response, and the
ramp-error constant Kv should equal 5.
2. Drive the necessary condition for the digital control system
3. The pulse transfer function of digital control systems is given by
Create a various state space representation for the system. Find the complete solution to a unit step
Input and assume that, the initial conditions are zero.
Unit I
Digital Control System
Digital control system – sample and hold – analog to digital converter – digital to analog converter – quantizing and
quantizing error – sampling process – frequency response of zero order hold – first order hold – PI, PD controllers –
digital PID
Selection of sampling rate
9 Hours
Unit II
Response of Discrete System
Pulse transfer function of cascaded elements, closed loop systems – characteristic equation – relationship between
s-plane and z-plane poles – unit step response of digital control system – stability of discrete system – Jury‘s
stability test – Root locus technique for digital system Impulse response of digital control system
9 Hours
Unit III
State Space Representation
State variable formulation of discrete system – decomposition of discrete transfer function – direct decomposition –
cascade decomposition and parallel decomposition – solution of state equation by recursive method – state transition
matrix and its properties
State space representation of transfer function
9 Hours
Unit IV
Solution of State Equation Solution of discrete time state equation – evaluation of state transition matrix – transfer function matrix –
Discretisation of continuous time system - Solution of discrete time state equation by Cayley
Hamilton theorem
9 Hours
Unit V
Compensation Techniques
Compensation by continuous network – compensation by digital computer – frequency domain technique of
designing D(z)
Designing D (z) based on time domain specifications
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
247
Textbook(s)
1. M. Gopal, Digital Control and State Variable Methods, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd, New
Delhi, 2012
Reference(s)
1. K. Ogata, Discrete time control system, Pearson Education Asia, New Delhi 2011
2. I.J. Nagarath and M. Gopal, Control System Engineering, New age International P.Ltd, New Delhi 2011
11N009 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the various error controlling techniques in data communication networks
To learn the functions of different protocols
To understand internet, email and its uses in modern communication
To identify different components of data communication network
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Communication engineering
Basics of Computer science
Course Outcome(s) As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Summarize the data communication networks, data link protocols and error handling techniques
Explain the switching and network types
Analyze the functions of different protocols and their layers .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†50 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
248
Remember
1. Name the layers of OSI does the encryption/decryption process.
2. Identify which OSI layer is responsible for binary transmission, cable specification and physical aspects of
network communication.
3. Define PDU.
4. Label the types of flow control techniques that can be implemented in a network.
5. Point the purpose of the preamble in Ethernet frame.
6. Outline the IEEE 802.2 standard represent in Ethernet technologies.
7. Describe token pass in a token bus. 8. List the two functions of a router.
9. State the default port number for SMTP.
10. Point the purpose of HTTP protocol.
Understand
1. Demonstrate network topology which has a central device that brings all the signals together.
2. Distinguish Simplex, Half Duplex and Full Duplex transmission line modes.
3. Illustrate the error detection and correction methods designed for single bit detection or correction.
4. Represent the two features that make switches preferable to hubs in Ethernet-based network.
5. Indicate the incorrect VRC bit.
6. Distinguish between packet switching and circuit switching.
7. Classify the three WAN devices found in the cloud. 8. Paraphrase the two advantages of CIDR provided to a network.
9. Predict the primary disadvantage of telnet, when compared to SSH.
10. Express the port numbers included in the TCP header of a segment.
Apply
1. An 8-PSK system has an incoming data stream at 2400 bps. Compute the symbol rate of the transmitter?
2. A data link between the head office of a financial organization and one of its branches runs
continuously at 2.048 Mbps. Between the hours of 0900 and 1700 it is noted that there are 295 bits received
in error. Calculate the bit error rate.
3. Demonstrate how the Hamming code is used to correct a single-bit error in the data stream.
4. Sketch which type of switching network is followed by internet.
5. Show which type of switching that provides a constant bandwidth for the complete duration of a message
transfer. 6. When a collision occurs in a network using CSMA/CD, examine the hosts respond after the back off period
has expired?
7. A network is configured with the IP, IPX and AppleTalk protocols. Manipulate routing protocol is
recommended for this network.
8. Judge what metric does the RIP routing protocol consider being infinity.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Classify the type of transmission mode of a telephone system.
2. Distinguish between connection-oriented transmission and connectionless transmission.
3. Point out which type of media is immune to EMI and RFI.
4. Contrast an analog signal with a digital signal.
5. Illustrate the two conclusions drawn when multiple errors detected in a transmission line. 6. A routing issue has occurred in you internetwork. Outline which type of devices should be examined to
isolate this error.
7. Analyze the usage of loop back address.
Create
1. In LAN installations where potential electrical hazards or electromagnetic interference may be present,
design type of media is recommended for backbone cabling.
2. A network administrator is required to use media in the network that can run up to 100 meters in cable
length without using repeaters. The chosen media must be inexpensive and easily installed. The installation
will be in a pre-existing building with limited cabling space. Design type of media would best meet this
requirement.
3. Create the CRC-4 character for the following message using a ―divisor‖ constant of 10011:
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
249
1100 0110 1011 01
4. Design, construct and verify the operation of a parity generator circuit. The circuit allows selection of
even or odd parity and indicates when a parity error occurs. Another option for the circuit is to operate with
a choice of 7- or 8-bit data inputs.
5. A PC cannot connect to any remote websites, ping its default gateway or ping a printer that is functioning
properly on the location segment. Explain the action will verify that the TCP/IP stack is functioning
correctly on this PC?
Unit I
Data Communication – an overview
Introduction: Networks, protocols and standards, standards organizations – line configurations – topology –
categories of networks – inter networks – OSI model: functions of the layers – encoding and modulation – digital-to-
Error detection and correction: Types of errors – detection – Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC) – Longitudinal
Redundancy Check (LRC) – Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) – check sum – error correction – single bit error correction – data link control: line discipline, flow control, error control – data link protocols: asynchronous
protocols, synchronous protocols, character oriented protocols, bit oriented protocols – link access procedures
leaky bucket algorithm – traffic control – ATM: design goals, ATM architecture, ATM layers and ATM applications
– SONET/SDH: synchronous transport signals, physical configuration, SONET layers and applications
Traffic control
9 Hours
Unit V
Network, Transport and Application Layers
Routing algorithms: distance vector routing, link state routing – TCP / IP protocol suite: overview of TCP/IP –
network layers: addressing, subnetting – application layer: Domain Name System (DNS), telnet, File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
Overview of TCP/IP
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, Data Communication and Networking, McGraw Hill Higher Education, New Delhi,
2013
Reference(s)
1. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communication, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2013
2. Andrew Tannenbaum.S, and David Wetherall.J, Computer Networks, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2012
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
250
3. Douglas E. Comer, Internetworking with TCP/IP Volume 1, Prentice Hall of India, 2006
11N010 POWER ELECTRONICS AND DRIVES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To obtain the switching characteristic of different types of power semi-conductor devices
To determine the operation, characteristics and performance parameters of controlled rectifiers
To apply switching techniques and basic topologies of DC-DC switching regulators
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Electric circuit analysis
Basics of Electron Devices and Circuits
Basics of Electronics
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
Distinguish between the principle operation of power semi-conductor devices .
Analyze the operating principle of rectifiers, choppers, cycloconverters, and inverters.
Identify the drives for various control applications .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy (New Version)
Test I†51 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
1. What is meant by rectification and inversion mode?
2. Define commutation.
3. What is free wheeling diode? List the advantages of the same.
4. Mention the disadvantages of power converters.
5. Define firing angle of SCR.
6. What are the advantage and disadvantage of PWM control?
7. State the applications of UPS.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
251
8. List the different types of PWM control.
9. What is meant by extinction angle?
10. What is the difference between ON-OFF control and phase controls?
11. Give an expression for the RMS output voltage of single phase full wave ac voltage controller with RL
load.
12. What is a Cycloconverter? Give its applications?
13. Write output voltage relation of single phase full converter. Also draw its variation with firing angle..
14. What is dual converter? Mention its uses
15. What is the effect of inductive load in the performance of a three phase bridge rectifier? 16. What is the effect of freewheeling diode in converters?
17. How rectification and inversion are possible in phase controlled thyristor converter?
18. What are the control strategies of chopper?
19. What is the purpose of connecting diode in antiparallel with thyristors in inverters?
20. What is reverse recovery time? Draw the V-I characteristic‘s of SCR and mark the holding current and
latching current in the characteristic.
21. What are the advantages and disadvantages of a buck-boost regulator?
22. Distinguish step down and step up converters.
23. Define modulation index of PWM. What is its use?
Understand
1. Explain the' switching characteristics of MOSFET. 2. What do you mean by snubber circuit? Draw and explain the function of each component.
3. Describe the structure of a TRIAC with relevant diagram and symbol. Explain the different operating
modes of TRIAC with its V-I characteristics. Also discuss its advantage and disadvantage.
4. Explain the need of series and parallel operation of SCRs. Also explain their operation with V-I
characteristics and string efficiency.
5. Explain the construction and operation of SCR. Also explain V-I characteristics.
6. Explain the construction and operation of IGBT and explain V-I characteristics.
7. Discuss the effect of source inductance on the performance of a single phase fully controlled converter,
indicating clearly the conduction of various thyristors during one cycle.
8. Explain the operation of single phase dual converter.
9. Explain the operation of single phase semi converter and derive expressions for its average and rms output
voltages. 10. Explain the operation of single phase fully controlled rectifier with R, RL load.
11. Explain the operation of single phase half controlled rectifier with R load.
12. Derive the expressions for harmonic factor, displacement factor and power factor in a single phase full
converter from the fundamental principle.
13. Discuss the effect of source inductance on the performance of a three phase fully controlled converter,
indicating clearly the conduction of various thyristors during one cycle.
14. For a single phase uncontrolled rectifier feeding a resistive load, draw the waveforms of source voltage and
output voltage Describe the working with reference to waveforms drawn.
15. Explain the principle of basic chopper circuit with relevant voltage and current waveforms. Also explain
the various control strategies used to get the variation in the output voltage.
16. Classify the basic topologies of switching regulators and explain the operation of buck regulator with continuous load current using suitable waveforms.
17. With neat diagram and waveforms, explain three phase voltage source inverter, using SCR operating in180
degree conduction mode. Also, obtain the expression for rms value of output voltage.
18. Explain sinusoidal pulse width modulation as used in PWM inverters.
19. Explain the operation of current source inverter.
20. Draw the phase voltage and line voltage waveforms on the assumption that each thyristor conducts for
20°C. Indicate the firing sequence also.
21. Explain with waveforms the principle of working of 1- phase to 1- phase step up and step down
cycloconverter. List the factors that affect the performance of cyclo-converters.
22. Explain with waveforms the principle of working of 3- phase to 3- phase cycloconverter.
23. With aid of circuit diagram and waveform explain the operation of
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
252
a. Single phase unidirectional controller
b. Single phase bidirectional controller. Derive the expressions for their rms output voltage.
Apply
1. Why SCRs are required to be connected in parallel? What are the problems associated with parallel
connection of SCRs? How they are eliminated?
2. A single-phase full converter is supplied from 230 V, 50 Hz, The load consists of R = 10 Ω and a large
inductance so render the load current constant. For a firing angle delay 0 determine
(1) Average output voltage (2) Average output current (2) Average and rms values of thyristor currents (4) The power factor.
1. A single phase half controlled thyristor converter is connected to a load of a 5Ω resistance, 1H inductance
and 10V emf. Compute the average load voltage and average load current assuming continuous current
operation for a triggering angle 45®. Estimate the input power factor if the load current can be assumed to
be constant. The supply voltage is 230V, 50Hz.
2. The full wave controlled bridge rectifier has an ac input of 120V rms at 60Hz and a 20Ω load resistor.
The delay angle is 40®. Determine the average current in the loads, the power absorbed by the load and the
input power factor.
3. A resistive load of 10Ω is connected through a half wave SCR circuit to 220V, 50Hz, single phase source.
Calculate the power delivered to the load for a firing angle of 60®.find also the value of input power factor. 4. A dc chopper is turned on for 30µsec and off 10µsec. i) duty cycle ii) chopping frequency.
A dc chopper of input voltage 200V remains on for 25msec and off for 10msec. Determine the average
voltage which appears the load.
5. A dc chopper circuit is operating on TRC principle at a frequency of 2KHz on a 220V dc supply. If the load
voltage is 170V, compute the conduction and blocking period of thyristor each cycle.
6. A step up chopper is used to deliver load voltage of 500V from a 200V dc source. If the blocking period of
the thyristor is 80µs, compute the required pulse width.
7. A step up chopper has input voltage of 220V and output voltage of 660V. If the non-conducting time of
thyristor is 100µsec. compute the pulse width of output voltage. If the pulse width is halved for a constant
frequency operation, find the new output voltage.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. Compare 120° and 180° modes.
2. Distinguish between half controlled and fully controlled converter circuits.
3. How is 12 pulse converters formed from 6pulse converters?
4. Why thyristor are not preferred for inverters?
5. How the thyristor inverters are classified?
6. How the output frequency is varied in the care of an inverter.
7. Compare VSI and CSI.
8. Compare single PWM over multiple pulse width modulation technique.
9. Which of the pulse width modulation scheme gives better quality of voltage and current?
10. Compare SPWM over MPWM technique.
Create 1. Generation firing pulse for single inverter and converter using TMS320F247/TMS320F812.
Unit – I
Power Semi-Conductor Devices
Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power Diode – DIAC- SCR - TRIAC – Power transistor, MOSFET and
IGBT – Ratings of SCR – Series parallel operation of SCR, di/dt & dv/dt protection.
Construction, Operation, Characteristics of Power transistor
9 Hours
Unit – II
Controlled Rectifiers
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
253
Single Phase and Three phase uncontrolled converter with R load – Single Phase and Three phase half and fully
controlled converters with R, RL, RLE Load – Single phase and Three phase dual converter operation – Effect of
source inductance
Sepic, Lou, pi, T converters
9 Hours
Unit – III
Choppers and cycloconverters
Principle of chopper operations-control strategies – Step up and step down chopper –Buck and boost switched mode
regulators – cycloconverters , Single phase cycloconverters Operation four quadrant chopper
9 Hours
Unit – IV
Inverters
Single phase and three phase (both 1200 mode and 1800 mode) inverters – PWM techniques: Sinusoidal PWM
modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM – Current source inverters – Voltage source inverter – UPS.
Harmonics elimination technique
9 Hours
Unit – V
Drives
Introduction to DC drives- AC drives-Frequency control – Vector control- Stepper motor drives- Position control- Servo drives- applications
Servo drives- applications
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s) 1. Muhammad H. Rashid, ―Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices & Applications‖, Prentice Hall of India,
1. Jens G. Balchen and Kenneth I. Mumme, Process control: structures and applications, Blackie Academic
& Professional, 1995
2. B.G. Liptak, Instrumentation in Process Industries, Chilton Book Company, New York,1973
3. M. Considine and S.D. Ross, Handbook of Applied Instrumentation, McGraw Hill book Co, New
York,2006 4. B.G. Liptak, Instrument Engineers Handbook Volume II, 2003
11N012 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To provide the basics of neural networks and fuzzy logic
To expose the concepts of feed forward and feedback neural networks
To train about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems
To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve complicated practical problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Bascis of Mathematics taught in higher secondary school
Basics of Mathematics I and II
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Interpret the concept of artificial neural network and their control applications.
Explain the concept of fuzzy set theory and its architectures.
Apply fuzzy logic controller for simple applications.
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
257
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
53 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are the three basic elements of a neuron model?
2. What is called defuzzification?
3. Mention the types of defuzzification.
4. What are the applications of neural networks?
5. Name some of the multilayer neural network.
6. Mention the advantages of the Back propagation algorithm. 7. List out some of the applications of the fuzzy logic controllers in real time world.
8. Mention the few properties of fuzzy sets.
9. What are the various applications of fuzzy logic?
10. What are the different types of learning rules?
11. Draw AND function neuron and OR function neuron and state its output.
12. What is Hebbian learning rule?
13. What is Linguistic variable?
Understand
1. Demonstrate the simplified model of an artificial neuron.
2. Illustrate the training and classification of continuous perception with an example.
3. Demonstrate back propagation algorithm with your own training sets, and explain.
4. Explain the operations of dendrite, soma and axon in the biological neuron. 5. Elucidate briefly about the perceptron multilayer network with its algorithm.
6. Explicate the steps in designing a fuzzy control system.
7. Explicate the defuzzification methods.
8. Discuss the fuzzy rule for home heating system.
9. Explain the operation of the fuzzy logic control with the process inference block.
Apply
1. Give similarities and dissimilarities between Fuzzy logic and neural networks.
2. Why is modeling a blood pressure control difficult?
3. Discuss the techniques involved in pattern recognition.
4. Infer the role of knowledge based systems.
5. Judge the necessity of fuzzy databases and explain.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Differentiate feed-forward and feed-back neural network.
2. Differentiate supervised and unsupervised learning.
3. Compare Fuzzy sets and Crisp sets.
4. How does ANN resemble brain?
5. Analyze the goal of inverted pendulum.
6. Compare single layer perceptron classifier and multi-layer perceptron classifier.
Create
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
258
1. Assume that the vertices of a three-dimensional bipolar binary cube are used to represent eight states of
recurrent neural network with three bipolar binary neurons. The equilibrium states are p = [- 1 - 1 - 1] and q
= [1 1 1]. Sketch the desirable state transitions between the vertices.
2. Construct Fuzzy logic control of blood pressure during Anesthesia.
3. Design a Hopfield network for 4 bit bipolar patterns. The patterns are 1st sample S1 = [1 1 -1 -1], 2nd
sample S2 = [-1 1 -1 1], 3rd sample S3 = [-1 -1 -1 1]. Find the weight matrix and the energy for the three
input samples. Determine the pattern to which sample S = [-1 1 -1 -1] associates.
4. Compose the following two relations R1 and R2 by using the Max-Min composition, Max.Product
composition and Max. Average composition.
Unit I
Artificial Neural Network
Introduction – biological neuron and their artificial models – neuron modeling – learning rules – types of neural
networks – single layer – multi layer feed forward network – back propagation – learning factors
Types of neural networks
9 Hours
Unit II
Neural Networks in Control Applications
Feedback networks – Hopfield networks – applications of neural networks – process identification – artificial neuro
Membership function – knowledge base – data base – rule base – decision-making logic – fuzzy logic controller:
Mamdani and Sugeno-Takagi architecture.
Rule base
9 Hours
Unit V
Applications
Fuzzy controller for inverted pendulum, image processing, blood pressure during anesthesia – introduction to neuro-
fuzzy controllers.
Introduction to Neuro-fuzzy controllers
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Jacek M. Zurada, Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems, Jaico Publishing House, New Delhi,2006
2. John Yen, Reza Langari, Fuzzy logic Intelligence, control and Information, Pearson Education,1999
Reference(s)
1. H.J. Zimmerman., Fuzzy Set Theory-and its Applications, Kluwer Academic Publishers, New Delhi 2006
2. B. Kosko, Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi 2009
3. B. Yagnanarayanan, Artificial Neural Networks, Prentice Hall of India Ltd .,New Delhi.2012
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
259
4. G.J. Klir and T.A. Folger, Fuzzy Sets, Uncertainty and Information, Prentice-Hall of India Ltd., New
Delhi, 2009
5. Driankov and Hellendroon, Introduction to Fuzzy Control, Narosa Publishers, New Delhi 2010
6. Shehu S. Farinwata, Dimitar P. Filev and Reza Langari, Fuzzy Control Synthesis and Analysis, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd, New York 2000
11N013 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To know about the origin and types of robotics and its stabilization
To develop a clear idea about hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives
To develop an optimal knowledge about machine interface in applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
Prerequestie(s)
Baiscs of Control engineering
Basics of Mathematics I, II
Course outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Summarize the history of industrial robots and the anatomy, features and applications of a typical robot
Identify the actuator, sensor, control scheme and gripper of a typical robot application.
Apply homogenous transformation to obtain the forward and inverse kinematics of simple robot
manipulators.
Assessment Pattern
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
260
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
54 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Robot.
2. Recall the parts of robot.
3. Name the different types of actuators used for robots.
4. Define robot vision.
5. Define Asimov‘s laws of robotics.
6. State degree of freedom of a robot. 7. Define trajectory.
8. State inverse kinematics.
9. Describe the working principle of tactile sensor.
10. Identify the method to determine the torque of a motor.
11. Recall the use of manipulator in robotic arm.
12. Name the different types of manipulators.
13. List out the type of grippers.
14. Define end effector.
15. Define jacobian principle.
16. Reproduce the applications of robots.
17. Name the different sensor used in robots.
18. Define Hill climbing technique.
Understand
1. Classify the industrial robots.
2. Tell where the servo control robots are used.
3. Compute the degree of freedom of robot.
4. Demonstrate at which condition the robot is dynamically unstable.
5. Estimate the reason for a robot may over rule the Asimov‘s law.
6. Express a robotic application where hydraulic actuators get failed.
7. Compute the gearing ratio of a motor.
8. Show the need of laser sensor in detecting object in robotic arm.
9. Interpret how a trajectory is determined.
10. Tell the criteria to select the manipulator. 11. Classify the different applications of robot?
12. Illustrate the factor decides the shape of the end effector.
13. Infer the need for force control over the manipulator.
14. Discuss the factors to be considered while designing a robotic arm.
15. Explain how the solutions are obtained for an inverse kinematic problem.
16. Tell the application of jacobian principle.
17. Tell the uses of robotic arm.
18. Differentiate fixed automation and flexible automation.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
261
Apply
1. The co-ordinate of a point is 2, 2, 0 with respect to a movable Cartesian frame OUVW. Compute the co-
ordinates of the point with respect to the fixed Cartesian frame OXYZ if the movable frame is obtained by
a rotation of 60 about the Z axis followed by a translation of 5 units along the rotated V axis.
2. A large Cartesian coordinate robot has one orthogonal side with a total range of 30in. One of the
specifications on the robot is that it has a maximum control resolution of 0.010in. on this particular axis.
Manipulate the number of bits of storage capacity which the robot‘s control memory must possess to
provide this level of precision.
3. A stepper motor is used to drive a linear axis of a robot. The motor is connected to a screwed shaft having a
single start thread of pitch 2.5 mm. The resolution desired for the controlled motion is 0.5 mm. Compute: i)
Step angles that are required on the motor to obtain the resolution. ii) Pulse rate required to drive the axis if
the velocity is 80 mm/s.
4. A certain dc servomotor used to actuate a robot joint torque constant of 2.5in –lb/A, and a voltage constant
of 15V/Kr/min. The armature resistance =3.0 ohm. At a particular moment during the robot cycle, the joint
is not moving and a voltage of 30V is applied to the motor. Calculate the torque of the motor immediately
after the voltage is applied.
Analyze / Evaluate 1. Distinguish the functions of stepper motor and DC motor drives for a robot.
2. Compare and contrast the end-effectors from the view-point of their functions.
3. Develop a set of dynamic equations for a single prismatic joint working against gravity using
Lagrangian.
4. Compare Fiber optic, Laser and Proximity sensor.
Create
1. R-R-R manipulator is at initial position (50, 90,-50) degrees. It is required to move to (130, 0, 0) degrees.
Assume that the joints have maximum absolute acceleration / deceleration of (50, 100, 150) degree / sec2
and maximum velocities of (20, 40, 50) degree/sec. Design arm of the robot for above specification.
Unit I
Basic Concepts
Brief history -types of robot – technology - robot classifications and specifications - design and control issues-
various manipulators – sensors - work cell - programming languages
Types of Robot
9 Hours
Unit II
Actuators and Sensors
Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives – determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio – servo motor – variable
speed arrangements – machine vision – ranging sensors: acoustic, magnetic, eddy current type – laser and fiber
optic sensor – tactile sensors
Laser and Fiber optic sensor
9 Hours
Unit III
Grippers and Mathematical representation of robot
Various types of grippers – design considerations of grippers –– end effectors – mathematical representation of
Robots - Position and orientation
End effectors
9 Hours
Unit IV
Kinematics and Path Planning
Homogeneous transformation - various joints - representation using the Denavit Hattenberg parameters - degrees of
freedom - direct kinematics - inverse kinematics
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
262
Various joints
9 Hours
Unit V
Case Studies
PID control scheme – selection of a robot – robots in manufacturing and non-manufacturing application – PUMA
560 & SCARA robots
Selection of a robot
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
R. K. Mittal and I. J. Nagrath, Robotics and Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2007
1. R.D. Klafter, T.A. Chimielewski, M. Negin, Robotic Engineering – An integrated approach, Prentice
Hall of India New Delhi, 2008
Reference(s)
1. John J. Craig, Introduction to Robotics Mechanics and Control, Third edition, Pearson Education, 2009
2. S.R. Deb, Robotics technology and flexible Automation, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
3. R.D. Klafter, T.A. Chimielewski, M. Negin, Robotic Engineering – An integrated approach, Prentice
4. Hall of India New Delhi, 2008
5. P.J .Mc Kerrow , Introduction to Robotics, Addison Wesley, USA, 2011
11N014 ADAPTIVE CONTROL
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To gain a technical knowledge about adaptive control scheme
To develop a clear view on gain scheduling techniques
To apply the basic knowledge of control engineering in adaptive control techniques
To impart knowledge on various tuning and controlling methods for non linear systems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Control engineering
Basics of Mathematics I, II
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing this course, students will be able to:
Summarize the basic concepts of adaptation and perturbation controllers .
Analyze the self tuning regulators and model reference adaptive systems .
Apply gain scheduling controllers for simple systems .
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
263
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
55 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. State the principle difference between adaptive control system and conventional closed loop control system.
2. What is adaptive controller?
3. Define Indices of Performance (IP) used in adaptive control system.
4. List out the methods normally used for identification of system parameter.
5. Mention the effects of measurement delay in an identification process.
6. State the salient features of Model Reference Adaptive Systems (MRAS).
7. Define performance index.
8. Define quasi linearization process.
9. Mention the features of Self Tuning Regulators.
10. What is the effect of cancellation of process zero in indirect self-tuner?
11. State the Lypunov's stability theorem.
Understand 1. Draw the block diagram of an IP measurement scheme and explain its importance in an Adaptive Control
System.
2. Explain the process of adaptive control in terms of three major functions.
3. Discuss in general the difficulties encountered in non-linear identification. Explain the pseudorandom
binary sequence method of system identification.
4. Elaborate on minimum-degree pole placement method for design of adaptive controllers. Give the
Algorithm using the above method to obtain the Self Tuning Regulator (STR).
5. Give a relationship between various stochastic self tuning regulators.
6. Explain the procedure to obtain a model reference adaptive controller using MIT rule.
7. Design a MRAS controller for a first order system by Lyapunov method, and also state the conditions to be
met to ensure parameter convergence. 8. Discuss the stability problem of sinusoidal perturbation adaptive controller.
9. Discuss the applications of gain scheduling with suitable example.
10. Explain the relationship between MRAS and Self Tuning Regulator (STR).
11. Highlight the salient features of different auto-tuning techniques. Write an explanatory note on different
aspects of an industrial adaptive controller.
12. Explain the concept of adaptive control.
13. Discuss how to make an MRAS based on the gradient approach.
14. Explain the concept of BIBO stability and discuss how the small gain theorem is useful to evaluate the
same.
15. Explain the design algorithm of MRAS using Lyapunov theory.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
264
16. Distinguish between explicit and implicit Self Tuning Regulators.
17. Explain the pole placement of Self Tuning Regulators.
18. Explain the generalized minimum-variance method for design of self-tuning controller
19. Demonstrate the adaptive control method using in steepest descent algorithm.
20. Explain the self-oscillating adaptive systems with help of block diagram.
Apply
1. Consider the process G(s) = s(s+a), where ‗a‘ is an unknown parameter. Assume that the desired closed
loop system is G m =2s2+2s+2. Derive the continuous-time indirect self-tuning algorithms for the given
system. 2. Design of gain scheduling controllers for a nonlinear transformation of second order systems.
3. How will you determine the adaptation gain by using MIT rule?
4. Adaptive controller is preferred for dynamic process. Justify.
5. Derive the expression for MRAC and Lyapunov stability theorem.
6. How the MRAC and Lyapunov stability theorem is used in system identification?
7. Compare the various adaptive schemes.
8. How the pole placement design is used in self tuning regulator?
9. Design a pole placement controller for a system with dead time.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Formulate the relation between direct self tuning regulators and linear quadratic self tuning regulators. 2. In what way the instability is introduced in perturbation system?
3. For a nonlinear system, how to establish the adaptive control algorithm in order to make the stable system?
Create
1. Design the Model Reference Adaptive Control algorithm (MRAC) for the nonlinear or slow process (eg:
temperature).
2. Design the controller for the system G(s) = G1(s) G2(s), where G1 (s) = bs+a, G2 (s) = cs+d in which a and
b are unknown parameters and c and d are known.
Unit I
Introduction to Adaptive Control
Development of adaptive control problem – role of index performance (IP) in adaptive systems –
development of IP measurement process model – identification by cross correlation – synthesis techniques for flat spectrum pseudo random signals – quasi linearization – impulse response expansion – identification using matched
filter – adaptive control using steepest descent
Development of IP measurement process model
9 Hours
Unit II
Perturbation Systems
Single and multi-dimensional adaptive systems – stability analysis of sinusoidal perturbation adaptive controllers -
formulation of signal synthesis system
Multi-dimensional adaptive systems
9 Hours
Unit III
Self Tuning Regulators (STR)
Introduction – pole placement design – indirect self tuning regulators – continuous time self tuners – direct self
tuning regulators – linear quadratic self tuning regulators – adaptive predictive control
Direct self tuning regulators
9 Hours
Unit IV
Model Reference Adaptive Systems
The MIT rule – determination of adaptation gain – design of MRAS using Lyapunov theory – BIBO stability –
applications of adaptive control
Applications of adaptive control
9 Hours
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
265
Unit V
Gain Scheduling
Gain scheduling principle – design of gain scheduling controllers – nonlinear transformations of second order
systems – applications of gain scheduling – case studies – ABB adaptive controllers SATT control ECA40
Applications of gain scheduling
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Text Book
1. Karl J. Astrom and Bjorn Wittenmark, Adaptive control, Pearson education inc, New Delhi, 2008
Reference(s)
1. Kumpathi S. Narendra, Romeo Ortega and Peder Dorator, Advances in Adaptive control, IEEE press, New
Jersey 2005
2. Petros A. Loannov and Jing Sun, Robust Adaptive Control, Prentice Hall Inc 2012
11N015 MICRO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEM
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To acquire a knowledge about fabrication process in MEMS
To know about various etching techniques in micromachining
To have a knowledge about applications in micromachining techniques
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Engieering physics
Basics of Engineering chemistry
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Classify the fabrication methods and materials used in MEMS .
Identify the application of MEMS in sensor and actuator.
Explain the uses of micromachining, polymer and optical MEMS .
Assessment Pattern
S. No.
Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
56 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
266
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define MEMS.
2. State sensor.
3. Define micro fabrication. 4. Define stress and strain.
5. Describe the function of actuators.
6. Memorize the significance of comb drives capacitive actuator.
7. Define thermistor.
8. Describe the working function thermocouple.
9. Draw the micro technology subfields
10. Explain piezoelectric effect.
11. List out the types of flow sensors.
12. Define inertia.
13. Define pressure sensor.
14. Discuss about the acoustic sensor. 15. Recall micromachining process.
16. Define plasma etching.
17. Define DRIE.
18. Draw the various types of beams and their deflected shapes.
19. State PDMS.
20. Define LCP.
Understand
1. Express the factors should be considered for selecting the tactile sensor.
2. Illustrate the materials and interfaces in a schematic microstructure.
3. Discuss the lithographic patterning process.
4. Express the equation that would quantify the electrical field between two large parallel plates. 5. Explain the assembly of 3D MEMS.
6. Summarize the fabrication process for a dual-valve unpowered micro flow system using parylene as
structural layer.
7. Elucidate the different types of etching process.
8. Compute the equation for the voltage difference between two parallel plates.
9. Explain the need of optical MEMS.
10. Show the process for fabricating micro fluid channels using PDMS.
Apply
1. Interpolate the Structural tests using a MEMS Acoustic Emission Sensor.
2. Examine the traffic flow control using surface acoustic wave sensors. 3. Use optical sensors for Pipeline implementation.
4. Explain the MEMS application in pavement condition monitoring.
5. Discover the application of MEMS in consumer electronic products.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Point out the role of magnetic actuators.
2. Outline the use of MEMS mirror chips in projection screen TVs.
3. Measure the speed of the car using MEMS accelerometer.
4. Determine how airbags systems are triggered using MEMS accelerometer chip?
5. Compare electrostatic sensors and piezoresistive sensors.
Create 1. Design and carry out experiments requiring the assembly of custom fixtures, materials, etc.
2. Make a modeling of thermal type micro flow sensors using MEMS process.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
267
3. Design of heartbeat measuring transducer.
4. Invent a model of an Analog Devices ADXL202 and be able to explain how a MEMS accelerometer works.
Unit I
Introduction
Intrinsic Characteristics of MEMS - Energy Domains and Transducers - Sensors and Actuators - Introduction to
Microfabrication - Silicon based MEMS processes - New Materials - Review of Electrical and Mechanical concepts
in MEMS - Stress and strain analysis - Flexural beam bending - Torsional deflection Stress and strain analysis
3. Tai Ran Hsu, MEMS & Micro systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008
4. Julian w. Gardner, Vijay k. varadan and Osama O.Awadelkarim, Micro sensors MEMS and smart devices,
John Wiley & son LTD, 2002
11N016 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
268
To realize the energy sources and energy consumption in the world
To get an adequate knowledge about the energy conservation techniques of various sources
To familiarize tidal power plants, geothermal power plants, biogas plants, magneto hydro dynamic(MHD)
power generation
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Engineering physics and physics taught in higher secondary school
Course Outcomes
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Summarize the scenario of energy consumption and energy availability in India/World.
Analyze the solar and wind energy systems and their applications.
Examine the Bio, magneto hydro dynamic, tides and wave energy systems.
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
57 Test II†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 30 30 30 30
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze / Evaluate 20 20 20 20
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define diffused radiation.
2. State various forms of ocean energy resources.
3. Name the bio energy conversion process.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20.The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will becalculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
269
4. Define staggering.
5. Define the term Yaw control, pitch control and teethering control.
6. Outline the use of a propeller.
7. Define tracking.
8. Point the composition of a typical biogas.
9. Identify the use of hot rock geothermal source.
10. Define fuel cell.
Understand
1. Give the need for developing new energy technologies.
2. Mention the need of sun tracking for line focus and point focus collectors.
3. Illustrate the angle of incidence for a solar beam radiation?
4. Indicate the thermal storage preferred in solar power plant.
5. Describe the components of Horizontal axis wind turbine.
6. Extend the various principle routes of Biomass energy conversion to useful energy.
7. Distinguish between fixed dome type and floating dome type biogas plant.
8. Describe a small biogas plant. Explain the process of anaerobic digestion.
9. Explain the principle of solar pond.
10. Discuss the types of geothermal fluids and their temperature range.
Apply
1. The incident beam of sunlight has power density of 0.7kW/m2 in the direction of the beam. The angle of
incidence θ is 60°.Calculate the power collected by the surface having total flat area of 100m2.
2. A wind turbine has a rotor diameter of 15m.The wind speed is 7m/s .Assume normal temperature and air
pressure. Energy utilization factor is 0.7.Efficiency of WTG unit is 33 %.Calculate the power delivered.
3. Examine why geothermal energy has not been in commercial use in India.
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the various types of collectors used in solar and thermal power plant.
2. Illustrate how can solar energy utilized to improve the thermal efficiency and reduce the consumption of
fuels in a combined cycle power plant?
3. Compare between the biomass energy resources and fossil fuels. 4. Justify solar PV systems are likely to replace solar thermal system.
Create
1. A horizontal shaft, propeller type wind turbine is located in area having following wind characteristics:
speed of wind 10m/s at 1 atm and 15ºC. Find the i) Air density, ii) Total power density in wind stream,
iii) Total power from a wind turbine of 120 m dia.
2. Draw a cross section of earth and indicate the geothermal reserves.
Unit I
Introduction
Trends in energy consumption – world and Indian energy scenario – energy sources and their availability,
economics and efficiency – energy consumption pattern and growth rate in India – need to develop new energy technologies
Energy sources: solar, wind, geothermal
9 Hours
Unit II
Solar Energy and Applications
Solar thermal electric conversion: principle of solar thermal power generation – low and medium temperature
systems – Stirling cycle – Brayton cycle – photo-voltaic energy conversion: solar radiation and measurement – solar
cells and their characterization – influence of insulation and temperature – PV arrays – electrical storage with
batteries – power conditioning schemes: DC power conditioning converters – maximum power point tracking
algorithms – AC power conditioners – line commutated thyristor inverters – synchronized operation with grid
supply – stand-alone inverter
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
270
DC power conditioning converters
9 Hours
Unit III
Wind Energy Systems
Basic principle of wind energy conversion – nature of wind – power and energy from the wind – components of
Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) – types of WTG – squirrel cage and doubly fed induction generators – field excited
and permanent magnet synchronous generators - generator control – load control – performance measures –
efficiency
Load control
9 Hours
Unit IV
Bio Energy & MHD Energy Conversion Systems
Energy from bio-mass – biogas plants – various types – industrial wastes – municipal waste – burning plants – types
of co-generation processes – principle of Magneto Hydro Dynamic (MHD) power generation – types
Industrial wastes
9 Hours
Unit V
Miscellaneous Sources Energy from tides and waves – working principles of tidal power plants – geothermal energy – working principle of
geothermal power plants – principle of operation of solar ponds – fuel cells
Polarization in fuel cells
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rao.S and Parulekar, Energy Technology – Non Conventional, Renewable and Conventional,
KhannaPublishers, New Delhi, 2005
Reference(s)
1. Mukund R. Patel, Wind and Solar Power Systems, CRC Press LLC, New York, 2005
2. Rai. G.D., Non Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2005 3. Garg H.P. and Prakash J., Solar Energy – Fundamentals & Applications, Tata McGraw Hill book Co, 2007
11N017 OPTIMAL CONTROL
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To realize the concepts of optimality and its control
To develop a vast knowledge about dynamic programming and its principles
To develop t technical concise about various regulator problems
To understand the concept of dynamic programming and it‘s methods
To study the various methods Iterative Numerical Techniques and it‘s problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
271
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Mathematics I, II and III
Basics of Numerical methods
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Solve simple problems using the concept of optimality and calculus of variables .
Explain the concept of pontryagin‘s minimum principle and dynamic programming
Design optimal controller for simple problem.
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
58 Test II† Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination 1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create* - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
*Create type questions cannot be framed with this syllabus.
Remember
1. Define is optimal control.
2. Define the concept of optimality
3. List out the types of optical control problem.
4. Recall finite dimensional optimization.
5. Name the types of finite dimensional optimization.
6. State Fermat‘s principle in optics.
7. Define the Dirichlet‘s principle.
8. Point the Weierstrass condition.
9. Define approximate control law.
10. Define classical optimal control theory.
11. List out the objective of optimal control problem. 12. Define domain.
13. Point the equation for the principle of additivity.
14. Define state vector in optimal control.
15. Recall closeness of function.
16. List out the use of fundamental theorem.
17. Point the necessary conditions for optimal control.
3. I.J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International P.Ltd, New Delhi, 2011
11N018 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To understand the fundamentals of digital image processing and its formation
To get adequate knowledge about image transforms, image enhancement, image restoration, etc.,
To provide exposure on image coding techniques
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
275
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
Prerequetie(s)
Basics of Mathematics I, II and III
Basics of Computer science
Course Outcome(s)
As an outcome of completing the course, students will able to:
Summarize the fundamentals of digital image processing .
Solve the problems in image transforms and image enhancement .
Analyze the image restoration and image encoding techniques .
Assessment Pattern
S. No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I†
59 Test II† Model
Examination† Semester End Examination
1 Remember 10 10 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze / Evaluate 40 40 40 40
5 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. State image processing?
2. Define sampling and quantization.
3. Define pixels.
4. Quote Hadamard transform?
5. Define translation and periodicity.
6. Define histogram.
7. Match high pass filtering with low pass filtering?
8. State image shaping?
9. Define image restoration. 10. Point out the inverse filtering
11. State Differential Pulse Code Modulation?
Understand 1. Explain the image formation in the eye, brightness adaptation and discrimination.
2. Discuss the mechanics of filtering in spatial domain.
3. Illustrate the smoothing linear filters and order-static filters.
4. Express the properties of two dimensional Fourier transforms.
5. Summarize the Hadamard transform and discrete cosine transform.
6. Compute the DFT for the following sequence 2, 3, 4, 4 and find its Fourier spectrum.
† The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The
remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
276
7. Explain the types of degradation models.
8. Illustrate the unconstrained and constrained restorations.
9. Discuss the different types of encoding techniques.
10. Explain with examples how Huffman encoding process reduces coding redundancy.
Apply
1. Apply the process of histogram to an 8 – bit image of size 5x5 and get the output image that has the
specified histogram.
2. Explain the basic relationship and distance measures between the pixels in a digital image.
3. Sketch the frequency components of Fourier transform with the spatial variation in the gray levels of the image?
4. Produce a technique for updating the median as the center of the neighborhood is moved from pixel to
pixel?
5. Explain how the image get enhanced using low pass and high pass filtering techniques?
6. Examine the contra harmonic filter which is effective in salt and pepper noise when Q is negative?
7. Sketch the filter which gives poor results when the wrong polarity is chosen for Q?
8. Discover a general procedure for converting a gray-coded number to its binary equivalent for
9. 0111010100111?
10. Produce Huffman codes for a three-symbol source?
Analyze / Evaluate
1. Compare the relation between spatial domain and the frequency domain. 2. Determine the quantization step sizes of the sub bands for a JPEG 2000 encoded image in which implicit
quantization is used and 8 bits are allotted to the mantissa and exponent of the 2LL sub band.
3. Design a single intensity transformation function for spreading the intensities of an image so the lowest
intensity is 0 and the highest is L-1.
4. Can variable-length coding procedures be used to compress a histogram equalized image with 2n
intensity levels? Justify
5. Consider an 8-pixel line of intensity data, 108, 139, 135, 244, 172, 173, 56, 99. If it is uniformly
quantized with 4-bit accuracy, Detect the rms error and rms signal-to-noise ratios for the quantized data.
6. Develop a procedure for computing the median of an n x n neighborhood and propose a technique for
updating the median as the center of the neighborhood is moved from pixel to pixel.
7. Consider a checkerboard image in which each square is 1 x 1 mm. Assuming that the image extends
infinitely in both coordinate direction, Measure the minimum sampling rate required to avoid aliasing?
Create
1. Design the methods for updating the histogram used in the enhancement techniques.
Unit I
Digital Image Fundamentals
Elements of a digital image processing system – structure of the human eye – image formation and contrast
sensitivity – sampling and quantization – neighbors of a pixel – distance measures – photographic film structure and
exposure – linear scanner – video camera – image processing applications
Linear scanner
9 Hours
Unit II
Image Transforms
Introduction to Fourier transform – DFT – properties of two dimensional FT – separability, translation, periodicity,
rotation, average value – FFT algorithm – Walish transform – Hadamard transform – discrete cosine transform
neighborhood averaging – median filtering – low pass filtering – averaging of multiple images – image shaping by
differentiation and high passes filtering
Median filtering
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
277
9 Hours
Unit IV
Image Restoration
Definition – degradation model – discrete formulation – circulant matrices – block circulant matrices – effect of
diagnolization of circulant matrices – unconstrained and constrained restorations – inverse filtering – Wiener filter –
restoration in spatial domain.
Block circulant matrices
9 Hours
Unit V
Image Encoding
Objective and subjective fidelity criteria – basic encoding process – mapping – quantizer – coder – differential
encoding – run length encoding – image encoding relative to fidelity criterion – differential pulse code modulation.
Differential pulse code modulation
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, Digital Image Processing, Pearson Education New Delhi 2011
2. Anil K. Jain, Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing, PHI / Pearson Education New Delhi 2003
Reference(s)
1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, Digital Image Processing using Matlab, Pearson Education New Delhi 2009
2. Pratt, Digital Image Processing, John Wiley and Sons. USA 2011
11O008 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR AND MANAGEMENT
(Common to all branches)
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To enable the students to understand the perspectives of management.
To give an insight about the functions of management like planning, organizing, staffing, leading,
controlling.
To familiarize the students with organizational culture and help them to manage change.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
278
Course Outcome(s)
Select the best alternative by proper Decision making.
1. Classify the various kinds of organization.
2. Apply the leadership qualities in various fields
3. Understand the principles involved in the management to analyze the organizational behavior.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy (New Version)
Test 1 Test 2
Model Examination
Semester
End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 15 15
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10
6 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define management.
2. List the functions of managers.
3. What do you mean by policy?
4. What is staffing?
5. State the functions of attitude.
6. What is group dynamics?
7. Differentiate Strong from Weak cultures.
8. What is the role of change agent?
Understand 1. Describe the Evaluation of management.
2. Explain patterns of management Analysis.
3. Discuss the Planning Process.
4. Explain the process of formulating career strategy of an employee.
5. Compare and contrast Maslow‘s and Herzberg‘s motivation theory.
6. Describe the personality attributes influencing Organizational Behaviour.
7. Predict the problems involved in creating and sustaining an organizational culture.
8. Explain organization development intervention strategies.
Analyze / apply
1. If you were the chief executive officer of a large corporation, how would you ‗institutionalize‘ ethics in the organization?
2. ―Formal organization is the intentional structure of roles and informal organization is a network of
personal and social relations‖. Comment.
3. Design a performance appraisal matrix for a production Engineer.
4. Many other disciplines have contributed to the discipline of Organizational Behaviour. Justify.
5. Validate why values are important in understanding behaviour of people.
6. High cohesiveness in a group leads to higher group productivity. Comment.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
279
7. Construct a proforma for studying the satisfaction level of employees as influenced by the culture
of the organization.
8. Illustrate with an example, why change is an ongoing activity in an organization.
Evaluate / Create
1. Develop an advertisement for ―The Hindu‖ opportunity column inviting application from potential
candidates for the post of Director – Information Technology.
2. Your boss has got the impression that ―satisfied workers are productive workers‖ and has asked
you to study this out. In this regard. 3. Prepare a short report with your recommendations for your boss, based on your study.
Create
1. Create product and product design ideas by searching for consumer needs and screening the
various alternatives
Unit I
Management Overview
Management - Definition, nature and purpose, Evolution of management, patterns of management Analysis,
Functions of managers, management and society - Operation in a pluralistic society, Social
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
280
2. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009
11O0PA NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on nanoscience and technology.
To create an awareness on the nanomaterials.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with nanomaterials and their applications.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Summarize the behavior of nanomaterials, quantum phenomena and the limitations of basic physical laws
at the nano scale level.
Explain important mechanisms involved in the of synthesis and functionalization of nano-structured
materials.
Identify the origin of size effects to control the properties of nanomaterials.
Apply knowledge for modern and future engineering applications of nanomaterials.
Assessment Pattern
S.No Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define nanoscale.
2. Give the differences between nano and thin materials.
3. Give the usage of nanomaterials in medical field.
4. What are the techniques used to find properties of materials?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
281
5. What are the day-to-day life applications of nanomaterials?
6. What do you mean by total energy of the system?
7. What do you mean by top down and bottom up approach?
8. How physical properties vary while converting the material into nano size?
9. What is SWCNT and MWCNT?
10. What are the applications of CNT?
11. Mention the general characterization techniques of nanomaterials.
12. How electron microscopy differ from scanning electron microscopy?
13. Define diffraction. 14. Write the different diffraction techniques to analyse the properties of nanomaterials.
15. What is meant by surface analysis of nanomaterials?
16. What are quantum dots?
17. Write the importance of self assembly technique.
18. What is organic FET?
19. State the principle of LED.
20. Why nanomaterials are used as energy storage device?
21. Write the bio medical applications of nanomaterials.
22. List the advantages of nanomaterials as compared to bulk materials.
23. Which is having high efficiency among injection and quantum cascade laser?
24. Write the uses of FET. 25. What is nano magnet?
26. Mention the applications of nanomagnets in industries.
27. Write the advantages of nano robot in medical field.
Understand
1. How the nano dimension particle varies with bulk one?
2. Explain the different classifications of nanostructures.
3. Elucidate the significance of MWCNT over SWCNT.
4. Explain structural, electrical, mechanical properties of nanoscale materials.
5. What are the applications of CNT?
6. Why the electrical properties are more important as compared to other properties of nanomaterials?
7. How nanomaterials are produced by machining process?
8. Give the importance of vapor phase deposition method for the production of nanomaterials. 9. Explain the sol-gel technique of nanomaterial production.
10. How the nanomaterials are analyzed in scanning electron microscopic technique?
11. Elucidate how nanomaterials are produced by template method?
12. List the general classifications of characterization methods of nanomaterials.
13. Explain how FTIR is used to analyze the bonding in nanomaterials?
14. Why the TEM is widely used than SEM? Explain.
15. What are the advantages and disadvantages of TEM?
16. Explain the quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures.
17. Explain the different fabrication techniques of nanoscale materials.
18. Explicate in which way thermally annealed quantum well technique is better than epitaxial growth
technique? 19. Explain the electro statically induced quantum dots and quantum wire technique.
20. Why semi conducting nano material is more important than other nanomaterials?
21. What are the advantages of nanomagnetic materials?
22. How nanomaterials are used in organic FET?
23. Why the organic LEDs are manufactured from nanomaterials?
24. How nanomaterials are used in quantum cascade laser?
25. Why nano photo voltaic fuel cells are used?
26. Explain the bio medical applications of nanodevices.
Apply
1. Clarify the effects of nanometer length scale of particles.
2. Give the reason for the effect of nanoscale dimensions on various properties.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
282
3. Explain how the size of the particle will effect on their mechanical and structural properties of the material?
4. Why sol gel method is used widely to synthesis nanomaterials?
5. Templating method is better than physical vapor deposition method to synthesis nanomaterials. Why?
6. Why ordering of the nano system is more important? Give reason.
7. Explain how nanomaterials are characterized by imaging techniques?
8. Why diffraction techniques are used to characterize the nanomaterials?
9. Explain how nanomaterials are analyzed by transmission electron microscope?
10. Clarify the differences between self-assembly and self-organization.
11. Explain how organic light emitting diode overcomes the drawback of LCD? 12. How we can use CNT as a storage device in battery?
13. Why nanomaterials are used in optical memory devices?
14. How we can store nano particles?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Distinguish between SWCNT and MWCNT.
2. Compare organic FET and organic LED.
3. Why nano structured particles are found in potential applications?
4. Give the relation between properties and applications of nano particles.
5. Explain with relevant example about the synthesize of nano structured materials employing self-assembly
and template based methods.
6. Analyze the relation between magnetic and nanomaterials.
Unit I
Nano Scale Materials
Introduction-classification of nanostructures, nanoscale architecture – effects of the nanometer length scale –
changes to the system total energy, changes to the system structures– effect of nanoscale dimensions on various
Differences between bulk and nanomaterials and their physical properties.
9 Hours
Unit II
Nanomaterials Synthesis Methods
Fabrication methods – top down processes – milling, litho graphics, machining process – bottom-up process – vapor
phase deposition methods, plasma-assisted deposition process, colloidal and solgel methods – methods for
templating the growth of nanomaterials – ordering of nanosystems, self-assembly and self-organization.
Magnetron sputtering process to obtain nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit III
Nano Characterization Techniques
General classification of characterization methods – analytical and imaging techniques – microscopy techniques -
electron microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, transmission electron microscopy, atomic force microscopy – diffraction techniques – spectroscopy techniques-X-ray spectroscopy.
Electrical properties of nanomaterials.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Inorganic Semiconductor Nanostructures
Quantum confinement in semiconductor nanostructures - quantum wells, quantum wires, quantum dots, super
Applications of nano materials in biological field.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley and
Sons Ltd, 2005.
2. T. Pradeep, NANO: The Essentials Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw – Hill
Education (India) Ltd, 2007.
3. Handbook of Nanoscience, Engineering and Technology, Kluwer publishers, 2002.
4. B. Wang, Drug Delivery: Principles and Applications,Wiley Interscience 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Michael Kohler, Wolfgang Fritzsche, Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Nanostructuring Techniques,
Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.2004. 2. William Goddard, Donald .W.Brenner, Handbook of Nano Science Engineering and Technology, CRC
Press, 2004.
3. Bharat Bhushan, Springer Handbook of Nanotechnology, 2004.
4. Charles P Poole, Frank J Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.
5. Mark Ratner, Daniel Ratner, Nanotechnology: A Gentle Introduction to the Next Big Idea, Prentice Hall,
2003.
11O0PB LASER TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on laser principles.
To create expertise on the applications of laser in various engineering fields.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with generation and applications of laser in various
engineering fields.
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Summarize the principle, theory, operations and types of laser.
Invrstigate the various techniques involved in the laser materials and the performance of laser.
Apply different types of lasers for day to day applications.
Interpret the applications of lasers towards industrial and medical fields.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
284
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is a laser? How the basic laser action is achieved?
2. Distinguish between spontaneous emission and stimulated emission.
3. What is population inversion?
4. Mention the important characteristics of laser.
5. How four level laser is more efficient than the three level laser?
6. What is a resonant cavity?
7. What role does an optical resonant cavity play in a laser?
8. What are the host materials for solid lasers?
9. Mention the different techniques involved in lasers.
10. Define atmospheric effect.
11. How will you measure the distance using laser? 12. What is the basic principle behind the holography?
13. Mention the medical applications of lasers.
Understand
1. Write the conditions needed for laser action.
2. What is meant by pumping of atoms?
3. How optical excitation occurs in three level lasers?
4. What is the principle of laser action? 5. Compare the activator and host materials for solid lasers.
6. Distinguish between Czochralski and Kyropoulous techniques.
7. How will you determine the velocity of laser source?
8. List the applications of laser in welding and cutting.
9. Why laser is called as non-material knife?
Apply
1. The first line of the principal series of sodium is the D line at 580 nm. This corresponds to a transition from
the first excited state (3p) to the ground state (3s). What is the energy in electron volts of the first excited
state?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
285
2. What is the ratio of the stimulated emission and spontaneous emission at a temperature of 250oC for the
sodium D line?
3. Calculate the threshold condition for the ruby laser in which the appropriate parameters are as follows: νo
4. A He-Ne laser emits light at a wavelength of 632.8 nm and has an output power of 2.3mW. How many
photons are emitted in each minute by this laser when operating?
5. Calculate the wavelength of emission from a GaAs semiconductor laser whose band gap energy is 1.44 eV.
Analyze
1. Why laser beam should be monochromatic?
2. How the population inversion happening in lasers?
3. Write the reaction for eximer laser action.
4. Which method is used to achieve population inversion in a dye laser?
5. Why we cannot use ordinary light source for LIDAR?
6. How the optical disk data storage plays a vital role in computer memory storages?
Evaluate
1. The life time of the excited state (2p) for spontaneous emission is 1.6x 10-9s. The energy difference between the excited state (2p) and the ground state (2s) is 10.2eV. Find the value of stimulated emission
coefficient during a transition from an excited state (2p) to the ground state.
2. A laser beam can be focused on an area equal to the square of its wavelength (λ2). For a He-Ne laser, λ =
6328Ǻ. If the laser radiates energy at the rate of 1mW, find the intensity of the focused beam.
3. Transition occurs between a metastable state E3 and an energy state E2 just above the ground state. If
emission is at 1.1μm and E2= 0.4x10-19J, find the energy of the E3 state.
2. K. R. Nambiar,Lasers: Principles Types And Applications , New Age International Publications, 2006.
3. AlphanSennaroglu, Solid-State Lasers and Applications,CRC Press, 2006
4. Bela A Lengyel, Introduction to Laser Physics, John Wiley and Sons, 1966.
11O0PC Electro Optic Materials
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on electro-optic materials.
To develop fundamental understanding of various electro-optic materials in communication.
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Summarize the mechanism involved in the laser action.
Explain birefringence and optical property of the materials.
Classify the special optical properties of the opto electronic systems.
Design electro optic modulators for day to day applications.
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
287
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define laser action. 2. Give the properties of LASER.
3. Differentiate between stimulated and spontaneous emissions.
4. Define continuous and discrete time signals.
5. Define anisotropic media.
6. What is an acoustic optic effect?
7. Define a liquid crystal.
8. Mention the different types of polarizing devices.
9. Give examples for direct and indirect band gap materials.
10. Highlight the usage of a NLO material.
Understand
1. How the population inversion state in laser is achieved? 2. Give examples for continuous and discrete time signals.
3. Elucidate the importance of coherence in laser action.
4. Why birefringence property in an optical material is formed?
5. In which effect KDP crystal is working?
6. How the codirectional coupling occurs?
7. List out the conditions in which the NLO property of a material emerges.
8. What is the purpose of switching to quantum mechanics from classical mechanics?
9. Why we prefer LCD displays rather than CRT displays?
10. What are the advantages of injection laser diode?
Apply
1. Find the intensity of a laser beam of 10mW power and having a diameter of 1.3 mm. Assume the
intensity to be uniform across the beam. Given: P=10mW, d= 1.3 mm. 2. Discuss the three level pumping scheme for laser action.
3. Why is the optical resonator required in lasers?
4. Where can we find the practical applications of wave plates?
5. How to elevate the contrast ratio in display devices which uses in the nematic structures?
6. Non linearity in glasses occurs. Justify the argument.
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare ordinary and laser light properties.
2. Differentiate wave refractive index and ray refractive index.
3. Differentiate longitudinal and transverse electro optic effects.
4. Bring out the importance of electro optic devices.
Unit I
Basics of Lasers
Introduction – Einstein coefficients – laser beam characteristics – spontaneous and stimulated emission population inversion - light amplification – threshold condition – laser rate equations – two level laser – three level laser –
1. Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, Optical electronics, Cambridge University Press, 7th reprint 2006.
2. B. Somanathan Nair, Electronic devices and applications, Prentice - Hall of India private limited, 2010. 3. Frank L. Pedrotti, S. J. Leno S. Pedrotti and Leno M. Pedrotti, Introduction to optics, Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. Ji - ping Huang and K.M.Yu, New Non Linear Optical Materials, Nova, Science Publishers, 2007.
3. R .W. Munn (Ed) and C. N. Ironsid, Molecular crystals, Blackie Academic & Professional, Glassgow, 1993.
11O0PD VACUUM SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart a sound knowledge on the vacuum science.
To develop the necessary background to perform projects involving vacuum and deposition techniques.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
289
At the end of the course the students are familiar with the various vacuum deposition technologies
employed in the various engineering fields.
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics, management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, computer programming and engineering.
Summarize the fundamentals of vacuum technology.
Analyze the various measuring instruments in order to measure vacuum.
Compare the components used for generating low and ultra high vacuum.
Assessment Pattern
Remember
1. Define the term mean free path. 2. Give the pressure ranges of low and medium vacuum.
3. State Avogadro‘s law.
4. List out the assumptions of kinetic theory.
5. What are the types of pump used to create vacuum?
6. What are the gauges that are used to measure the vacuum?
7. Name the direct reading gauges and indirect reading gauges.
8. Name the operation limits of penning gauge.
9. Name the ultra high vacuum gauges.
10. List out the methods of leak detection.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
290
11. Give the importance of baffles and traps.
12. Mention the gauges that can measure ultra high vacuum.
13. Define throughput.
14. Give the Ohm‘s law of vacuum technology.
15. Name the sorbent materials that have widespread use in vacuum production.
Understand
1. How will you measure the pumping speed in a vacuum unit?
2. How will you seal the substance outside to maintain high vacuum?
3. Why does constant volume method have the disadvantage in measuring the pumping speed? 4. Differentiate between the pirani gauge and penning gauge.
5. Differentiate the primary gauges from secondary gauges.
6. How is the pumping speed measured?
7. How does a rotary pump produce a low pressure?
8. Derive the relation between the effective pumping speed and conductance of the evacuation pipe.
9. Explain the designing of UHV evacuation systems.
10. How are the vacuum surfaces cleaned?
Apply
1. How will you deposit the material from the plasma etching method?
2. Why is cold cathode ionization gauges preferred to hot cathode gauges?
3. Explain the applications of turbomolecular pump. 4. A vacuum chamber has a volume of 100 litres and an operating gas load of 7.5 x 10-5 torr-lites/sec. The
desired operating pressure is 7.5 x 10-8 Torr. Connections between the chamber and diffusion pump and
the diffusion pump and rotary pump are to meet good design practice (assume SE/SD=1/5). Calculate the
pumping speed at the chamber, the minimum connecting pipe conductance and the minimum speed
required for the backing pump together with the minimum diffusion pump speed required to meet these
requirements.
5. Surface to volume ratio plays a major role in pumping systems. Why?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Why is the diffusion pump widely used in scientific instruments?
2. Oil diffusion pump system can be used as a high vacuum pumping system. Why?
3. Compare real and virtual leaks.
Unit I
Vacuum Systems
Introduction – units of vacuum – kinetic aspects of gases in a vacuum chamber – physical parameters at low
pressures – classification of vacuum ranges – gas flow at low pressures – throughput and pumping speed –
flow rate and conductance.
Evacuation rate – out gassing – gas flow – turbulent flow.
9 Hours
Unit II
Production of Vacuum Classification of vacuum pumps – rotary vane pumps – roots blowers – diffusion pumps – molecular drag and turbo-
molecular pumps – sorption pumps – gettering and ion pumping – cryopumping measurement of pumping speed.
Noble pumps for inert gases.
9 Hours
Unit III
Pressure Measurement
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
291
Classification of gauges – mechanical gauges – McLeod gauge – thermal conductivity gauges – Hot cathode
To develop the necessary understanding of semiconducting materials and their applications.
At the end of the course the students are familiar with various semiconducting materials and their
applications
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Summarize the mechanism involved in semiconductors..
Implement the features of transistors for day to day applications.
Design semiconducting devices for industrial applications.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
292
Assessment Pattern
S.No
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test 1
Test 2
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 20 20
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 15 15
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors? 2. Explain the Kronig-Penny model.
3. Define drift current density.
4. What is meant by breakdown?
5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode. 6. Define temperature effect.
7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor?
8. Define current crowding.
9. What are optoelectronic devices?
10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
Understand
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?
2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with increase in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
5. What do you understand by the term ―holes‖ in a semiconductor? Explain how they move under the
influence of electric field. 6. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode?
7. How the solar cell is functioning?
Apply
1. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?
2. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
3. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor.
4. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
5. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction and indicate how population
inversion occurs.
Analyze/ Evaluate 1. What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semi conductor?
2. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
3. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
293
4. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation between two adjacent resonant
modes is ∆λ=λ2/2L.
Unit I
Properties of Semiconductor
Energy bands – allowed and forbidden energy bands – Kronig Penny model – electrical conductivity in solids based
on energy bands - band model – electron effective mass – concept of holes in semiconductor – density of states –
extension to semiconductors.
k-space diagram.
9 Hours
Unit II
Carrier Transport Properties
Carrier drift – drift current density – mobility effects on carrier density – conductivity in semiconductor – carrier transport by diffusion – diffusion current density – total current density – breakdown phenomena – avalanche
breakdown.
Graded Impurity Distribution.
9 Hours
Unit III
P-N Junction Diode
Qualitative description of charge flow in p-n junction – boundary condition – minority carrier distribution – ideal p-
n junction current – temperature effects – applications – the turn on transient and turn off transient.
Charge storage and diode Transients.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Bipolar Junction Transistor
Introduction to basic principle of operation – the modes of operation – amplification – minority carrier distribution
in forward active mode – non-ideal effects – base with modulation – high injection emitter band gap narrowing –
current clouding – breakdown voltage – voltage in open emitter configuration and open base configuration
Frequency Limitations.
9Hours
Unit V
Opto Electronic Devices
Optical absorption in a semiconductor, photon absorption coefficient – electron hole pair generation - solar cell –
homo junction and heterojunction - Photo transistor – laser diode, the optical cavity, optical absorption, loss and gain - threshold current.
Photoluminescence and Electroluminescence.
9 Hours
Total 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, “Semiconductor physics and devices”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
2. Albert Malvino,David JBafes, “Electronic Principles”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007
Reference(s)
1. Kevin F Brennan, The Physics of Semiconductors, Cambridge University Press, 1999.
2. MichealShur, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Prentice Hall of India, 1999.
3. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics Physics and Technology, McGraw Hill Co., 1998.
11O0YA POLYMER CHEMISTRY AND PROCESSING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
294
To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of polymer science, chemistry of polymers and
its processing.
To make understand the principles and applications of advanced polymer materials.
Knowledge and application of different polymers and its processing.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Summarize the of principles of polymer chemistry and mechanism of polymerization
reactions.
Compare the polymerization techniques.
Apply the contextual knowledge of polymer additives and polymer processing in industrial
application.
Assessment pattern
S.No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What properties are desirable in semiconductors?
2. Explain the Kronig-Penny model.
3. Define drift current density.
4. What is meant by breakdown?
5. Explain the minority carrier distribution in p-n junction diode.
6. Define temperature effect.
7. What is the basic principle of bipolar junction transistor? 8. Define current crowding.
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
295
9. What are optoelectronic devices?
10. Describe the operation of a laser diode.
Understand
1. How does conductivity of a semiconductor change with rise in its temperature?
2. How does the thickness of the depletion layer in a p-n junction vary with increase in reverse bias?
3. How does the energy gap in an intrinsic semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent impurity?
4. Explain the mobility effects on carrier density.
5. What do you understand by the term ―holes‖ in a semiconductor? Explain how they move under the
influence of electric field. 6. What is the a.c response of the p-n diode?
7. How the solar cell is functioning?
Apply
6. In general what is the relation between density of states and energy?
7. What is meant by the term, doping of an intrinsic semiconductor?
8. Give the ratio of the number of holes and the number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic semiconductor.
9. Write the function of base region of a bipolar junction transistor.
10. Sketch the energy bands of a forward-biased degenerately doped pn junction and indicate how population
inversion occurs.
Analyze/ Evaluate
5. What types of charge-carriers are there in a n-type semi conductor?
6. What are the disadvantages of using laser diode?
7. What are the defect levels in semiconductors?
8. Consider an optical cavity. If N>>1, show that the wavelength separation between two adjacent resonant
modes is ∆λ=λ2/2L.
Unit I
Principles of Polymer Science
Polymerization reactions - types – examples - degree of polymerization and average molecular weights. Thermoplastics and thermosetting resins - examples. Electrical - mechanical - thermal properties related to chemical
examples and applications in industrial processing.
Ecofriendly sustainable additives.
9 Hours
Unit V
Polymer Processing
Compression – injection - extrusion and blow mouldings. Film casting - calendering. Thermoforming and vacuum
formed polystyrene, foamed polyurethanes. Fibre spinning - melt, dry and wet spinning. Composite fabrication -
hand-layup - filament winding and pultrusion.
Application of fibre reinforced plastics.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. V. R. Gowarikar, N. V. Viswanathan and Jayadev Sreedhar, Polymer Science, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2003.
2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall of India (P). Ltd., 2005.
Reference(s)
1. F. W. Billmeyer, Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007.
2. Barbara H. Stuart, Polymer Analysis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002.
3. George Odian , Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2004.
4. R. J. Young and P. A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Nelson Thornes Ltd., 2002.
11O0YB ENERGY STORING DEVICES AND FUEL CELLS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To make students understand the concept and working of different types of batteries and to analyze
batteries used in electric vehicles.
To make students learn about the concept of fuel cells, its types and to relate the factors of energy and
environment.
Students develop the skill of analyzing various energy storing devices and fuel cells at the end of the
semester.
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
297
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Compare the various energy storing devices.
Analyze the working of different types of primary and secondary batteries.
Apply the knowledge for development of eco friendly energy sources.
Assessment Pattern
S.No. Bloom’s Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 10 10
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 30 30 30 30
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are dry cells?
2. What are alkaline batteries?
3. State Ohms law.
4. Write the functions of ultra-capacitor.
5. Is lead acid battery thermodynamically reversible cell?
6. Differentiate between electrochemical and electrolytic cells. 7. Name the electrolyte present in the Li battery.
8. Mention the role of heart pacemaker in cardiology.
9. Classify the types of fuel cell.
10. Differentiate between diode and electrode.
11. What is meant by redox reaction?
12. What are the advantages of H2-O2 fuel cell?
13. Name the factors which are affecting the efficiency of fuel cell.
14. What are eco-friendly cell?
Understand
The marks secured in the Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
298
1. How do you assess the life cycle of fuel cells?
2. What is the role of impurities in photovoltaic cells?
3. How do you convert the chemical energy into electrical energy?
4. Suggest any two secondary storage devices for automobiles.
5. What types of cells are used in space applications?
6. Construct the alkaline fuel cell.
7. How do you harvest the energy from tides?
8. What are natural geysers?
9. Differentiate between photo electrochemical and photovoltaic cells.
Apply
1. What are passive solar heat collectors?
2. What are active solar heat collectors?
3. Lithium battery is the cell of future - Justify.
4. Write the anodic reaction and cathodic reactions of NICAD battery.
5. Is the dry cell follows thermodynamic reversibility rule?
6. What types of vehicles typically use methanol?
7. What are the economic impacts of using hybrid electric vehicles?
Analyze / Evaluate 1. How does a fuel cell differ from traditional methods of energy generation (like batteries)?
2. What are the feedstocks can be used to make biodiesel?
3. What is DuPont‘s experience in fuel cells?
4. How the biomass is converted into biofuel?
5. What are the effects of gasoline and ethanol emissions on the environment?
6. What are the effects of diesel and biodiesel emissions on the environment?
7. How do you obtain ethanol from lignocellulosic biomass?
silver oxide batteries-Recycling/Safe disposal of used cells.
Document the various batteries and its characteristics used in mobile phones and lap tops.
9 Hours
Unit II
Batteries for Electric Vehicles Secondary batteries- Introduction, cell reactions, cell representations and applications- lead acid, nickel-cadmium
and lithium ion batteries - rechargeable zinc alkaline battery. Reserve batteries: Zinc-silver oxide, lithium anode cell,
photogalvanic cells. Battery specifications for cars and automobiles.
Development of batteries for satellites.
9 Hours
Unit III
Types of Fuel Cells Importance and classification of fuel cells - description, working principle, components, applications and
environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells: alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide, molten
carbonate and direct methanol fuel cells.
Fuel cells for space applications.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Hydrogen as a Fuel
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
299
Sources of hydrogen – production of hydrogen- electrolysis- photo catalytic water splitting – biomass pyrolysis -gas
clean up – methods of hydrogen storage- high pressurized gas -liquid hydrogen type -metal hydride – hydrogen as
engine fuel – features, application of hydrogen technologies in the future- limitations.
Cryogenic fuels.
9 Hours
Unit V
Energy and Environment
Future prospects-renewable energy and efficiency of renewable fuels – economy of hydrogen energy – life cycle
assessment of fuel cell systems. Solar Cells: Energy conversion devices, photovoltaic and photo electrochemical cells – photo biochemical conversion cell.
Bio-fuels from natural resources.
9 Hours Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan, Fuel Cells: Principles and Applications, University Press,
India, 2006.
2. F. Barbir, PEM fuel cells: Theory and practice,Elsevier, Burlington, MA, 2005.
3. M. R. Dell Ronald and A. J. David, Understanding Batteries, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001.
Reference(s) 1. M. A. Christopher Brett, Electrochemistry: Principles, Methods and Applications, Oxford University, 2004.
2. J. S. Newman and K. E. Thomas-Alyea, Electrochemical Systems, Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2004.
4. Lindon David, Handbook of Batteries, McGraw Hill, 2002.
5. H. A. Kiehne , Battery Technology Hand Book,. Expert Verlag , Renningen Malsheim, 2003.
11O0YC CHEMISTRY OF NANOMATERIALS
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge on the basic concepts and importance of nanochemistry including synthesis.
To make students understand the principles and applications of nanomaterials.
Knowledge about the characterization and applications of nanomaterials.
Programme Outcome
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
300
Explain the fundamentals of nanoscience and technology .
Acquire comprehensive knowledge in the synthetic methods for the nanoparticles preparation .
Get strong foundation in the properties of nanoparticles which give contextual knowledge for their higher
research programmes .
Assessment Pattern
Remember
1. What do you mean by nano?
2. Define nanotechnology. 3. Define nanoscience.
4. Define top down and bottom up approach.
5. Define nanostructured material. Classify nanomaterials and give examples for them.
6. List any four day to day commercial applications of nanotechnology.
7. Write down any four challenges that are faced by researchers in nanotechnology.
8. Define carbon nanotube.
9. Define bucky ball.
10. Define nanocomposite. What are the types of nanocomposites?
11. List any four material characterization techniques.
12. List any four bottom up approaches for the synthesis of nanopowders.
13. What is biomimetic approach? 14. Explain Feynman‘s statement.
15. What is the dimension of quantum dot?
16. Explain the principle behind lithography.
17. Mention the different types of lithography.
18. What is meant by photolithography?
19. Explain the principle behind vapour phase deposition.
20. What is meant by chemical vapour deposition?
21. Explain sputtering.
22. What is meant by plasma enhanced CVD?
23. What is meant by bubblers?
24. Explain the principle behind MOVPE.
25. What are colloids? 26. What is nanosafety?
27. What is meant by surface induced effect?
28. How are nanomaterials defined?
29. What are the uses of nanoparticles in consumer products?
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
S.No.
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version) Test I
Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 15 15
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
301
Understand
1. What is the difference between nanoscience and nanotechnology?
2. When and where Feynman delivered his lecture on nanotechnology and what is the name of his classical
lecture?
3. What are the induced effects due to increase in surface area of nanoparticles?
4. What are the advantages and disadvantages in mechanical synthesis of nanopowders?
5. What are the characteristics of nanoparticles that should be possesed by any fabrication technique?
6. On what principle mechanical milling is based on?
7. How is LPE used to obtain nanowire or nanorods? 8. How is the template used to obtain nanowire or nanorods?
9. What is the role of nanotechnology in water purification?
10. Differentiate self-assembly from self-organisation.
11. How nanoparticles are stored?
12. List the important physical and chemical properties of nanomaterials?
13. How are nanomaterials detected and analysed?
14. How are nanomaterials prepared for biological testing?
15. What are the physical and chemical properties of nanoparticles?
16. How are nanoparticles formed?
17. Discuss the health effects of nanoparticles?
Apply 1. Why do we want nanotechnology in our life?
2. What is the role of nanotechnology in medicinal field?
3. Expand AFM.
4. What is the grain size range of nanostructure materials?
5. Differentiate top-down from bottom-up approach needed for nanosynthesis.
6. Why do nanostructured particles find potential applications?
7. How nanostructured particles are used in health applications?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. Compare the relative merits of chemical, physical, biological and hybrid methods for the preparation of
nanomaterials. 2. Compare the relative merits of the usage of photons and particles in lithography.
3. Differentiate glow discharge from RF sputtering.
4. How can we reduce/save our energy resources by using nanotechnology?
5. What is the relation between properties and applications of nanoparticles?
6. What is the current status of nanoscience and nanotechnology?
7. What are the potential harmful effects of nanoparticles?
Unit I
Nanoworld
Introduction – History of nanomaterials – concepts of nanomaterials – size and confinement effects – nanoscience –
Harnessing nanotechnology for economic and social development.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. C N R Rao, Nanoworld – An Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology, Jawaharlal Nehru centre for
advanced scientific research, Bangalore, India, 2010.
2. C N R Rao, A Muller and A K Cheetham, The Chemistry of Nanomaterials: Synthesis, Properties and Applications, Vol. 1 & 2, John-Wiley and Sons, 2005.
3. T Pradeep, Nano: The Essentials, Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, 1st Edn., Tata Mcgraw
Hill publishing company, 2007.
Reference(s)
1. Geoffrey A Ozin, André C Arsenault , Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, Royal
Society of Chemistry, 2009.
2. G B Sergeev, Nanochemistry, 1st Edn.,Elsevier, 2006.
3. S Chen, Functional Nanomaterials: A Chemistry and Engineering Perspective (Nanostructure Science And
Technology), Springer,2010.
4. Yury Gogotsi, Nanomaterials Handbook, Taylor and Francis group, USA, 2006.
11O0YD CORROSION SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING
3 0 0 3.0
Objective(s)
To impart knowledge about the various types of corrosion and its mechanism.
To make students understand the various methods of corrosion control, corrosion testing and monitoring.
Students acquire the basic knowledge about corrosion and its control.
Programme Outcome
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
303
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
Explain the fundamentals of corrosion science and technology.
Identify, formulate and solve corrosion based problems .
Summarize the procedure for designing of engineering products with corrosion protective mode.
Get strong foundations in the analytical part of corrosion science which give contextual knowledge to
their higher research programmes
Assessment Pattern
S.No.
Bloom’s
Taxonomy
(New Version)
Test I Test II
Model
Examination
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 25 25 15 15
2 Understand 25 25 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 20 20 20 20
5 Evaluate 10 10 20 20
6 Create - - - -
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is corrosion? What are the types of corrosion?
2. Define dry corrosion. Explain the mechanism.
3. Explain the mechanism of electrochemical corrosion.
The marks secured in Test I and II will be converted to 20 and Model Examination will be converted to 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly internal assessment will be calculated for
50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
304
4. What are the units to measure corrosion rate?
5. Galvanic corrosion. Discuss.
6. Describe the Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their limitations.
7. List out the different forms of corrosion. Explain.
8. What are inhibitors?
9. Explain the mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation and its types.
10. Write the working principle of Tafel polarization techniques.
11. How polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
12. Define cathodic protection. List its types. 13. What are non-electrochemical and electrochemical methods of corrosion testing and monitoring?
14. What is Tafel linear polarization?
Understand
1. Explain why corrosion rate of metal is faster in aqueous solution than atmosphere air?
2. What are the factors influencing the corrosion rate? Explain.
3. Discuss the Pilling-Bedworth rule.
4. Differentiate between electrochemical and dry corrosion.
5. How inhibitors are used to protect the corrosion rate of the metal? Explain.
6. What are consequences of Pilling-Bedworth ratio?
7. List the difference between filliform corrosion and pitting corrosion.
Apply 1. Compare the effects of corrosion products.
2. Why pitting corrosion is localized corrosion? Explain.
3. Describe alternatives to protective coatings.
4. Identify different forms of corrosion in the metal surface.
5. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals.
6. What are the measures to be taken to reduce corrosion fatiques?
7. What are the major implications of enhanced techniques of corrosion product analysis?
Analyze/ Evaluate
1. List reasons why it is important to study of corrosion.
2. How Tafel polarization and impedance techniques used to measure the corrosion products?
3. Explain how we could reduce corrosion of metals?
Unit I
Introduction to Corrosion
Importance and cost of corrosion – spontaneity of corrosion – passivation - importance of corrosion prevention in
various industries - the direct and indirect loss of corrosion- galvanic corrosion: area relationship in both active and
passive states of metals - Pilling Bed worth ratio and its consequences - units of corrosion rate - mdd and mpy -
importance of pitting factor - Pourbaix digrams of Mg, Al and Fe and their advantages and disadvantages.
Corrosion of metals by other gases.
9 Hours
Unit II
Forms of Corrosion
Different forms of corrosion - uniform corrosion-galvanic corrosion, crevice corrosion, pitting corrosion,
intergranular corrosion, selective leaching, erosion corrosion, stress corrosion- high temperature oxidation, kinetics of protective film formation and catastrophic oxidation corrosion.
Industrial boiler corrosion, cathodic and anodic inhibitors
corrosion. Mechanisms of various corrosion scale formation - thick layer and thin layer - insitu corrosion scale
analysis.
Analyze the rust formation in mild steel using weight loss method
9 Hours
Unit IV
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
305
Cathodic and Anodic Protection Engineering
Fundamentals of cathodic protection - types of cathodic protection systems and anodes. Life time calculations -
rectifier selection. Stray current corrosion problems and its prevention. Coating for various cathodic protection
system and their assessment- inhibitors - corrosion of steels. Anodic protection-Design for corrosion control.
Role of paints and pigments to protect the corrosive environment
9 Hours
Unit V
Corrosion Testing and Monitoring
Corrosion testing and monitoring - electrochemical methods of polarization- Tafel extrapolation polarization, linear polarization, impedance techniques-Weight loss method - susceptibility test – testing for intergranular susceptibility
and stress corrosion.
Analyze the instruments for monitoring the corrosion.
9 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Zaki Ahmad, Principles of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion Control, Elsevier Science and
Technology Books, 2006.
2. R. Winstone Revie and Herbert H. Uhlig, Corrosion and Corrosion Control: An Introduction to Corrosion
Science and Engineering, John Wiley & Science, 2008.
3. Mars G. Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, Singapore, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. ASM Hand Book, Vol. 13, Corrosion, ASM International, 2005.
2. Pierre R. Roberge, Hand Book of Corrosion Engineering, McGraw Hill, New York, 2000.
3. Denny A. Jones, Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall Inc., 2004.
4. A.W. Peabody, Control of Pipeline Corrosion, NACE International, Houston, 2001.
11O001 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT I
3 0 0 3.0
Course Objective(s)
To gain knowledge on basics of Entrepreneurship
To gain knowledge of business entity, source of capital and financially evaluate the project
To gain knowledge on production and manufacturing system.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
Course Outcome(s)
1. Develop the entrepreneurial thinking .
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
306
2. Acquire Innovative ideas and understand the legal aspects to develop business
3. Understand the finance and cash flow for planning operations
Assessment pattern
S. No. Test I† Test II
†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 20 20 20 20
2 Understand 20 20 20 20
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Evaluate 20 20 20 20
6 Create 10 10 10 10
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is entrepreneurship?
2. What are the factors that motivate people to go into business?
3. Define a small-scale industry.
4. Define tiny industry.
5. Who is an intrapreneur?
6. State functions of SISI.
7. What is serial entrepreneur?
8. What is Technopreneurship?
9. What is reversal method?
10. What is brainstorming?
11. What do you mean by term business idea?
12. Mention any two schemes Indian government provides to the development of entrepreneurship. 13. What is a project report?
14. What is project scheduling?
15. Mention any four techniques available for project scheduling.
16. What is contract act?
17. Define MOU.
18. What are al the types of sources of finance for an entrepreneur?
19. Mention any five external sources of finance to an entrepreneur.
20. Classify the financial needs of an organization.
21. What is short term finance?
22. What is return on capital?
23. What is capital budgeting? 24. What is product design?
25. What is quality council?
26. What is inventory?
27. What is lean manufacturing?
Understand
1. Why is entrepreneurship important of growth of a nation?
2. Mention the essential quality required for someone to be an entrepreneur.
3. Why is motivational theories important for an entrepreneur?
†The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly
internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
307
4. How is network analysis helpful to the development of an entrepreneur?
5. Mention the essential requirements for a virtual capital.
6. How under-capitalization affects an entrepreneur.
7. Differentiate proprietorship and partnership.
8. Mention the causes of dissolution of a firm.
9. How important is the support of IDBI to an entrepreneur?
10. What are the salient features of New Small Enterprise Policy, 1991?
11. Why scheduling is very important for a production design?
Apply / Evaluate
1. If you want to become as an entrepreneur, what will be your idea?
2. Select any one of the creative idea generation method and suggest an innovation that you can implement in
your business.
3. Write a short notes on various legal aspects that you have to consider to run you business.
4. How will you generate you capital and other financial supports?
5. In case of getting enough financial support, plan your business and plot the various stages using any of the
tools or techniques.
Create
1. Draft a sample project report for your business. 2. Do a network analysis using PERT and CPM for your business plan.
3. Write a brief report to apply to a financial organization for seeking financial support to your business.
Unit I
Basics of Entrepreneurship
Entrepreneurship Competence, Entrepreneurship as a career, Intrapreneurship, Social entrepreneurship, Serial
entrepreneurship (Cases), Technopreneurship.
Entrepreneurial Motivation
6 Hours
Unit II
Generation of Ideas
Creativity and Innovation (Cases), Lateral thinking, Generation of alternatives (Cases), Fractionation, Reversal Method, Brain storming
Utilization of Patent Databases
8 Hours
Unit III
Legal Aspects of Business
Contract Act, Sale of Goods Act, Negotiable Instruments – Promissory Note, Bills and Cheques, Partnership,
Limited Liability Partnership (LLP), Companies Act – Kinds, Formation, Memorandum of Association, Articles of
Association (Cases).
Business Plan Writing
10 Hours
Unit IV
Business Finance
Project evaluation and investment criteria (Cases), Sources of finance, Financial statements, Break even analysis,
Cash flow analysis.
Calculation of Return on Investment
11 Hours
Unit V
Operations Management
Importance – Functions –Deciding on the production system – Facility decisions: Plant location, Plant Layout
Evolve the marketing mix for promoting the product / services
Handle the human resources and taxation
Understand Government industrial policies / support provided and prepare a business plan.
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
PO9 Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in multidisciplinary teams.
PO10 Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and with
society at large, such as being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation,
make effective presentations and give and receive clear instructions.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
309
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome
1. Understand the marketing and human resource management to enhance the business.
2. Classify various business taxation
3. Understand the government support for business plan preparation
Assessment pattern
S. No. Test I† Test II
†
Model
Examination†
Semester End
Examination
1 Remember 30 30 30 30
2 Understand 30 30 25 25
3 Apply 20 20 20 20
4 Analyze 10 10 10 10
5 Evaluate 10 10 10 10
6 Create -- -- 05 05
Total 100 100 100 100
Remember
1. Who are Fabian Entrepreneur?
2. Explain the Views on Schumpeter on Entrepreneurship?
3. Mention the three functions of NSIC?
4. Narrate the role of IDBI in the development of Entrepreneurship?
5. What are Project COURSE OBJECTIVES (COs)? 6. What are the stages in a Project Lifecycle?
7. Give the meaning of Feasibility Report?
8. Explain the objective of Entrepreneurial Training?
9. What is Motivating Training?
10. Who is a Small Scale Entrepreneur?
11. How to develop Rural Entrepreneur?
12. What are the Social Problems of Women Entrepreneur?
13. Differentiate between entrepreneur and entrepreneurship.
14. What are the types of entrepreneurs?
15. Explain the various qualities of entrepreneur.
16. Briefly explain the different merchant castes in India.
17. What is entrepreneurship training? 18. Discuss any three programmes supporting women entrepreneurs.
19. Write a note on the role of NISIET.
20. What are the challenges and opportunities available in SSI's?
Understand
1. Narrate any six differences between a Manager and an Entrepreneur?
2. Explain briefly various types of Entrepreneur?
3. What are the elements of EDP?
4. What is the role played the commercial banks in the development of Entrepreneur?
† The marks secured Test I and Test II will be converted to a maximum of 20 and Model Examination will be
converted to a maximum of 20. The remaining 10 marks will be calculated based on assignments. Accordingly
internal assessment will be calculated for 50 marks.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
310
5. How would you Classify Projects?
6. What are the stages in project Formulation?
7. What are the target groups of EDP?
8. What are the major problems faced by Small Entrepreneur?
9. What are the problems & prospects for women entrepreneur in India?
Apply / Evalute
1. Describe the various functions performed by Entrepreneurs?
2. Explain the role of different agencies in the development of Entrepreneur? 3. Discuss the criteria for selecting a particular project?
4. Describe the role of Entrepreneur in the Development of Country?
5. Define business idea. Elaborate the problems and opportunities for an entrepreneur.
6. Elaborate the schemes offered by Commercial banks for development of entrepreneurship.
7. Explain the significant role played by DIC & SISI for the development of entrepreneurship.
8. Design a short Entrepreneurship development programme for farmer
9. Discuss the role and importance of the following institutions in promoting, training and developing
entrepreneurs in India:
Create
1. All economy is the effect for which entrepreneurship is the cause"-Discuss.
2. Review the entrepreneurial growth by the communities of south India. 3. What are the problems of Women entrepreneurs and discuss the ways to overcome these
barriers?
4. Discuss the importance of small scale industries in India.
5. Critically examine the growth and development of ancillarisation in India.
6. Discuss the various sources and collection of credit information of entrepreneurs.
7. Briefly explain the recommendation and policy implication for survival of SME's.
8. Discuss the role of the Government both at the Central and State level in motivating and developing
entrepreneurship in India.
9. ―Developing countries like India need imitative entrepreneurs rather than innovative entrepreneurs‖. Do
you agree? Justify your answer with examples.
10. What are the reasons of very few women becoming entrepreneurs in a developing country like India?
Whether Indian women entrepreneurs have now made an impact and shown that they too can contribute in economic development of the country? Discuss with examples.
11. Discuss the ―Culture of Entrepreneurship‖ and its role in economic development of a nation. What factors
contribute to nurturing such a culture?
Unit I
Marketing Management
Formulating Marketing strategies, The marketing plan, Deciding on the marketing mix (Cases), Interactive
marketing, Marketing through social networks, Below the line marketing, International marketing - Modes of Entry,
Strategies (Cases).
Five P's of marketing, SSI Policy Statement
10 Hours
Unit II
Human Resource Management
Human Resource Planning (Cases), Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development, HRIS, Factories Act 1948
(an over view)
Global Trends in Human Resource Management
10 Hours
Unit III
Business Taxation
Direct taxation – Income tax, Corporate tax, MAT, Tax holidays, Wealth tax, Professional tax (Cases). Indirect
taxation – Excise duty, Customs, Sales and Service tax, VAT, Octroi, GST(Cases)
Recent Trends for a Troubled Tax, professional tax slab
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
311
8 Hours
Unit IV
Government Support
Industrial policy of Central and State Government, National Institute and Agencies, State Level Institutions,
Financial Institution
Global Entrepreneurship Monitor, Excise Exemption Scheme
7 Hours
Unit V
Business Plan Preparation Purpose of writing a business plan, Capital outlay, Technical feasibility, Production plan, HR plan, Market survey
and Marketing plan, Financial plan and Viability, Government approvals, SWOT analysis.
Small Industry Cluster Development Programme, National Equity Fund Scheme
10 Hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook
1. S. S. Khanka, Entrepreneurial Development, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Hisrich, Entrepreneurship, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005
2. Philip Kotler, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2003
3. K. Aswathappa, Human Resource and Personnel Management – Text and Cases, Tata McGrawHill, 2007
4. P. C. Jain, Handbook for New Entrepreneurs, EDII, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2002
5. Akhileshwar Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006
To give basic knowledge in obtaining the hookup diagram for different transmitters
To design and implementation of hookup diagram concepts for different applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Learning from observation, knowledge learning, statistical learning methods, reinforcement learning
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Stuart Russell, Peter Norvig , Artificial Intelligence- A modern Approach, Pearson Prentice Hall, 2009
11N0XD NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC SYSTEMS
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
314
1 0 0 1
Objective(s)
To provide basics of neural network and fuzzy logic
To apply neural networks and fuzzy systems to model and solve complicated practical problems
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO4 Conduct investigations of complex problems using research-based knowledge and research methods
including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data and synthesis of information to
provide valid conclusions.
PO5 Create, select and apply appropriate state-of-the-art techniques, resources and modern engineering and
computing tools with an understanding of the limitations.
PO12 Recognize the need for and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life- long
learning in the broadest context of technological change.
Course Outcome
1. Design neural and fuzzy logic controller for various real time applications.
Basic concepts of fuzzy logic - fuzzy if then rules: two types of fuzzy rules, fuzzy rule based model for function
approximation, fuzzy mapping rules – fuzzy rule-based models: Mamdani model, TSK model – fuzzy logic in
control engineering. Introduction to neural network - simple neural nets for pattern classification: hebbnet,
perceptron, adaline- neural network based on competition: fixed-weight competitive nets, kohonen self-organizing
Omron C Series- PM Control (ECmotor) – Siemens (PPI, USS) – Toshiba (Computer Link, Tosvert) – CAN open-
DE vicenet– J1939 – CsCAN – Ethernet IP – EtherCAT (In Future) – Modbus TCP/IP – FTP – ASCII TCP/IP –
HTTP – EGD.
Total: 15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, John Park, Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control, Newnes An imprint of Elsevier publication, 2003.
2. Deon Reynders, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright, Practical Industrial Data Communications: Best Practice
Techniques, Newnes An imprint of Elsevier publication, 2005.
11O0PF SOLAR CELLS
0 0 0 1.0
Objective(s)
To gain knowledge about the solar radiation and solar cells
To implement the application of solar cells
Programme Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
316
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO11 Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering and management principles and apply these
to one‘s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary
environments.
Course Outcome
At the end of the course, the student will be able to
1. Understand various solar cells to generate renewable energy
Solar cell: Introduction - fundamentals of photoelectric conversion: charge excitation, conduction, separation and
collection. Design of solar cell: generation of photo voltage – I-V equation of solar cell – solar cell characteristics –
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
318
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
1. Summarize the concepts of reliability and safety engineering .
2. Select the safety instruments for given application
UNIT I
Safety in Process Plants
Hazards analysis - Energy source – Release of hazardous materials – Fires – Types of fires – Fire extinguishers –
types and handling. Personal protective equipments – Types – Helmets – Respirator – Air purification – Chemical
protective clothing – gloves for heat – electricity and chemical – Eye stakes – Ear marks – Industrial Hygiene –
Principles – Health and safety Ergonomics
9 hours
UNIT II
High Pressure Operations
Pressure vessels – Storage – Handling – Transportation – Storage of liquids and gases under high pressure –
Materials of construction – safety precautions. Explosive chemicals – handling and storage – Testing of such
chemicals
9 hours
UNIT III
Hazards in Industries
Engineering control of hazards and accidents due to fire explosion and natural causes in the Industries – Thermal
power plant – Atomic power plant – mining industries – Fertilizers – petroleum refinery – Guide lines for setting standards for safe equipments and safe operation in the above industries
9 hours
UNIT IV
Safety Education
Types of organization – Safety committee – Safety councils – Safety education – First aid – Principles and methods
– Training
9 hours
UNIT V
Industrial Safety Acts
Legal aspects of Industrial safety – Safety measures in factories act – Mines act – pollution control acts for water –
air and land – child labour and women employee acts
9 hours
Total: 45 Hours
Reference(s) 1. EURO Journals of Scientific and Research
2. IJRRSE (International Journal of Research and Reviews in Computing Engineering
3. Ammerican Association of Chemicals
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
319
11N0RB PIPING AND INSTRUMENTATION
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
To acquire basic knowledge in piping and instrumentation diagram
To enable students to design piping and instrumentation diagram for different application
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
Course Outcomes
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
1. Explain the concepts piping and instrumentation
2. Design piping and instrumentation for given application
UNIT I
Introduction
The P and I diagram: symbols and layout – loop diagram – tagging conventions – line and function symbols –
equipment representation
9 hours
UNIT II
Pumps Pump selection – pressure drop in pipelines – power requirements for pumping liquids – characteristics curves for
centrifugal pumps – system curve – net positive suction head – pump and other shaft seals
selection – examples: Basic neutralizer control system, basic column control, batch reactor control system,
continuous feed and recycle tank
9 hours
UNIT IV
Process design of flow meters
Process design of fluid moving devices – flow meters – process design of orifice meter – process design of rotameter – two phase flow – troubleshooting of fluid flow system
9 hours
UNIT V
Operator graphics
Display of alarm conditions – dynamic elements – dynamos – displays – process performance monitoring – process
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
320
graphic data interfaces
9 hours
Total: 45 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. Terrence L. Blevins, Mark Nixon, Control Loop Foundation: Batch and Continuous Processes, ISA, 2011.
2. R. K. Sinnott, John Metcalfe Coulson, John Francis Richardson, Chemical engineering design, Elsevier
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2005
Reference
1. S.B Thakore, B.I Bhatt, Introduction to Process Engineering and Design,Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007
11N0RC NANOSENSORS
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
To learn the design, fabrication and testing of numerous nanosensors for gas, liquid and bio-sensing
applications
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public
health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of sensors and Transducers
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
1. Identify the most appropriate nanosensors for specified applications
2. Understand the underlying sensing phenomena used in nanosensors
3. Evaluate and interpret the information presented by nanosensors
Unit I
Introduction Nanoscale Science and Technology - Implications for Physics, Chemistry, Biology and Engineering -
3. W.R.Fahrner, ―Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics – Materials, Devices and Measurement Techniques‖
Springer, 2006.
11N0RD AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRONICS
3 0 0 3
Objective(s)
To learn the fundamentals of automobile engineering, automotive applications of all types of sensors and
actuators systems.
Program Outcome(s)
PO1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals and an instrumentation
engineering specialization to arrive solution for complex engineering problems.
PO2 Identify, formulate and analyze complex engineering problems using first principles of mathematics,
management and engineering.
PO3 Design solutions for instrumentation engineering problems and develop Instrumentation and related
system components or processes that meet specified needs with appropriate consideration for public health, safety, cultural, societal and environmental issues.
Department of EIE, Bannari Amman Inst. of Tech., |Regulation 2011|Revision 2013 Approved in 9th Academic Council Meeting
322
PO6 Apply reasoning informed by contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety, legal and cultural
issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to professional engineering practice.
PO7 Understand the impact of professional engineering solutions in societal and environmental contexts and
demonstrate knowledge of and need for sustainable development.
PO8 Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of engineering
practice.
Prerequestie(s)
Basics of Electronics
Basics of Sensor and Transducers
Course Outcome(s)
At the end of the course the students will be able to:
1. Explain the procedure to design key components of sensors and actuators
2. Summarize vehicle Control System applications .
3. Identify and select hardware and software requirements for an automotive control applications.
Unit I
Automotive Fundamentals
Introduction – use of electronics in automotive – Automotive physical configuration – Sensors and actuators:
Airflow rate sensor – Engine crank shaft angular position sensor – Engine speed sensor – Timing sensor for ignition and fuel delivery – Throttle angle sensor – Temperature sensors – Sensors for feedback control – Automotive
engine control actuators.
9 Hours
Unit II
Ignition Systems
Ignition fundamental - Electronic ignition – Programmed ignition – Distributor less ignition – Direct ignition –
Spark plugs.
9 Hours
Unit III
Digital Engine Control Systems
Digital Engine Control Features - Open-Loop Control – Electronic Ignition Control – Electronic Suspension System
– Electronic Steering Control.
9 Hours
Unit IV
Automotive Monitoring Systems
Fuel Quantity Measurement – Coolant Temperature Measurement – Oil Pressure Measurement – Screen and
window system – Door locking and vehicle security
9 Hours
Unit V
Cruise Controlsystems
Typical Cruise Control System – Speed Response Curves – Digital Cruise Control – Cruise Control Electronics – Stepper Motor Based Actuator – Antilock braking System
